environmental impact assessment - himachal …hppcb.nic.in/jaypeebaga_eia.pdf · ·...

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

FOR

EXPANSION OF CLINKER PRODUCTION CAPACITY FROM 2.97 MTPA

TO 3.50 MTPA (LINE-I) AND INSTALLATION OF ADDITIONAL PLANT (LINE-II)

TO PRODUCE 2.50 MTPA CLINKER & 1.50 MTPA CEMENT

AT BAGA VILLAGE, ARKI TEHSIL, SOLAN DISTRICT, HIMACHAL PRADESH

Environment Consultant:

Vimta Labs Limited

142, IDA, Phase-II, Cherlapally,

Hyderabad–500 051, Telangana State

www.vimta.com, [email protected](NABL/ISO 17025 Certified Laboratory, Recognized by MoEF, New Delhi)

December, 2015

(Approved Consultant)

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Project Proponent :

Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP)

(A unit of Jaiprakash Associates Limited)

Himachal Pradesh

Environmental Impact Assessment for Expansion of Clinker Production Capacity from 2.97 MTPA

to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-II) to Produce 2.50 MTPA

Clinker & 1.50 MTPA Cement at Baga Village, Arki Tehsil, Solan District, Himachal Pradesh

Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-1

Table of Contents _______________________________________________________________ Chapter # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________ Table of Contents TC-1 List of Figures TC-5 List of Tables TC-7 1.0 Introduction 1.1 Purpose of the Report C1-1 1.2 Identification of the Project and Project Proponent C1-2 1.3 Brief Description of Project C1-4 1.4 Compliance with Statutory Requirements C1-5 1.5 Importance to the Country and Region C1-6 1.6 Scope of the Study C1-6 1.7 Methodology of the Study C1-10 2.0 Project Description 2.1 Plant Layout C2-1 2.2 Magnitude of Operation C2-6 2.3 Schedule and Approval for Implementation C2-7 2.4 Manufacturing Process of Cement Plant C2-7 2.5 Technical Description of Cement Plant C2-8 2.6 Capacity Enhancement in Clinker Unit (Line-I) C2-16 2.7 Resources Requirement C2-27 2.8 Sources of Pollution C2-33 3.0 Baseline Environmental Status 3.1 Introduction C3-1 3.2 Geology and Hydrogeology C3-1 3.3 Landuse Studies C3-7 3.4 Soil Characteristics C3-14 3.5 Meteorology C3-18 3.6 Air Quality C3-28 3.7 Water Quality C3-34 3.8 Noise Level Survey C3-40 3.9 Flora and Fauna Studies C3-43 3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics C3-62 3.11 Traffic Density Survey C3-68 4.0 Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures 4.1 Identification of Impacts C4-1 4.2 Impacts During Construction Phase C4-1 4.3 Impacts during Operation Phase for Line-I and Line-II C4-4 4.4 Impact on Place of Tourist/Religious/Historical Importance C4-24




Table of Contents


Table of Contents (Contd...) _______________________________________________________________ Chapter # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________ 4.5 Indirect Impact C4-24 4A.0 Environmental Control Measures of Fugitive Emissions 4A.1 Unloading Section C4A-1 4A.2 Material Handling Section C4A-1 4A.3 Coal Storage Section C4A-2 4A.4 Clinker Cooler Section C4A-2 4A.5 Clinker Stock Piles Section C4A-2 4A.6 Storage of Raw Materials and Additives C4A-3 4A.7 Cement Packing Section C4A-3 4A.8 Silo Section C4A-4 4A.9 Roads C4A-4 4A.10 Maintaining Documentation and Records C4A-4 4A.11 Employing of Trained Manpower C4A-5 4A.12 General Control Measures C4A-5 4A.13 Fugitive Emission Standards C4A-5

5.0 Environment Management Plan 5.1 Introduction C5-1 5.2 Environment Management during Construction Phase C5-1 5.3 Environment Management during Operation Phase C5-3 5.4 Greenbelt Development C5-15 5.5 Cost Provision for Environmental Measure C5-18 5.6 Socio-Economic Development C5-31 5.7 Compliance with Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP) Guidelines C5-31 5A.0 Environment Monitoring Programme 5A.1 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures C5A-1 5A.2 Environment Monitoring C5A-1 5A.3 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis C5A-3 5A.4 Monitoring Equipment and Consumables C5A-4 5A.5 Occupational Health and Safety C5A-5 6.0 Analysis of Alternative Technology & Site 6.1 Introduction C6-1 6.2 Description of Alternative Technology and Site C6-1 6.3 Assessment of New and Untested Technology for the Risk of Technological Failure C6-3 6.4 Mitigation Measures Proposed for Each Alternative C6-4 6.5 Selection of Alternative C6-8




Table of Contents


Table of Contents (Contd...) _______________________________________________________________ Chapter # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________

7.0 Additional Studies 7.1 Public Consultation C7-1 7.2 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan C7-1 7.3 Disaster Management Plan C7-9 7.4 Emergency Facilities C7-18 7.5 General C7-20 7.6 Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan C7-21 7.7 Occupational Health and Safety C7-24 8.0 Project Benefits 8.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure C8-1 8.2 Corporate Social Responsibility C8-1 8.3 Employment Potential C8-16 8.4 Rehabilitation of Human Settlements C8-16 9.0 Administrative Aspects 9.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection and Conservation C9-1 10.0 Summary & Conclusions 10.1 Introduction C10-1 10.2 Environmental Setting C10-1 10.3 Project Description C10-1 10.4 Resource Requirement C10-2 10.5 Baseline Environmental Status C10-4 10.6 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures C10-6 10.7 Conclusion C10-9 11.0 Disclosure of Consultants 11.1 Introduction C11-1 11.2 Vimta Labs Limited-Environment Consultant C11-1




Table of Contents


Table of Contents (Contd...) _______________________________________________________________ Chapter # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________ Annexures Annexure-I ToR letter & Compliance Annexure-II EC Letter Annexure-III CTO Letter Annexure-IV Wildlife Clearance Annexure-V Applicable Environmental Standards Annexure-VI Methodology for Monitoring and Analysis Annexure-VII Water Allocation Letter Annexure-VIII Land Use Annexure-IX Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Annexure-X Ecology Details Annexure-XI NOC from Forest Department Annexure-XII List of Fauna Annexure-XIII Wildlife Conservation Plan Annexure-XIV Demographic Details Annexure-XV Emission Calculations Annexure-XVI Greenbelt Development Plan Annexure-XVII CSR Activities Annexure-XVIII Occupational Health Annexure-XIX Baga Mine EC Letter




Table of Contents


List of Figures ____________________________________________________________ ___ Figures # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________ 1.1 Index Map C1-7 1.2 Study Area Map (10 km Radius) C1-8 1.3 Google Image of Study Area (10 km Radius) C1-9 2.1(A) Existing Site Photograph C2-2 2.1(B) Proposed Site Photograph C2-3 2.2 Layout of the Existing Cement Plant (Line-I) C2-4 2.3 Layout of the Proposed Cement Plant (Line-II) C2-5 2.4 Process Flow Sheet C2-10 2.5 Process Flow Sheet C2-11 2.6(A) Energy Balance Raw Mill–Proposed Expansion (Line-I) C2-19 2.6(B) Energy Balance Kiln–Proposed Expansion (Line-I) C2-20 2.6(C) Energy Balance Clinker Cooler–Proposed Clinker Expansion (Line-I) C2-21 2.6(D) Energy Balance Coal Mill–Proposed Clinker Expansion (Line-I) C2-22 2.7(A) Energy Balance Raw Mill–Proposed Expansion (Line-II) C2-23 2.7(B) Energy Balance Kiln – Proposed Expansion (Line-II) C2-24 2.7(C) Energy Balance Clinker Cooler – Proposed Clinker Expansion (Line-II) C2-25 2.7(D) Energy Balance Coal Mill– Proposed Clinker Expansion (Line-II) C2-26 2.8 Water Balance for Line-I & Line-II C2-32 3.2.1 Hydrogeology Map C3-5 3.2.2 Flood Zone Mapping C3-6 3.3.1 Thematic Map of Study Area IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX (5 M Resolution) C3-11 3.3.2 Land Use/Land Cover Pattern Based on Satellite Data C3-12 3.3.3 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) C3-13 3.4.1 Soil Sampling Locations C3-15 3.5.1 Site Specific Pre Monsoon Season Windrose (2015) C3-22 3.5.2 Pre Monsoon Season- IMD Sundarnagar C3-23 3.5.3 Monsoon Seasons– IMD Sundarnagar C3-24 3.5.4 Post Monsoon Seasons – IMD Sundarnagar C3-25 3.5.5 Winter Seasons – IMD Sundarnagar C3-26 3.5.6 Annaul Windroses - IMD Sundarnagar C3-27 3.6.1 Air Quality Sampling Locations C3-29 3.7.1 Water Sampling Locations C3-35 3.8.1 Noise Monitoring Locations C3-42 3.9.1 Locations for Terrestrial and Aquatic Ecological C3-45 3.9.2 Habitats in the Study Area C3-58 3.10.1 Socio Economic Survey C3-67 4.1 Short Term GLC Concentration of PM C4-9 4.2 Short Term GLC Concentration of SO2 C4-10 4.3 Short Term GLC Concentration of NOx C4-11 4.4 Predicted Noise Levels Around the Plant C4-20 5.1 Control of Traffic Congestion C5-6 5.2 Concrete Pavement of Internal Road within Plant C5-7 5.3 Schematic Diagram of Sewage Water Reclamation Plant C5-11




Table of Contents


List of Figures (Contd…) ____________________________________________________________ ___ Figures # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________ 5.4 Photographs-Sewage Treatment Plant C5-12 5.5 Greenbelt Development C5-20 5.6 Greenbelt/Plantation Photographs C5-21 5.7 Greenbelt/Plantation Photographs C5-22 5.8 Existing Environmental Management Practices C5-23 5.9 Existing Environmental Management Practices (Contd..) C5-24 5.10 Existing Environmental Management Practices C5-25 5.11 Arrangement for Co-Processing of Hazardous Waste/AFR C5-26 5.12 Rain Water Harvesting- At Existing Plant C5-27 5.13 Rain Water Harvesting- At Existing Plant (Contd..) C5-28 5.14 Rain Water Harvesting- At Existing Plant (Contd..) C5-29 5.15 Rain Water Harvesting- At Existing Plant (Contd..) C5-30 7.1 Radiation Contours in Case of Failure of HSD Storage Tank C7-10 9.1 Organization Chart at JHCP C9-2




Table of Contents


List of Tables _______________________________________________________________ Tables # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________ 1.1 Production Capacity C1-2 1.2 Details of Environmental Setting C1-4 1.3 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring C1-11 2.1 Silent Feature of Enhancement Plant (Line-I) C2-6 2.2 Silent Feature of Proposed Plant (Line-II) C2-6 2.3(A) Chemical and Trace Element Analysis of Limestone C2-12 2.3(B) Chemical and Trace Element Analysis of Iron C2-12 2.3(C) Chemical and Trace Element Analysis of Clinker C2-13 2.3(D) Chemical and Trace Element Analysis of Coal C2-13 2.3(E) Chemical and Trace Element Analysis of Laterite C2-14 2.4 Line-II Design Capacity of Equipment C2-16 2.5 Design Capacity of Various Facilities C2-16 2.6 Adequecy of Plant Equipment for Clinker Expansion (Line-I) C2-17 2.7 Adequacy of Plant Equipment for Proposed Clinker Expansion (Line-I) C2-17 2.8 Modification in Technical Features C2-18 2.9 Existing Storage Facilities in Cement Plant C2-18 2.10 Line-II Storage Facility C2-18 2.11 Land Breakup of Cement Plant Area C2-27 2.12 Water Requirement for Existing and Proposed Expansion C2-28 2.13 Raw Material and Source C2-28 2.14 Details of Transportation C2-30 2.15(A) Existing Pollution Control Equipment (Line-I) C2-34 2.15(B) Proposed Pollution Control Equipment (Line-II) C2-34 2.16 Expected Noise Levels after Expansion C2-36 2.17 Impacts and Mitigation C2-36 3.3.1 Landuse Pattern in the Study Area C3-7

3.3.2 Land Use/Land Cover Classification System C3-8 3.3.3 Land Use/Land Cover Break-Up Based on IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX (5 M Resolution) Data–21st November 2013 c3-10 3.4.1 Details of Soil Sampling Locations C3-14 3.4.2(A) Soil Analysis Results C3-16 3.4.2(B) Soil Analysis Results C3-16 3.4.3 Standard Soil Classification C3-17 3.5.1 Summary of the Meteorological Data Generated at Site C3-19 3.5.2 Summary of Wind Pattern at the Study Area C3-19 3.5.3 Climatological Data-Station: Imd, Sundarnagar (1981-2000) C3-20 3.5.4 Summary of wind Pattern -IMD Sundarnagar C3-20 3.6.1 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring C3-30 3.6.2(A) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results Pre-Monsoon 2015 C3-30 3.6.2(B) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results Pre-Monsoon 2015 C3-31 3.6.2(C) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results Pre-Monsoon 2015 C3-31 3.6.2(D) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results Pre-Monsoon 2015 C3-31 3.6.2(E) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results Pre-Monsoon 2015 C3-32 3.6.2(F) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results Pre-Monsoon 2015 C3-32




Table of Contents


List of Tables (Contd…) _______________________________________________________________ Tables # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________

3.7.1 Details of Water Sampling Locations C3-36 3.7.2(A) Ground Water quality C3-36 3.7.2(B) Ground Water quality C3-37

3.7.3 Surface Water Quality C3-38 3.8.1 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations C3-41 3.8.2 Noise Levels in the Study Area C3-41 3.9.1 Ecological Sampling Locations C3-44 3.9.2 Forest Types of the Region C3-46 3.9.3 List of Forests in the Study Area C3-51 3.9.4 Predominant Plant Species in Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary C3-52 3.9.5 Details of Recorded in Mammals in Bandli Wild Life C3-53 3.9.6 Details of Recorded Reptilian Fuana from Sanctuary C3-54 3.9.7 Details of Recorded Birds from Sanctuary C3-54 3.9.8 List of Birds Observed in the Study Area C3-59 3.9.9 List of Butterflies from the Study Area C3-59 3.9.10 List of Phytoplankton Observed in the Study Area C3-61 3.9.11 List of Zooplankton Observed in the Study Area C3-61 3.10.1 Distribution of Population C3-64 3.10.2 Distribution of population by Social Structure C3-65 3.10.3 Distribution of Literate and Literacy rates C3-65 3.10.4 Occupational structure C3-66 3.11.1 Traffic Density (Vehicles/Day) C3-69 3.11.2 Composition of Existing Traffic Volume C3-69

4.1 Model Set-Up C4-6 4.2(A) Stack Details and Emission Rates for the Existing Plant (Line-I) C4-6 4.2(B) Stack Details and Emission Rates Existing Cement Plant (Line-I) Clinker Expansion C4-7 4.3 Stack Details and Emission Rates for the Proposed Expansion (Line-II) C4-7 4.4 Short Term Incremental Modeling Results Line-I & Line-II C4-7 4.5 Details of Transportation C4-13 4.6 Outgoing Material Transporation C4-14 4.7 Parameters Considered for Modelling C4-15 4.8 Predicted Incremental Concentrations Due to Additional TrafficC4-15 4.9 Recommendations on Traffic Capacity – IRC C4-16 4.10 Details of Water Consumption and Wastewater Generation from the Proposed Expansion of Cement Plant C4-17 4.11 Expected Treated Waste Water Characteristics C4-17 4.12 Expected Noise Levels at the Cement Plant C4-18 4.13 Predicted Noise Levels at Plant Boundary C4-19 4A.1 Control Measures in the Unloading Section C4A-1 4A.2 Control Measures in the Material Handling Section C4A-1 4A.3 Control Measures in the Coal Storage Section C4A-2 4A.4 Control Measures in the Clinker Cooler Section C4A-2 4A.5 Control Measures in the Clinker Stock Piles Section C4A-3 4A.6 Control Measures in the Storage of Raw Material and Additives C4A-3




Table of Contents


List of Tables (Contd...) _______________________________________________________________ Tables # Title Page # _______________________________________________________________ 4A.7 Control Measures in the Cement Packing Section C4A-3 4A.8 Control Measures in the Silo Section C4A-4 4A.9 Control Measures on the Roads C4A-4 4A.10 Sources of Fugitive Emission C4A-6 5.1 Air pollution Control Equipment C5-4 5.2 Recommended Plants for Greenbelt C5-16 5.3 Plantation Schedule C5-16 5.4 Plantation and Greenbelt Development C5-17 5.5 Budget Provision for EMP Implementation and Monitoring C5-18 5.6 Budget Provision for EMP Implementation and Monitoring For Proposed Plant C5-19 5.7 Compliance with CREP Guidelines C5-31 5A.1 Implementation Schedule C5A-1 5A.2 Monitoring Schedule for Environment Parameters C5A-2 6.1 Energy Conservation Options, Investment Requirements and Possible Savings C6-7 7.1 Category wise Schedule of Existing Storage Tank C7-2 7.2 Properties of fuels/chemicals used at the plant C7-2 7.3 Applicability of GOI Rules to Fuel/Chemical Storage C7-3 7.4 Preliminary Hazard Analysis for Storage Areas C7-3

7.5 Preliminary Hazard Analysis for the Whole Plant in General C7-3 7.6 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index C7-4 7.7 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index for Storage Facilities C7-5 7.8 Damage due to Incident Radiation Intensities C7-6 7.9 Radiation Exposure and Lethality C7-6 7.10 Scenarios Considered for MCA Analysis C7-7 7.11 Properties of Fuel Considered for Modeling C7-7 7.12 Occurrence of Various Radiation Intensities Pool fire C7-8 7.13 Classes of Fire C7-11 8.1 CSR Activities C8-10


to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA Clinker

& 1.50 MTPA Cement at Baga Village, Arki Tehsil, Solan District, Himachal Pradesh

Chapter-1 Introduction

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-1 C1-1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP), a unit of Jaiprakash Associates Limited

(JAL) proposes enhancement in clinker production from 2.97 MTPA to 3.5 MTPA

(Line-I) by optimizing the operation parameters, within the existing cement plant

at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district, Himachal Pradesh. The proposed

increase in clinker production is 17.85 % with no additional cost investment.

Further, it also proposes expansion of cement plant by installing additional plant

(Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA clinker and 1.50 MTPA cement, within the existing

cement plant premises. Line-II will increase the total clinker production from 3.50

MTPA to 6.0 MTPA and cement production capacity from 2.54 to 4.04 MTPA.

within the existing cement plant premises located at Baga village, Arki tehsil,

Solan district, Himachal Pradesh. Estimated cost of the expansion project (Line-

II) is about Rs.1585 Crores.

This chapter describes the purpose of the report, identification of project and

proponent, brief description of nature, size, location of the project and importance

to the region and country. The chapter also describes the scope of the study,

details of regulatory scoping carried out as per Terms of Reference (TOR) issued

by Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi.

1.1 Purpose of the Report

As per the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14th

September 2006 and its amendment thereafter, the proposed enhancement in

clinker and cement production project falls under ‘Category A’ under project

activity 3(b).

Application for prior environmental clearance for the above proposal was

submitted to the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change

(MoEF&CC) vide ref. No. JHCP/MOEF/2015 dated 25th May, 2015 and

JAL/JHCP/HP.Exp/MOEF&CC/2015 dated 25th August, 2015 for determination of

Terms of Reference (TOR) for the preparation of EIA/EMP Report. This EIA Report

addresses the environmental impacts of the proposed expansion and proposes

the mitigation measures for the same.

The present EIA Report has been prepared on the basis of EIA Notification, with

special reference to the TOR conditions received from MoEF&CC, vide letter

F.No.J-11011/1216/2007-IA II(I) dated 15th July, 2015 for clinker expansion in

Line-I and vide letter no: F.No.J-11011/1216/2007-IA II(I) dated 29th September,

2015 for establishing Line-II. Copy of the said TOR letters along with its

compliance is enclosed as Annexure-I.

Based on the TOR conditions stipulated by MoEF&CC, EIA/EMP has been prepared

to conduct Public Hearing and submission to MoEF&CC for obtaining

Environmental Clearance. This report covers the baseline environment status

based on primary data collected from 1st March 2015 to 31st May 2015

representing the pre-monsoon season.






1.2 Identification of the Project and Project Proponent

Project Background

Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant, a unit of Jaiprakash Associates Limited (JAL) has

set up an integrated cement plant (HP-I) to produce 2.05 MTPA clinker and 2.54

MTPA cement at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district, Himachal Pradesh, after

receiving environmental clearance vide letter No: J-11011/26/2006-IA II(I) dated

18th May 2006. EC copy along with compliance is enclosed as Annexure-II(A).

Subsequently, the environmental clearance was amended for augmentation in

clinker production capacity from 2.05 MTPA to 2.97 MTPA vide letter No: J-

11011/1216/2007-IA (I) dated 24th December, 2013 as given in Annexure-

II(B).

Consent to Operate (CTO) for production of existing capacity is given in

Annexure-III.

Present Proposal

Jaiprakash Associates Limited (JAL) proposes expansion of clinker production

capacity from 2.97 MTPA to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and installation of additional plant

(Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA Clinker & 1.50 MTPA cement within the existing

cement plant premises located at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district,

Himachal Pradesh. The details of existing and proposed units are given in Table-

1.1.

TABLE-1.1

PRODUCTION CAPACITY

Description Line-I Line-II

Clinker (MTPA)

Cement Plant (MTPA)

Clinker (MTPA)

Cement Plant (MTPA)

Approved capacity as per MoEF 2.97 2.54 - -

Enhancement 0.53 -- 2.50 1.50

Capacity after Enhancement 3.50 2.54 2.50 1.50

Total Capacity after enhancement Clinker-6.0 MTPA and Cement-4.04 MTPA

Source: JHCP

Need for Project

The Govt. of India’s thrust on all round development in the country, the

requirement of cement is expected to increase to meet the requirement of

infrastructure development.

Jaiprakash Associates Limited (JAL) is desirous of undertaking expansion within

the existing complex at Baga for additional cement/clinker production facility

through operation optimization and by establishing additional plant within the

complex.






To utilize the existing facilities installed at site, JAL proposes to de-bottleneck and

rationalize capacity usage of certain plant sections to achieve the higher level of

production of clinker from 2.97 MTPA to 3.5 MTPA.

The de-bottlenecking involves reconfirmation of Pre-heater / Pre-calciner

operation, main fans capacity and clinker cooler modifications of minor in nature,

without any addition to plant & equipment. However, other sections of the plant

will be able to meet the plant balancing requirement for an additional output of

0.53 MTPA clinker.

Main objective for enhancement of clinker production capacity is to optimize the

cost of production and to cater the gap in demand & supply. The enhancement in

capacity of clinker production will go a long way in maintaining Jaypee’s

leadership in the industry and also meet the growing demand of cement in

Northern Region of the country.

JAL also proposes expansion of cement plant by installing additional plant (Line-

II) to produce 2.50 MTPA clinker and 1.50 MTPA cement within the existing

cement plant premises.

Line-II will increase the total clinker production from 3.50 MTPA to 6.0 MTPA and

cement production from 2.54 MTPA to 4.04 MTPA. Both the Cement Plant (Line-I

& Line-II) with combined clinker production capacity of 6.0 MTPA will require

about 9.25 MTPA limestone and shale.

Limestone mineable reserve in the existing mine and additional mining area

allocation gross up to 355.701 MT, reserve sufficient for 40 years of operation of

6.0 MTPA clinker capacity. Mineable reserve will be increased considering future

expansion.

In order to meet the enhanced clinker production capacity, limestone and shale

mining capacity is proposed to be increased from 3.10 MTPA to 5.25 MTPA from

the existing Baga Bhalag mine area of 331.424 ha located at Baga & Bhalag

villages, Arki tehsil, Solan district, Himachal Pradesh. Earlier Environment

Clearance from MoEF, New Delhi was granted vide letter no. J-11015/11/2006IA-

II(M) dated 7th September 2006 for production capacity of 2.8 MTPA of limestone

and 0.3 MTPA of shale.

Now, to meet the raw material requirement of Cement Plant (Line-II), the

company applied for an additional mining lease area adjoining the existing ML

area in three blocks i.e; Baga Block, Bhalag Block and Samtyari Block over an

area of 172.74 ha with production capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA limestone &

0.40 MTPA shale) at villages Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar, Sehnali (Tehsil

Arki), Solan district and Soldha & Mains villages (Sardar tehsil, Bilaspur district),

Himachal Pradesh. The government of Himachal Pradesh has issued a letter of

Intent (LOI) for limestone and shale mine (172.7434 ha) in favour of Jaiprakash

Associates Limited vide letter, no. Uduyog-Bhu(Khani-4) – 2662009-8669 dated

4th December 2013. MoEF&CC issued TOR vide its letter no. J-11015/182/2015-

IA-II(M) dated 29th July, 2015.






1.3 Brief Description of Project

1.3.1 Nature of the Project

The proposed capacity expansion project falls under Category-A, under section

3(b) as per the prevailing EIA Notification, dated 14th September 2006.

1.3.2 Size of the Project

No additional cost envisaged for clinker capacity enhancement of Line-I and the

cost estimated for the proposed expansion of cement plant (Line-II) including

utilities, offsite, auxiliary services, etc is about Rs.1585 crores. The anticipated

capital expenditure for the in-built pollution control measures is about Rs. 126.72

crores. No additional land required for the proposed project.

1.3.3 Location of the Project

The proposed capacity expansion project area will be located within the existing

plant premises located at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district, Himachal

Pradesh. No additional land will be required for the proposed project. The

topography of the proposed plant site is plain on hill top with a general elevation of

about 947 m to 1522 above MSL.

1.3.3.1 Environmental Settings

The environmental setting of the study area representing 10 km radius from

cement plant boundary is given in Table-1.2. The index map, study area map

and google map of the project are shown in Figure-1.1, Figure-1.2 and Figure-

1.3.

TABLE-1.2

DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING

Sr. No. Particulars Proposed Augmentation

A. Environment Sensitivity

1 Geographical Co-ordinates Latitude : 31°19’26.2” – 31°20’17.0” North Longitude : 76°53'4.0’’ – 76° 54’4.5” East

2 Elevation above Mean Sea Level 1430 to 1500 m above msl

3 Nearest Highway

NH-88 (Totu to Bilaspur) at a distance of 7.2 km in south direction from the site

4 Nearest Railway station Shimla 33 km, SE

5 Nearest Airport along with distance Shimla 35 km, SE

6 Nearest Town/ city, District Headquarters along with distance

Nearest Town – Bilaspur 12 km, W Nearest City - Shimla 33 km, SE

7 Forest land involved (ha) Nil

8 Surrounding industries Ambuja Cement (6.2 km, SSE) ACC Cement Plant (8.3 km, NNW)

9 Nearest River Satluj River 2.2 km, NNW `

10 Seismic Zone Zone-V as per IS 1893 (part-1) 2002

B. Ecological Sensitivity

1 Reserved/Protected Forests 1 Baga PF, 0.4 km, N 2 Khatrul PF, 1.2 km, SE 3 Siarli PF, 1.4 km, E 4 Bajarial, PF, 2.1 km, NE 5 Suin Marora PF, 2.5 km, ENE 6 Mungrani PF, 2.5 km, W






Sr. No. Particulars Proposed Augmentation

A. Environment Sensitivity

7 Sangan PF, 2.6 km, NW 8 Matrech PF, 3.0 km, NE 9 Bana PF, 3.8 km, SE 10 Trohat PF, 4.3 km, E 11 Skor PF, 5.4 km, SE 12 Badi PF, 6.3 km, N 13 Chhabiawan PF, 6.4 km, NNW 14 Gaihar PF, 7.0 km, NE 15 Ghamru PF, 8.2 km, E 16 Bunga PF, 8.3 km, NE 17 Mandlidhar PF, 8.8 km, NE 18 Kufthu PF, 8.6 km, E 19 Buryans PF, 9.2 km, NW 20 Gate PF, 9.7 km, S 21 Bhagadurpur PF, 10.4 km, S

2 National Parks/Wildlife Sanctuaries 1 Majhathal Wild Life Sanctuary (5.5 km in SE) 2 Bandli Wild Life Sanctuary (9.9 km in N) 3 Darla Wild Life Sanctuary (12.2 km, S)

3 Status of wild life clearance Wildlife clearance for exiting plant was recommended by standing committee of NBWL

during its 31st meeting held on 12th – 13th August, 2014. MOM are enclosed as Annexure-IV. Application for wildlife clearance for Line-II has been submitted to DFO Wildlife Division Shimla (HP) vide letter no. JAL/JHCP/Unit-II/WL/2015 18835 dated 22nd August, 2015 is enclosed as Annexure-IV.

Note: All distances mentioned are aerial distances

1.3.3.2 Site Accessibility

The cement plant is located at a distance of about 12 km from Bilaspur town, 35

km from Shimla airport and 33 km from Shimla railway station.

1.4 Compliance with Statutory Requirements

1.4.1 Compliance to CREP Guidelines

The compliance status of the existing cement plant with CREP guidelines is given

in Chapter-5. The proposed clinker plant will also be fully complied with the CREP

guidelines, as applicable.

1.4.2 Compliance to Earlier Environmental Clearance Conditions

The compliance status of the existing cement plant with MoEF clearance

conditions are given in Annexure-II.





VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-6

1.5 Importance to the Country and Region

India’s GDP growth from 2011-12 onwards is expected to grow at the rate of

more than 8% per annum and to sustain this growth, investment in infrastructure

projects such as roads, dams, ports, industries, airports, housing, etc is critical.

Cement & Steel are the basic ingredient in all such projects. Therefore, cement

production and consumption is essential for sustenance of this growth.

Demand - Supply Gap

Growth in cement consumption, in India over the last decade has exhibited a

strong correlation (0.995) to the growth in GDP. This is understandable, since an

increase in National income leads to higher investment in the focus areas of

housing and infrastructure, both of which consume high volumes of cement.

1.6 Scope of the Study

The study area represents 10 km from the project boundary. The scope of study

broadly includes:

Collection of data relevant to the study area and literature review;

Compilation of baseline data generated for various environmental attributes;

Identification of various existing pollution loads due to various activities;

Evaluation of the impacts on various environmental attributes in the study

area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted environmental

impact assessment methodologies;

• To prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures

for improving the environmental quality and scope for future expansions for

environmentally sustainable development; and

Identification of the critical environmental attributes required to be monitored

in post-project scenario.

The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various

publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other

sources.






FIGURE-1.1

INDEX MAP

Project Site






FIGURE-1.2

STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)

Malokhar

Basla

Charahu

Aslu

Chakoh

Parnu

Tansi

Matrech Jhadowi

Ghanna

Cheran

Samlehu

Baga GhawraiBeri

10 KM

Thach

76° 55'76° 50' 77° 00'

NH-88 31°

15'

31°

20'

76° 55'76° 50'

31°

15'

31°

20'

31°

25'

31°

25'

Gari

Daroba

Harnora

Dhar

Ghagas

Sandauli

Ban

Rawa

Changar

Kandar

Malothi

JajarPanali

Sahnali

Pauri

Bholang

Tepra

Mamau

Hawoni

Cholog

Dabar

Kathpur

Bamla

Dunglu

Dagsech

Bag

Behli

Barnun Pasaya

Silha

Rajghat

Shyari

Daseran

Bhanda

Bandla

Chanalag

Magrot

Dades

Juras

Deoli

RopaSamdhar

Kasol

Daudi

Jartu

Bohi

Pata

Kolthi

Ratheh

Siarli

Mandno

Sabar Baadu

Bartha

Kuphar

Cheori

BadnuPati

Ghamru

HalogdaSamal

Bagra

Chouri

Balag

Majhali

Keri

LalagDhara

Kathla

Dal

Badi

Gagal

Barmanan

Panjgain

Suli

SulangSamana

Matianj Kalan

Matianj Khurd

Chamrol

Ropa

Talwand

Ghiyana

Dhar

Gaiharu

Nagri

Sanihan

Barech

Suin

Marora

Chamba

Karyad

Chida

Niholog

Sohra Bhyan

Kian

Kalsua

Dhawahal

Dharsi

Kol Huwani

77° 00'

TROHATP.F

SKOR P.F

SIARLI P.F

KHATRUL P.F

MATRECHP.F

BANAP.F

GATE P.F

GHAMRU P.F

SUIN

MARORA P.F

BAJARIALP.F

Ujra P.F

BUNGA P.F

MUNDLIDHARP.F

GAIHAR P.F

BADI P.FCHHABIAWAN

P.F

BURYANS P.F

SANGAN P.F

MUNGRANIP.F

P.F

MAJHATAL WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

BANDLI WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

SCALE

1 0 1 2 Km

Topo Sheet No. 53 A/15, A/16 & E/3

KUFT

HU P

.F

Kufthu

NH-8

8

Balog

Aina Padyar

Nyu

Mohlar

Naugaon

Janed

Panjel

Panjag

Jabal

Kutal

Sahrah

PariahKagriPardhot

BarpatRopri

Sia

Panjeli

Soldha

Kirfa

Loongari

Torti

ML Area-Existing

LEGEND

Cement Plant Area Road

River / Nala

Village

Forest Boundary

Wildlife Sanctuary Area

Kharsi

SATLU

J RIV

ER

ALI KHAD

Sagithi

Sargohri

Parnali

Kharoti

BadsourA

F

D

E

Bahairari

CB

4

5

1

2

3

Khad

Plant Site Coordinates

1 : 31°20'17.0" N, 76°53'1.9" E

2 : 31°19'47.8" N, 76°54'4.5" E

3 : 31°19'26.2" N, 76°53'10.4" E

4 : 31°19'41.2" N, 76°53'4.0" E

5 : 31°19'57.4" N, 76°53'25.0" E

Existing ML Area Coordinates

A : 31°19'49" N, 76°53'40" E

B : 31°20'25" N, 76°53'38" E

C : 31°20'43" N, 76°53'51" E

D : 31°20'11" N, 76°54'47" E

E : 31°19'01" N, 76°54'31" E

F : 31°18'58" N, 76°54'06" E






FIGURE-1.3

GOOGLE IMAGE-10 KM

10KM

N

Cement Plant

Limestone Mine

Bandli Wildlife

Sanctuary

Majhatal Wildlife

Sanctuary






1.7 Methodology of the Study

Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad along with Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP)

officials had conducted a reconnaissance survey and sampling locations were

identified on the basis of:

Predominant wind directions, expected during the period of baseline monitoring

in the study area as recorded by nearest India Meteorological Department

(IMD);

Topography and location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and rivers;

Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;

Identified pollution pockets, if any within the study area;

Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment;

Areas which represent baseline conditions; and

Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental

attributes.

Detailed field studies have been carried out during pre-monsoon (1st March 2015

to 31st May 2015) covering a period of 3 months to determine existing conditions

of various environmental attributes. The monitoring details are outlined in Table-

1.3. The applicable environmental standards for the project are given in

Annexure-V and the methodology of monitoring and analysis is given in

Annexure-VI.

Environmental Impact Assessment for Expansion of Clinker Production Capacity from 2.97 MTPA to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA Clinker & 1.50 MTPA Cement at Baga Village, Arki Tehsil, Solan District, Himachal Pradesh



TABLE-1.3

ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING

Environmental

Component Sampling Locations

Sampling Parameters

Total Sampling Period

Sampling Frequency

Detection Limit Methodology

1 Meteorology One central location

Temperature, Wind Speed, Wind Direction

3 months Hourly WS: +/-0.02 m/sec WD: +/- 3 degrees Temp: +/- 0.2 oC

The meteorology parameters were recorded using automatic micro-meteorological equipment consisting of Anemometer, Wind wane and thermometer. Review of secondary data collected from IMD station at Sundarnagar.

Rainfall 3 months Daily Rainfall: 0.2 mm Rainfall was recorded every morning at 0830 hours.

Relative Humidity, Cloud Cover

3 months Hourly RH: +/- 3% Humidity recorded using wet and dry thermometer and psycometric charts on hourly basis.

2 Ambient Air Quality

11 Locations

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, O3, Pb, NH3,

C6H6,As, BaP and Ni

Two days per week for 3 months

24 hourly

PM10: 5 µg/m3

PM2.5: 5µg/m3 SO2: 4 µg/m3

NOx: 9 µg/m3

CO: 12.5 µg/m3 O3 : 2 µg/m3

Pb : 12.5 µg/m3

Gravimetric method for particulate matter. Modified West & Gaeke method for SO2 (IS-5182 part-II 1969) using Tetrachloro mercurate 0.01 N absorbing solution. Jacob-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV 1975) for NOX using Sodium Arsenate absorbing solution of 0.01 N absorbing solution. CO was measured by GC method.

3 Water Quality 8 Ground & 4 Surface Location

As per IS:10500-2013 Grab sampling Once during study period

EC:+/-1 us/cm TSS/TDS: 1 mg/l O&G: 1 mg/l DO: 0.1 mg/l BOD: <3 mg/l COD: 0.5 mg/l Ca, Mg, Na, K: 0.1 mg/l Alkalinity, PO4, SO4, Cl, NO3: 0.1 mg/l Coliform:<2 MPN/100ml

As per APHA methods. The conductivity, temperature were analyzed at site laboratory and rest of the parameters were analyzed at VIMTA's Central Laboratory at Hyderabad.

Environmental Impact Assessment for Expansion of Clinker Production Capacity from 2.97 MTPA to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA Clinker & 1.50 MTPA Cement at Baga Village, Arki Tehsil, Solan District, Himachal Pradesh



Environmental Component

Sampling Locations

Sampling Parameters

Total Sampling Period

Sampling Frequency

Detection Limit Methodology

Heavy metals (As, Hg, Pb, Cd, Cr-6, Total Cr, Cu, Zn, Se, Fe)

Grab sampling Once during study period

0.001 mg/l

4 Noise 9 Locations Leq 24 hourly composite

Once during study period

SPL: 0.1 dB(A) Integrated on hourly basis

5 Soil 8 Locations Soil profile, Chemical constituents, Suitability for agricultural growth

Composite sample

Once during study period

EC: ± 0.1 µs/cm N, P, K: 0.1 mg/kg

Analysis was carried out as per Soil Chemical analysis by ML Jackson

6 Terrestrial

Ecology

Total study

area

Flora and fauna Field

observations

Once in study

period

- Through field visits and collected

secondary data. Least count and quadrate method

7 Demography and Socio-economic aspects

Total study area

Demographic profile - - - Through field visits and secondary information sources like National Informatics Centre, Delhi and Census data 2011.

8 Land Use Total study area

Trend of land use change for different categories

- - - Through field visits and secondary information sources like National Informatics Centre, Delhi and Census data 2011.




Chapter-2 Project Description


2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

This chapter addresses the details of the operating cement plant and expansion

by installing additional plant Line-II (2.5 MTPA clinker and 1.5 cement) and

clinker enhancement (2.97 MTPA to 3.5 MTPA of clinker production) in existing

Line-I by optimizing the operational parameters, process including additional raw

material requirement, utilities and services, infra-structural facilities and sources

of pollution, their quantity, treatment and disposal of the waste.

2.1 Plant Layout

Existing Plant Layout

The features of the existing cement plant layout are as follows:

Process departments have been consolidated into comprehensive production

units requiring short conveying distances and elevations and lengths of gas

ducts;

The major utilities and service facilities have been centrally located in respect

to points of high consumption;

Sufficient space has been provided for ease of operation and maintenance;

The lengths of power cables have been minimized by suitably locating load

distribution centers in respect of process departments;

Outward movement of materials from customers/suppliers have been

segregated from internal plant traffic; and

Colony adjacent to plant premises to accommodate employees.

Expansion of Clinker Production Capacity (Line-I) and Installation of

additional Cement Plant (Line-II)

The proposal has been made based on the following points:

Availability of land & infrastructure as no additional land acquisition

involved;

Adequacy of plant equipment, including pollution control equipment;

Availability of basic raw materials; and

Proximity of water source.

Keeping in view of the above aspects, a suitable plant layout has been concluded

to develop the expansion of clinker plant (Line-I) and proposed additional unit

with clinker and cement plant (Line-II) in the existing premises. A site

photograph of cement plant is shown in Figure-2.1 and layout map of existing

(Line-I) and proposed cement plant (Line-II) is shown in Figure-2.2 and Figure-

2.3.






FIGURE-2.1(A)

EXISTING SITE PHOTOGRAPHS






FIGURE-2.1(B)

PROPOSED SITE PHOTOGRAPHS






FIGURE-2.2

LAYOUT OF THE EXISTING CEMENT PLANT






FIGURE-2.3

LAYOUT OF THE PROPOSED CEMENT PLANT (LINE-II)






2.2 Magnitude of Operation

Line-I

The salient features of the operating cement plant and proposed enhancement in

clinker production are furnished in Table-2.1.

TABLE-2.1

SALIENT FEATURES OF ENHANCEMENT PLANT (LINE-I)

Sr. No. Parameter Existing Augmentation Total

1 Plant Capacity 2.97 MTPA Clinker 0.53 MTPA Clinker 3.5 MTPA

2 Process Technology Calcination by state of art 6 stage pre-heater / pre-calciner kiln

3 Land Requirement 166.01 ha 166.01 ha

4 Water Requirement and Source

1700 m3/day Existing allocation of 3500 m3/day from two nallas (Trenda & Padiyar) near their confluence with Satluj river (2.2 km)

No additional water requirement involved. Existing water allocation will be sufficient for enhanced production also

1700 m3/day

5 Power Requirement 30 MW No increase in connected and contracted power load is envisaged

30 MW 6 Source

JHCP has grid supply

7 Project Cost Rs 1500 Crores

No additional capital investment is envisaged

Rs. 1500 Crores

8 Manpower Requirement

956 nos Same as at present 956 nos

Source: JHCP

Line-II

The salient features of the proposed clinker and cement plant is given in Table-

2.2.

TABLE-2.2

SALIENT FEATURES OF PROPOSED PLANT (LINE-II)

Sr. No. Features Description

1 Capacity 2.5 MTPA – Clinker 1.5 MTPA – Cement Plant

2 Process Technology Preheating of coal in 6 stages Pyro Processing and Calcinations in kiln

3 Land Requirement No additional land required (within the 166.01 ha of existing cement plant)


1000 m3/day from existing water allocation. Existing sanction of 3500 m3/day from two nallas (Treda & Padiyar) near their confluence with Satluj river (2.5 km from plant site)

5 Power Requirement Approximately 25 MW additional power is required which will be met form 132 KV Grid line

6 Project Cost Rs.1585 Crores

7 Manpower Requirement 2000 persons during construction 250 persons during operation






Taking into account, reliability and adequacy of equipment the proposed

enhancement of clinker require no additional equipment. A condensed description

of utilities, infrastructure and major equipment is given in the following sections.

2.3 Schedule and Approval for Implementation

Line-I

No major pre-project and project activities. Enhancement will commence after

obtaining the statutory clearance.

Line-II

Pre-Project Activities

It is expected to complete all the pre-project activities viz. clearance,

infrastructure development, order placement of main machinery within six

months.

Project Activities

It is expected that all the project activities till commissioning of the project, shall

be completed within in 24 months, of order placement.

2.4 Manufacturing Process of Cement Plant

2.4.1 Cement Plant

Cement manufacturing principally involves grinding and blending of raw materials

in a definite proportion - a material containing calcium oxide (such as limestone,

chalk, marl) with a siliceous material (such as clay, shale, sand) along with

certain additive or corrective materials (such as laterite) and then calcining the

mixture at high temperatures in a kiln. The resulting ‘clinker’ is cooled and then

ground with gypsum to produce the finished product, Ordinary Portland Cement

(OPC). Gypsum is added to control the setting time of cement. Portland Pozzolona

Cement (PPC) is manufactured by adding approximately 30% fly ash to clinker

and gypsum during the grinding operation.

Dry process of cement manufacturing offers more advantages, particularly in fuel

consumption and is the most rational and logical choice. In the operating plant,

dry process has been selected to manufacture clinker, which comprises of rotary

kiln, preheater and precalciner. The typical process diagram for manufacturing

the cement is shown in Figure-2.4 & Figure-2.5.

In dry process, the raw materials are dried in a combined drying-cum-grinding

installation to reduce the moisture content to below 1%. The drying in the

grinding unit is achieved by using kiln exhaust gases for normal moisture. The

ground raw mix is then homogenized in silos and fed into the rotary kiln. Heat

required for evaporation of added moisture is eliminated in this process. Well-

designed pre-heater having high efficiency, low-pressure drop cyclones and pre-

calciner will be installed. Suspension pre-heater achieves better heat economy

and therefore, fuel consumption in this process is low in the range of 710 kCal/kg

clinker for kiln with six-stage suspension pre-heater and pre-calciner. Due to






improved designs in various machinery, nowadays it is possible to achieve a

specific power consumption of around 62 Kwh/t of clinker. This process is

environmentally friendly and helps conserve natural resources.

Advantages of the Process

Irrespective of the system, pre-calcinator technology yields substantial

advantages over the conventional pre-heater system. The primary advantages so

far as Indian cement industry is concerned are:

Possibility of achieving very large outputs from single production line, within

the transport limitations of equipment by road network;

Stable kiln operation with improved refractory life and higher equipment

availability for production;

Increase of production from the existing dry process kilns to the extent

feasible;

Feasibility of using lower grade coal/fuels in pre-calciner proper; and

Steadier burning operation leading to sustained quality of clinker over longer

period of operation.

In light of the above discussions, the dry process of cement manufacture with

short rotary kiln with cyclone pre-heater in conjunction with pre-calcinator has

been considered for the proposed cement plant.

2.5 Technical Description of Cement Plant

Line-I & Line-II

The limestone is extracted from Baga as well as Bhalag deposits. The material in

definite proportions from the mines is fed to crushing section where the material

gets crushed to a size of 75-80 mm. The crushing section is incorporated with bag

filter house to avoid any dust emission. The material is transported by dumpers

up to the crushers. The crushed limestone is conveyed to limestone stockpile by a

specially designed tube belt conveyor. This conveyor does not allow spillage of

material and avoid dust nuisance and can negotiate elevations and curves easily.

The limestone stockpile is circular and has large storage capacity. The stockpile is

fully covered and houses a circular stacker and reclaimer. Such a system provides

for continuous blending of crushed limestone. In order to manufacture quality

cement, it is essential to have a strict quality control checks during the raw

material stage and in this direction an ON LINE MATERIAL ANALYSER has been

installed just after the crushers and thus regulate the quality variations, if any,

from the mines itself.

The blended material from stockpile is then conveyed to feed hoppers where

sophisticated electronic weigh feeders are installed through which the material is

conveyed to raw material grinding section. Corrective materials which are

required in very small quantity, depending upon the quality of limestone are also

fed thorough weigh feeders to raw mill and in required proportion. The raw mill is

a energy efficient vertical roller mill. The raw mill works in close circuit and

crushes the raw material to pulverized form. The raw meal thus obtained is then

stored in raw meal silo which also further blends the meal. This type of silo






ensures that continuous homogenizing of the raw meal takes place and the

periodic samples are taken for detail analysis.

The raw meal is then conveyed to preheater through bucket elevators. The bucket

elevator, a mechanical transport system, has been selected to conserve energy.

The preheater consists of multi-string cyclone system along with the calciners.

The preheater has six stages as against the conventional five stages. Such a

system has less thermal energy requirement. The raw meal flows down the

cyclones in the control manner and the hot gases which are recovered from the

cooler pass through preheater from the bottom stage. Thus there is interaction

between the raw meal and the material temperature keeps increases before its

entry into the Kiln. The temperature of the raw meal is about 950 - 1000 degree

centigrade before it enters the kiln. The calciner helps in increasing productivity

and has an additional pulverized coal firing circuit which increases the degree of

calcinations.

The kiln is supported on three tires-roller stations having a diameter of 5.80 m

and is 85 m long. The kiln is inclined and can rotate at the speed between 3 to 4

rpm. Pulverized coal is fired into the kiln from the other end. The temperature of

calcined raw meal is further raised about 1350 degree. Whereby the fusion of the

raw meal occurs and clinkerisation takes place. The nodular clinker is produced is

cool down in the cooling zone of the kiln and is made to fall on cooler. The

clinker cooler is of grate type and has the required grate area for quenching of

clinker. Atmospheric air is forced in the cooler under control parameter by cooler

fans. The temperature of the clinker which is about 1100 degree and gets cool to

about 70 degrees plus ambient temperature. The heat thus recovered is used for

pre heating the raw meal in preheater.

The clinker produced is stored in large size clinker silo. The clinker silo has been

constructed in RCC and is covered. For the raw meal and kiln system Bag houses

are installed and have latest designed plasma membrane bags. The emission

levels are maintained less than 30 mg/nm3. For the clinker cooler, ESP is installed

which also operate at the similar emission level.

The clinker from the clinker silo transported to clinker grinding section i.e. roller

press and ball mill combination which is very energy efficient system presently

working. Here along with clinker, gypsum is being added to regulate setting time.

The mill is also equipped with high efficiency dynamic separator for better particle

size distribution and quality control. The cement manufactured is stored in

cement silos and then is packed cement bags through automatic packing

machines for its dispatch.






FIGURE-2.4

PROCESS FLOW SHEET






FIGURE-2.5

PROCESS FLOW SHEET






2.5.1 Design of Raw Mix

Stipulations regarding the various modules required for Quality and Process

Control (QPC) will be maintained. In the sintering process, almost all the coal ash

is absorbed in the clinker. Therefore, the lower the specific fuel consumption,

lower will be the ash absorption.

For dry process kilns with 6 stage pre-heaters and pre-calciners, the specific fuel

consumption would be around 710 Kcal/Kg and specific power consumption would

be around 62 KWh/ton of clinker. The calorific value of coal from the MP/Bihar,

from where coal will be brought, can be taken as <3000 Kcal/Kg and ash content

about 45%. On this basis, ash absorbed in clinker would be about 100% in

clinker. The raw mix composition would be adjusted to allow for this absorption of

ash. A typical chemical analysis of the raw mix is given in the Table-2.3.

TABLE-2.3(A)

CHEMICAL AND TRACE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF LIMESTONE

Sr. No. Constituent Units Limestone

1 SiO2 % 13.47

2 Al2O3 % 1.82

3 Fe2O3 % 0.72

4 CaO % 45.91

5 MgO % 0.83

6 L.O.I % 39.02

7 Cl mg/kg 64.3

8 As mg/kg <0.1

9 Pb mg/kg 1.2

10 Ba mg/kg 14.2

11 Zn mg/kg 35.9

12 Se mg/kg <0.1

13 Ni mg/kg 4.9

14 Cr mg/kg 3.8

15 Hg mg/kg <0.1

TABLE-2.3(B)

CHEMICAL AND TRACE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF IRON

Sr. No. Constituent Units Iron Ore

1 SiO2 % <0.01

2 Al2O3 % 6.21

3 Fe2O3 % 77.42

4 CaO % 0.13

5 MgO % 2.51

6 L.O.I % <0.01

7 Sodium as Na2O % 1.11

8 Potassium as K2O % 0.08

9 Titanium as TiO2 % 1.30

10 Phosphorus as P % <0.01

11 Iron as FeO % --

12 Total Iron as FeO % --

13 Chloride as Cl % <0.01






Sr. No. Constituent Units Iron Ore

14 Sulphur as SO3 % <0.01

15 As ppm <0.01

16 Cr ppm 6.13

17 Pb ppm 10.8

18 Hg ppm <0.1

TABLE-2.3(C)

CHEMICAL AND TRACE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF CLINKER

Sr. No. Constituent Units Clinker

1 Cadmium as Cd mg/kg 2.7

2 Chromium as Cr mg/kg 186.3

3 Copper as Cu mg/kg 975.1

4 Manganese as Mn mg/kg 883.0

5 Cobalt as Co mg/kg 1.24

6 Nickel as Ni mg/kg 13.6

7 Lead as Pb mg/kg 47.8

8 Arsenic as As mg/kg 2.5

9 Mercury as Hg mg/kg 0.1

10 Selenium as Se mg/kg 108.4

11 Antimony as Sb mg/kg <0.1

12 Tin as Sn mg/kg 23.4

13 Vanadium as V mg/kg 18.6

14 Zinc as Zn mg/kg 587.4

15 Thorium as Th mg/kg <0.1

16 Chlorine as Cl % 148.1

17 Fluorine as F mg/kg 79.2

18 Sulphur as S % 0.18

19 Total Organic Carbon % 0.07

TABLE-2.3(D)

CHEMICAL AND TRACE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF COAL

Sr. No. Constituent Units Coal

1 SiO2 % 39

2 Al2O3 % 26

3 Fe2O3 % 9.0

4 CaO % 2.3

5 MgO % 1.1

6 L.O.I % 14.98

7 Selenium mg/kg 1.74

8 Tin as Sn mg/kg 2.59

9 Arsenic as As mg/kg <0.1

10 Nickel as Ni mg/kg 49.3

11 Lead as Pb mg/kg 26.4

12 Cadmium as Cd mg/kg 1.47

13 Manganese as Mn mg/kg 155.3

14 Cobalt as Co mg/kg 2.6

15 Cyanide as CN mg/kg <0.2

16 Fluoride as F mg/kg 18.6

17 Chloride as CL % 0.34






Sr. No. Constituent Units Coal

18 Mercury as Hg mg/kg <0.1

TABLE-2.3(E)

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF LATERITE

Sr. No. Constituent Units Laterite

1 SiO2 % 15.9

2 Al2O3 % 18.7

3 Fe2O3 % 49.1

4 CaO % 0.05

5 MgO % 0.06

6 L.O.I % 19.41

A suitable raw mix design can be obtained by blending limestone, shale and

laterite/iron ore approximately in the following proportions:

1. Limestone : 89 %

2. shale : 10 %

3. Iron ore : 1 %

2.5.2 Raw Material Crushing, Pre-blending Storage and Reclamation

The crushed limestone size 50 mm will be conveyed by covered belt

conveyors/pipe conveyor to stockpiling at plant site. Two-in-line linear type pre-

blending stockpiles will be built up in layers by a single boom traveling stacker. A

traveling bridge mounted chain scraper reclaims the materials in vertical sections

perpendicular to the length of the stockpile thus blending out quality variations.

2.5.3 Corrective Material, Gypsum Handling Storage and Reclamation

Corrective material as well as gypsum would be received by road and manually

unloaded into stockpiles. Wheel loader feed the materials into dump hopper,

which are equipped with mechanical feeders for regulated discharge. The material

is crushed and conveyed to the hoppers for feeding to the mills.

2.5.4 Raw Material Drying and Grinding

Two Vertical Roller Mills (VRM) are provided with hopper corrective materials.

The reclaimed pre-blended limestone and corrective material are conveyed by

inclined belt and distributed by a reversible shuttle belt into respective hoppers.

The mill simultaneously dries and grinds the material to required fineness. Hot

gases from pre-heater exhaust shall be utilized for drying in the mill during

normal operation. The ground raw meal will be air swept to a bag house via

cyclone collector for separation and de-dusting by the mill, exhaust fan/bag

house fan/ bag filter. The ground meal collected in cyclone separator/bag house

is transferred by a set of conveyors to belt bucket elevators for feeding blending

cum storage silo. When the mill is not running, the bag house dust will be fed to

surge bin.






2.5.5 Blending, Storage, Extraction and Kiln Feed

Blending and storage for raw meal is accomplished in blending silo. The blended

raw meal from the silo is aerated for extraction and transported to a gravimetric

flow control system from where it is fed to the kiln in a measured and uniform

quantity by means of belt bucket elevator.

2.5.6 Clinker, Clinker Handling and Storage

A dry process 6-stage suspension pre-heater with calcinator and rotary kiln has

been considered for clinkerisation. Pulverized coal will be used for firing in the

kiln. After pre-calcination of the raw meal, clinkerisation will take place in the

rotary kiln at high temperature around 14500C and the clinker discharged from

the kiln will be cooled in an air quenching grate cooler. The hot exhaust gases

from the pre-heater will be passed to the raw mill during the normal operation or

bypassed directly to bag house for de-dusting. The clinker cooler hot air will be

used in the coal mill after de-dusting in bag house. Cooled clinker from clinker

cooler will be conveyed by deep pan conveyor for storage in clinker silo. A

provision bulk loading clinker for dispatch to grinding units is also made.

2.5.7 Coal Crushing, Grinding, Storage and Extraction

Coal received by road will be directly unloaded for storage in yard. Coal is

reclaimed by wheel-mounted front-end loaders, which feed to a ground level

dump hopper. Coal is crushed in an impact crusher and will be transported by a

set of belt conveyors to coal stacker. The bridge type reclaimer reclaims the

material and is transported to mill hoppers. An air swept vertical mill is employed

for simultaneous drying and grinding of coal. Ground coal from the mill will be air

swept to a bag dust collector for separation and de-dusting by an exhaust fan.

The fine coal is stored in cylindrical bunker equipped with explosion vents as

means of safety. The pulverized coal extracted with the help of suitable

gravimetric flow control system and conveyed pneumatically to the kiln and

calciner for firing.

2.5.8 Cement Grinding, Transport and Storage

Clinker is extracted from clinker silo by a set of gates and transported to mill

hoppers via deep pan conveyors located in underground tunnels below clinker

silo. Gypsum is reclaimed by a wheel-mounted front-end loader and crushed in

the gypsum crusher. The reclaimed material is transported and distributed to mill

hoppers by belt conveyors. Electronic weigh-feeders are provided for regulated

extraction and transfer over a belt conveyor to feed the mills. One vertical roller

mill is provided for finish grinding operations. For de-dusting of cement mills, a

bag house has been proposed.

The separated cement shall be transferred via air-slides and elevated by bucket

elevators to feed the storage silos. Distribution over the silos is by a set of air-

slides. The cement is then packed in electronic rotary packers in dust free

environment and is loaded to trucks by mechanical loaders. The details of main

equipment in cement plant are presented in Table-2.4.






TABLE-2.4

LINE-II DESIGN CAPACITIES OF EQUIPMENT

Sr. No. Department Unit Operating Capacity (8000 TPD)

1 Raw mill (VRM) TPH 2x400

2 Pyro-process TPD 8000

3 Coal mill (VRM) TPH 80

4 Cement mill (VRM) TPH 1x225

5 Packing capacity TPH 2x150 double discharge

6 Truck loading - 3 loading bays per packer

Source: JHCP

2.6 Capacity Enhancement in Clinker Unit (Line-I)

The enhancement of clinker production involves debottling and rationalize

capacity usage of certain plant sections to achieve the higher level of production

of clinker from 2.97 MTPA to 3.5 MTPA.

The debottling involves reconfirmation of below sections:

- Reconfirmation of pre-heater/pre-calciner operation ;

- main fans; and

- Clinker cooler modifications minor in nature, without any addition to plant &

equipment.

However, other sections of the plant will be able to meet the plant balancing

requirement for an additional output of 0.53 MTPA clinker.

The design for capacity various facilities in cement plant are presented in Table-2.5.

TABLE-2.5

DESIGN CAPACITIES OF VARIOUS FACILITIS

Sr.No Particular Description

1 Plant capacity - Existing - Proposed

- 2.97 MTPA clinker and 2.54 MTPA cement -0.53 MTPA clinker (additional)

2 Manufacturing process Calcination by state of art 6 stage preheater/pre-calciner kiln producing low NOx and SO2

All grinding process by energy efficient vertical roller mills

Pollution control by bag filters (emission below 50 mg/Nm3)

3 Details of main equipment

Raw mill 2x465 TPH

Pyro process 2.97 MTPA to 3.5 MTPA

Coal mill(VRM) 2x50 TPH

4 Specific heat consumption 710 Kcal/kg of clinker

5 Specific power consumption 62 Kwh/tonne of clinker

6 Process control Distributed control system comprising of micro processor based control and field instrumentation. Plant operation shall be controlled from central control room

Source: JHCP






TABLE-2.6

ADEQUECY OF PLANT EQUIPMENT FOR CLINKER EXPANSION (LINE-I)

Parameter Units Norms Existing

Installed Capacity

(9000 TPD)

Clinker (10,500 TPD)

Specific Volumetric Loading TPD/m3 6.0 5.14 5.39

Specific Thermal Loading Gcal/h/m2 5.5 5.24 5.50

Kiln Filling % 14-16 12.90 15.81

Retention Time Min 19-23 22 22

Kiln motor power intial torque Kw -- 1247 1309

Kiln motor power (presently installed)

Kw -- 2x940 2x940

Kiln Speed Rpm - 3.8 4.1

Installed Cooler Area m2 - 214 214

Cooler Load TPD/ m2 50-55 46.73 49.0

Installed Cooling Air (Design) Nm3/kg clk 2.0-2.2 2.30 2.2

Source: JHCP

Above table reveals that for specific volumetric loading, kiln % filling, specific

thermal loading, kiln retention time, kiln drive rating and good burnability of

Limestone; existing Rotary Kiln has potential to produce 10,500 tpd clinker.

For cooler loading, installed cooling air & cooler grate area, existing cooler is

adequate to meet the requirement at clinker production of 10,500 tpd. If

required, flow rate and pressure of cooler fans may be increased by variable

speed drives which are already installed in each cooler fan of the plant.

The equipment of existing plant under operation will be adequate for the

proposed enhancement of clinker production. The equipment wise production

details are given in Table-2.7.

TABLE-2.7

ADEQUACY OF PLANT EQUIPMENT FOR PROPOSED CLINKER EXPANSION

(LINE-I)

Description Unit Existing/Operating

Capacity (9000 TPD) Required capacity (10,500 TPD)

Adequate/ Short fall

Limestone Crusher tph 1900 1,530 Adequate

Raw Mill tph 2X465 800 Adequate

Kiln Feeder tph 2x420 750 Adequate

Kiln with PH tpd 9000 10,500 Adequate

PH Fans Nm3/hr 7,39,100 7,00,000 Adequate

RM/Kiln RABH m3/hr 2x10,50,000 18,00,000 Adequate

Cooler with ESP & ESP Fan tpd 9000 10,500 Adequate

Kiln Main Burner MW 202.77 146.3 Adequate

Clinker Pan Conveyor tph 750 656 Adequate

Coal Crusher tph 220 196 Adequate

Coal Mill tph 2X50 80 Adequate

Source: JHCP

Lime stone crusher, coal crusher, raw meal grinding system, coal grinding system

all have adequate capacity. The technical features to de-bottleneck for Line-I are






given in Table-2.8. Details of storage facilities are provided in Table-2.9 &

Table-2.10. No additional storage facilities are required for Line-I expansion.

TABLE-2.8

MODIFICATION IN TECHNICAL FEATURES

Sr. No Technical aspect Remarks

1 Limestone/shale crusher No change

2 Raw meal grinding No change

3 Preheater/kiln/cooler No change (Except speed of kiln can be increased through system already in place)

4 Cooler fan Speed of fan can be increased by variable speed drive, already in place

5 Conveyance system No change

Source: JHCP

TABLE-2.9

EXISTING STORAGE FACILITIES IN CEMENT PLANT

Sr.No

Department Storage Capacity

(Tons)

Recommended Capacity (Tons)

Type

1 Lime stone (Mix stockpiles)

Circular – 82000T

Linear – 25000 T No Change

Circular

Linear

2 Raw meal 24000 T No Change RCC

3 Clinker 100000 T No Change RCC

4 Coal stock yard Coal - 25000T

Petcoke – 9000 T

No Change Circular Shed

RCC

5 Gypsum stock yard 6000 T No Change Linear Shed

6 Fly ash Wet – 4000 T

Dry – 2000 T

No Change Linear Shed

Steel Silo

7 Cement 20800 T No Change RCC Multi

Compartment System

Source: JHCP

TABLE-2.10

LINE-II STORAGE FACILITY

Sr. No Department Storage Capacity (Tons) Type

1 Lime stone (Mix stockpiles)

Circular – 82000T Linear – 25000 T

Circular Linear (Existing)

2 Blending silo 1X24,000 RCC silo (New)

3 Clinker 1,00,000 RCC silo (existing)

4 Gypsum 6,000 Linear shed (existing)

5 Coal 25,000 Circular Shed (existing)

Petcoke 9,000 RCC silo (existing)

6 Cement 1x10,000 RCC Silo (New)

7 Fly ash Wet – 4000 T Dry – 2000 T

Linear Shed Steel Silo

Source: JHCP

Energy balance for Line-I and Line-II details are given in Figure-2.6 and Figure-

2.7.






Project : JHCP (LINE-I)

Mill output : 385.0 mtph @ 15% R on 90 microns Ambient Temperature : 50°C

Mill Feed Moisture (%) 7.0

Mill Product Moisture (%) 0.5

Heat Input relative to 0 deg C

Mass flow kg/kg

Sp.heat capacity kcal/kg deg C

Temperature deg C

Heat kcal/kg Raw Meal

Hot Gas from Preheater

0.712 0.253 278 50.1

Hot Gas dust 0.054 0.231 278 3.5

Recycle Gas 0.558 0.256 98 14.0

Recycle Gas dust 0.019 0.220 98 0.4

Hot Gas from Cooler vent

0.260 0.249 282 18.2

Hot Gas dust 0.000 0.000 0 0.0

Dry Feed 1.000 0.210 35 7.3

Water in Feed 0.075 1.001 35 2.6

False Air 0.153 0.246 50 1.9

Grinding Energy 7.3

Total input 2.83 105

Heat output relative to 0 deg C

Mass flow kg/kg coal Sp.heat capacity kcal/kg deg C

Temperature deg C

Gas Including Vapour 1.75 0.256 91

Material (Dry) 1.07 0.215 91

Residual moisture in dust

0.01 1.001 91

Radiation

Evaporation

Total Output 2.83

FIGURE-2.6(A)

ENERGY BALANCE RAW MILL–PROPOSED EXPANSION (LINE-I)






Pyroprocessing - Mass and Heat Balance


Clinker Production : 10500 TPD

Ambient Temperature : 50°C


Mass flow kg/kg Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C

Heat kcal/kg

clinker

Sensible heat of Kiln Feed - ILC

1.60 0.212 60 20

Heat through combustion in Raw meal

8

Sensible heat of Cooling air 2.30 0.247 50 28

Sensible heat of PH Leak air 0.20 0.247 50 3

Sensible heat of Coal 0.16 0.293 80 4

Sensible heat of Coal Conveying air

0.09 0.231 60 1

Heat of coal combustion in Kiln

301

Heat of coal in Calciner 401

Total input 4.3 766


Mass flow kg/kg

Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature deg C

Heat kcal/kg clinker

Heat of PH Exit Gases -ILC tower 1.93 0.253 285 139

Heat of PH Exit Dust -ILC tower 0.13 0.232 285 9

Heat of reaction excl combustibles 410

Heat Through Cooler Vent 1.28 0.253 336 109

Heat Through Clinker 1.00 0.189 115 22

Heat of Evaporation of

Moisture 5

Radiation Loss from Preheater-ILC tower 43

Radiation Loss from Kiln 24

Radiation Loss from Cooler 6

Total output 4.3 766

Specific Fuel Consumption (Total Heat Output - Total Sensible Heat) Kcal/kg Clinker 702

FIGURE-2.6 (B)

ENERGY BALANCE KILN–PROPOSED EXPANSION (LINE-I)










Mass flow

kg/kg coal

Sp.heat

capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C

Heat

kcal/kg

clinker

Clinker 1.00 0.264 1450 383

Dust 0.05 0.264 1450 19

Cool.Air

(ambient.) 2.30 0.247

50 28

Fan energy in

kwh/t

5

Total heat, in 3.35 435.0


Mass flow

kg/kg

Sp.heat

capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C

Heat

kcal/kg

clinker

Sec.air 0.40 0.272 1097 119

Sec.air, dust 0.02 0.242 1097 5

Ter.air - ILC 0.62 0.270 997 167

Ter.air,DUST -

ILC 0.03 0.238 997 7

Excess air 1.28 0.253 336 109

Clinker 1.00 0.189 115 22

Radiation 6

Total heat, out 3.35 435

FIGURE-2.6 (C)

ENERGY BALANCE CLINKER COOLER–PROPOSED CLINKER EXPANSION

(LINE-I)






Coal Mill - Mass and Heat Balance

Project : JHCP LINE-I

Mill output : 38.0

mtph @ 15% R on 90 microns





Mass flow kg/kg

Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature deg C

Heat kcal/kg

coal

Hot gas from preheater 2.529 0.246 246 153.20

Hot gas dust 0.104 0.205 246 5.30

Recycle gas 0.000 0.256 85 0.00

Dry feed 1.000 0.275 35 9.60

Water in feed 0.177 1.00 35 6.20

False air 0.253 0.246 50 3.10

Grinding Energy 8.24

Total Input 4.10 186


Mass flow

kg/kg coal

Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C

Heat kcal/kg

coal

Gas including vapour 2.947 0.249 80 58.60

Material (dry) 1.103 0.282 80 24.90

Residual moisture in dust 0.011 1.001 80 0.90

Radiation 2.70

Evaporation 98.70

Total Output 4.10 186

FIGURE-2.6 (D)

ENERGY BALANCE COAL MILL–PROPOSED CLINKER EXPANSION (LINE-I)






PYROPROCESSING-MASS AND HEAT BALANCE

Project: 385.0 MTPH @15% R on 90 microns Ambient Temperature : 50°C




Mass flow kg/kg coal

Sp.heat

capacity kcal/kg deg C

Temperature deg C

Heat

kcal/kg Raw Meal

Hot Gas from Preheater 0.712 0.253 278 50.1

Hot Gas dust 0.054 0.231 278 3.5

Recycle Gas 0.558 0.256 98 14.0

Recycle Gas dust 0.019 0.220 98 0.4

Hot Gas from Cooler vent 0.260 0.249 282 18.2

Hot Gas dust 0.000 0.000 0 0.0

Dry Feed 1.000 0.210 35 7.3

Water in Feed 0.075 1.001 35 2.6

False Air 0.153 0.246 50 1.9

Grinding Energy 7.3

Total input 2.83 105


Mass flow kg/kg

coal

Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C

Gas Including Vapour 1.75 0.256 91

Material (Dry) 1.07 0.215 91

Residual moisture in dust 0.01 1.001 91

Radiation

Evaporation

Total Output 2.83

FIGURE-2.7 (A)

ENERGY BALANCE RAW MILL–PROPOSED EXPANSION (LINE-II)






PYROPROCESSING - MASS AND HEAT BALANCE

Project : JHCP (LINE-II)





Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature deg C


Sensible heat of Kiln Feed - ILC

1.60 0.212 60 20

Heat through combustion in Raw meal

8

Sensible heat of Cooling air 2.30 0.247 50 28

Sensible heat of PH Leak air 0.20 0.247 50 3

Sensible heat of Coal 0.16 0.293 80 4

Sensible heat of Coal Conveying air

0.09 0.231 60 1

Heat of coal combustion in Kiln

301

Heat of coal in Calciner 401

Total input 4.3 766


Mass flow kg/kg

coal

Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C


Heat of PH Exit Gases -ILC

tower 1.93 0.253 285 139

Heat of PH Exit Dust -ILC tower

0.13 0.232 285 9

Heat of reaction excl

combustibles 410

Heat Through Cooler Vent 1.28 0.253 336 109

Heat Through Clinker 1.00 0.189 115 22

Heat of Evaporation of Moisture

5

Radiation Loss from

Preheater-ILC tower 43

Radiation Loss from Kiln 24

Radiation Loss from Cooler 6

Total output 4.3 766

Specific Fuel Consumption (Total Heat Output - Total Sensible Heat) Kcal/kg

Clinker 702

FIGURE-2.7 (B)

ENERGY BALANCE KILN – PROPOSED EXPANSION (LINE-II)






Project : JHCP (Line-II)






Temperature deg C

Heat kcal/kg clk

Clinker 1.00 0.264 1450 383

Dust 0.05 0.264 1450 19

Cool Air (ambient.) 2.30 0.247 50 28

Fan energy in kwh/t 5

Total heat, in 3.35 435.0


Mass flow

kg/kg coal

Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C

Heat

kcal/kg clk

Sec.air 0.40 0.272 1097 119

Sec.air, dust 0.02 0.242 1097 5

Ter.air - ILC 0.62 0.270 997 167

Ter.air,DUST - ILC 0.03 0.238 997 7

Excess air 1.28 0.253 336 109

Clinker 1.00 0.189 115 22

Radiation 6

Total heat, out 3.35 435

FIGURE-2.7 (C)

ENERGY BALANCE CLINKER COOLER – PROPOSED

CLINKER EXPANSION (LINE-II)






COAL MILL - MASS AND HEAT BALANCE

Project : JHCP (LINE-II)

Mill output : 38.0 MTPH @ 15% R on 90 micron Ambient Temperature : 50°c




Mass flow

kg/kg coal

Sp.heat capacity

kcal/kg deg C

Temperature

deg C

Heat

kcal/kg coal

Hot gas from preheater 2.529 0.246 246 153.20

Hot gas dust 0.104 0.205 246 5.30

Recycle gas 0.000 0.256 85 0.00

Dry feed 1.000 0.275 35 9.60

Water in feed 0.177 1.00 35 6.20

False air 0.253 0.246 50 3.10

Grinding Energy 8.24

Total Input 4.10 186




Temperature deg C

Heat kcal/kg

coal

Gas including vapour 2.947 0.249 80 58.60

Material (dry) 1.103 0.282 80 24.90

Residual moisture in dust

0.011 1.001 80 0.90

Radiation 2.70

Evaporation 98.70

Total Output 4.10 186

FIGURE-2.7 (D)

ENERGY BALANCE COAL MILL– PROPOSED CLINKER EXPANSION (LINE-II)






2.7 Resource Requirement

For the proposed cement plant Line-II (2.5 MTPA clinker and 1.5 cement) and

clinker enhancement Line-I (2.97 MTPA to 3.5 MTPA of clinker production) no

additional infrastructure facilities are required as the existing facilities will be

adequate to accommodate the additional load. The utilities and infrastructure are

as follows:

2.7.1 Land Requirement (Line-I and Line-II)

The existing cement plant is located in an area of 166.01 ha. As the proposed

cement plant (2.5 MTPA clinker and 1.5 cement) and clinker enhancement (2.97

MTPA to 3.5 MTPA of clinker production) will be processed within the existing

premises, no additional land is required. The landuse for the plant site is under

industrial category and the breakup of land requirement for the existing and

proposed projects is given in Table-2.11.

TABLE-2.11

LAND BREAKUP OF CEMENT PLANT AREA

Sr. No Particular Area (Ha)

1 Plant area and roads Line-I:52

Line-II:8

2 Colony with infrastructure 30

3 Parking area 11.01

4 Green belt 55

5 Space around the plant site 10

Total 166.01

2.7.2 Power Requirement

Line-I

The total power requirement for the existing 2.54 MTPA cement plant is met from

grid supply to the extent of 30 MW. No increase in connected and contracted

power load is envisaged for the proposed clinker enhancement.

Line-II

The power requirement for the proposed cement plant (2.5 MTPA clinker and 1.5

cement) is approximately 25 MW, which will be met from 132 KV grid line.

2.7.3 Water Requirement

Line-I

The total water requirement for existing plant and mine including colony is about

1700 m3/day. No additional water required for proposed clinker production

capacity expansion.






Line-II

The water requirement for proposed cement plant is about 1000 m3/day. This will

be sourced from existing sanction of 3500 m3/day from two nallas (Trenda &

Padiyar) near their confluence with Satluj River (2.5 km from Plant Site).

The break-up of water requirement for existing and proposed project is given in

Table-2.12. The water allocation letter is enclosed as Annexure-VII. Water

balance diagram is shown in Figure-2.8.

TABLE-2.12

WATER REQUIREMENT FOR EXISTING AND PROPOSED EXPANSION

Sr. No.

Particulars Existing Plant

(Line-I)

Clinker production Enhancement -

Line-I (2.97 to 3.5

MTPA)

Proposed Line-II

Total Requirement

Source

1 Industrial

1000 (Cement plant + Mine)

No Change 800

(Cement plant)

1800

Existing sanction of 3500 m3/day from two nallas (Trenda & Padiyar) near their confluence with Satluj River (2.5 km from Plant Site)

2 Domestic & other consumption

700 No Change 200 900

Total 1700 -- 1000 2700

Source: JHCP

2.7.4 Raw Materials and Storage

Line-I and Line-II

The major raw material requirement for proposed enhancement and expansion

will be limestone, laterite/iron ore, and coal. The details of raw materials

requirement, the source and mode of transportation are provided in Table-2.13.

TABLE-2.13

RAW MATERIALS AND SOURCE

Raw Material Existing

Line-I

Clinker

Production

Enhancement

(2.97 to 3.5

MTPA) Line-I

Proposed

Line-II

MTPA

Integrated

Plant

Requirement

MTPA

Source Mode of

Transport

Limestone 4.50 0.75 3.9 9.15 Captive limestone

mine

Pipe

conveyor

belt +

covered

conveyor

belt

Laterite 0.06 0.01 0.05 0.12 Madhya Pradesh Rail/ Road

Coal/petcock

/imported

0.52 0.09 0.45 1.06 MP/Bihar/South

Africa Coal

Rail/ Road

Fly ash 0.41 - 0.5 0.91 Roper power

plants in the vicinity

Road

Gypsum 0.10 - 0.075 0.175 Rajasthan Rail/ Road

Source: JHCP






2.7.5 Transportation

Line-I and Line-II

Transportation of incoming and outgoing material in cement plant will be by

road/rail/conveyor belt. The limestone will be transported through closed pan and

tube conveyor from crusher to plant. Hence, the transportation of limestone will

not contribute any traffic and dust in mine lease area.

Total production of clinker will be about 6.0 MTPA. Out of this 3.0 MTPA will be

utilized at Baga plant and remaining quantity 3.0 MTPA will be sent to Bagheri,

Roorkee and other grinding units. Total cement production will be 4.04 MTPA

which will be transported from plant to suppliers by road. The traffic due to

proposed plant is given in Table-2.14.

Environmental Impact Assessment for Expansion of Clinker Production Capacity from 2.97 MTPA to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant

(Line-II) to Produce 2.50 MTPA Clinker & 1.50 MTPA Cement at Baga Village, Arki Tehsil, Solan District, Himachal Pradesh

Chapter-2

Project Description


TABLE-2.14

DETAILS OF TRANSPORTATION

Raw

material Existing

Plant (Line-I)

Clinker Production

Enhancement -Line-I

(2.97 to 3.5 MTPA)

Proposed Line-II

Total Plant Capacity

Source Mode of Transport

No. of Vehicles

(Trucks/day) (To & Fro)

No of Vehicles (Trucks/hr)

PCU/hr

MTPA TPD MTPA TPD MTPA TPD MTPA TPD

A. Incoming Material

Limestone 4.50 13636.4

0.75 2272.7

3.9 11818.2

9.15 27727.3

Captive limestone

mine

Pipe

Conveyor e Belt + Covered Conveyor Belt

0.0 0 0

Laterite/Iron Ore

0.06 181.8

0.01 30.3

0.05 151.5

0.12 363.6 Madhya Pradesh Rail/Road 21 1 3

Coal/Petcoke/Imported

0.52 1575.8

0.09 272.7

0.45 1363.6

1.06 3212.1

MP/Bihar; Pet Coke from IOCL-Panipat

HPCL-Bhatinda, Bina Refineries; South African Coal

Rail/Road 184 8 23

Fly ash

0.41 1242.4

No Change

0 0.5 1515.2

0.91 2757.6

Roper power plants in the vicinity

Road 158 7 20

Gypsum 0.10 303.0

No

Change

0 0.075 227.3

0.175 530.3 Rajasthan Rail/Road 30 1 4

Source: JHCP * PCU- Passenger Car Units

Environmental Impact Assessment for Expansion of Clinker Production Capacity from 2.97

MTPA to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-II) to Produce 2.50 MTPA


Chapter-2

Project Description


2.7.6 Manpower

Line-I

Additional manpower required for the proposed enhancement will be nil. The

existing plant manpower is about 956 nos including skilled and unskilled workers.

No addition to the requirement of manpower estimated above is envisaged,

certain amount of contract labour would be required for carrying out the activities

such as loading material from trucks, for loading of cement on to trucks and other

miscellaneous works. It is however, envisaged that the actual work of loading and

unloading operations will be given on contract basis which is at practice at the

operating plant.

Line-II

The manpower required for the proposed project during construction phase will be

about 2000 and during operation phase will be about 250 persons. In addition to

the requirement of manpower estimated above, certain amount of contract labour

would be required for carrying out the activities such as loading material from

trucks, for loading of cement on to trucks and other miscellaneous works. It is

however, envisaged that the actual work of loading and unloading operations will

be given on contract basis.

2.7.7 Fire Fighting System for Line-I and Line-II

For protection of the plant against fire, all yards and plants will be protected by

any one or a combination of the following systems:

Hydrant system;

High pressure water sprinkler system;

Foam system;

Emulsifier system (mist formation); and

Portable fire extinguishers.

The source of water for firewater pumps of hydrant network and water spray will

be from the raw water sump. Two electric motor driven firewater pumps with one

diesel engine driven pump will be installed in pump house. Hydrant system will

feed pressurized water to hydrant valves located throughout the plant and also at

strategic locations within the colony.

The electrical sub-station and all coal conveyer galleries and tunnels have

automatic sprinkler protection system. The coalbunker conveyer floors, crusher

house and transfer points and the oil tanks have automatic sprinkler protection.

Suitable fire detectors (rate of temperature rise/heat detector/smoke detectors,

and manual call points etc. as suited) will be provided at all such locations with

necessary communications in the fire control substation, firewater pump house

and unit control room. Adequate number of portable and mobile chemical fire

extinguishers will be provided at suitable locations throughout the plant.




Chapter-2

Project Description


FIGURE-2.8

WATER BALANCE FOR LINE-I & LINE-II




Chapter-2

Project Description


2.7.8 Township

A full-fledged township has been developed for existing plant. Additional man

power required for Line-II proposal will be accommodated in existing township.

Other amenities such as school, community center, guesthouse, health center,

hospital, shopping complex, post office, bank etc are well established and already

in place.

2.7.9 Infrastructure Facilities

The infrastructure facilities near the site needs are well developed with approach

road connecting site and National Highway (NH-88) Totu to Bilaspur for the

transportation of material and equipment, which is about 7.2 km. The nearest town

is Bilaspur, which is located at 12 km (Aerial) from the plant site on W, is well

connected by road and all the basic facilities are available.

2.8 Sources of Pollution

2.8.1 Gaseous Emissions

Stack Emissions - Proposed Cement Plant

In the plant the main sources of emissions will be from stacks attached to raw

grinding units, clinker burning, coal grinding, cement grinding and packing of

cement. The emissions of particulate matters from all the stacks will be limited to

30 mg/Nm3.

Particulate Matter

Particulate Matter (PM) will be the important pollutant from the cement plant.

Oxides of Nitrogen

Highly efficient project burner, based on latest technology, to control the NOx

emissions, has been installed at kiln firing inlet and also proposed Line-II.

Air Pollution Control Equipment - Cement Plant

As per the technical concept envisaged for the plant, the raw grinding and clinker

burning sections are to be considered as a common process unit since part of the

kiln exhaust gas is used for drying-cum-grinding of the raw materials. Kiln and

raw mill exhaust gases are, therefore, commonly dedusted while clinker cooler

exhaust air is separately dedusted. For dedusting of kiln/raw mill, a bag filter dust

collector has been envisaged; while for clinker cooler exhaust an electrostatic

precipitator (ESP) has been considered. The particulate matter in cooler stack will

be limited to less than 30 mg/Nm3. The main air pollution control equipment

envisaged in the plant is given in Table-2.15.




Chapter-2

Project Description


TABLE-2.15(A)

EXISTING POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT (LINE-I)

Sr. No. Source Control Equipment

Major Pollution Control Systems

1 Raw Mill /Kiln Bagfilter

2 Coal Mill Bagfilter

3 Cooler ESP

4 Cement Mill Bagfilter

Other Ventilation systems

1 Limestone feeders Bagfilter

2 Raw meal blending silo Bagfilter

3 Pet Coke Silo Bagfilter

4 Coal / Pet Coke Bins Bagfilter

5 Clinker Silo Bagfilter

6 Clinker transport to cement mill / TP Bagfilter

7 Multi-compartment Cement Silo Bagfilter

8 Packing Machine Bagfilter

Source: JHCP

TABLE-2.15(B)

PROPOSED POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT (LINE-II)

Sr. No. Source Control Equipment

Major Pollution Control Systems

1 Raw Mill /Kiln Bagfilter

2 Coal Mill Bagfilter

3 Cooler ESP

4 Cement Mill Bagfilter

Source: JHCP

Fugitive Emissions

All other dust sources are considered as secondary sources since they are not

process implied. These dust sources may occur wherever relatively dry or dusty

material is handled, conveyed, pumped or extracted. As such, for all these places

high efficiency reverse air jet type bag filters have been considered. To control

the fugitive emissions, the following measures are proposed:

All the conveyors will be provided with conveyer covers and hoods to offset

any trapping of material in wind stream. The height of the chutes at each of

the transfer points and the slope of chutes to be considered to avoid dust

generation;

High efficiency reverse air bag house are considered for raw mill to arrest the

air borne;

The automatic bagging machine with bag filters installed for packing plant;

Bag filter have been provided to limestone, weigh feeder clinker, cement and

raw mill will blending silo are made with closed RCC silo structures to avoid

any fugitive emission during operation.




Chapter-2

Project Description


Unloading of coal from trucks carried out with proper care avoiding dropping

of the materials from height. It is advisable to moist the material by sprinkling

water while unloading;

The sprinkling of water along the internal roads in the plant in order to control

the dust arising due to the movement of vehicular traffic;

All the workers and officers working inside the plant will be provided with

disposable dust masks;

Thick greenbelt developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive emissions;

Bag filter have also been provided to limestone

2.8.2 Wastewater Generation and Treatment

Water Balance

The total fresh water requirement for the proposed plant is about 1000 m3/day

which will be sourced from nearby nallas. The water balance of plant is presented

in Table-2.12.

No process wastewater will be generated from existing and proposed

expansion. Treated sewage water will be used for watering the greenbelt.

The plant will be operated on “Zero Discharge Basis”.

Wastewater Generation at Plant

As the proposed cement plant will be operated on the dry process and air is used

as cooling media, no wastewater will be generated.

Wastewater Generation from Sanitary Uses

The sewage wastewater treated in the existing sewage treatment plant. The

existing STP consist of bar screen channel, aeration, secondary sedimentation,

clariflocculator etc. The treated sewage water is used for greenbelt and dust

suppression.

2.8.3 Solid Waste Generation and Utilization

No waste is generated either in the process or in pollution control facilities. Dust

collected from air pollution control equipment will be 100% recycled in process

and there will be no solid wastes generation in cement plant. Solid waste in the

form of sludge will be generated from the sewage treatment plant which will be

used as manure for green belt development.

2.8.4 Noise Levels

The noise generation from the plant can be broadly categorized into two types

viz. Area and Point sources. All the equipment are designed to comply with the




Chapter-2

Project Description


Factories Rules and Stipulations and will not exceed 90 dB (A) at 1 m distance.

The likely noise levels of machinery are given in Table-2.16.

TABLE-2.16

EXPECTED NOISE LEVELS AFTER EXPANSION

Sr. No. Location Noise Levels dB(A) Place of Monitoring

1 Limestone Crusher 76-80 Operators Cabin

2 Raw Meal Bins 86-100 Ambient Noise

3 Raw Mill – 86-100 3 m from Equipment

4 Kiln String Fan 76-96 3 m from Equipment

5 Calciner String Fan 76-96 2 m from Equipment

6 Coal Mill Main Motor 82-88 1 m from Equipment

7 Coal Mill Fan 85-90 1 m from Equipment

8 Coal Mill Blower Room 85-90 2 m from Equipment

9 Compressor House 82-105 2 m from Equipment

10 Pump House 85-89 3 m from Equipment

11 Kiln Main Motor Area 85-90 3 m from Equipment

12 Cooler ESP Fan 85-90 3 m from Equipment

13 Cooler Area 85-90 1 m from Equipment

14 Cement Mill 85-90 1 m from Equipment

15 Packers 75-80 Workers Exposure

A perusal of the above table reveals that the noise levels from all-important

equipment vary in the range of 70-105 dB(A). High noise levels [>90 dB(A)] may

be recorded near raw meal and cement mills. All these noise generating

equipment will be enclosed and continuous presence of workers is not required at

these equipment. People working at high noise generating equipment will be

provided with earplugs.

2.8.5 Proposed Mitigation Measures of Pollution

The summary of mitigation measures for pollution control are implemented in

existing plant (Line-I) is given in Table-2.17. The below tabulated measure will also

be adopted for proposed expansion project (Line-II).

TABLE-2.17

IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

Sr. No. Emissions Proposed Mitigation Measures

1 Air Emissions For raw mill kiln, cement mill, coal mill, bag house

installed at the stacks of cement plant to restrict particulate matter emission to 50 mg/Nm3 and incase of clinker cooler, ESP of >99.99% efficiency installed to limit the particulate matter emission to 50 mg/Nm3.

Water spraying system near coal yard to suppress dust

generation. Fugitive emission from raw material, storage yard, loading and unloading operations, materials transfer point are being controlled by highly efficient bag filters.

Stacks of adequate height have been provided




Chapter-2

Project Description


Sr. No. Emissions Proposed Mitigation Measures

2 Liquid Effluents There is no wastewater generation in the cement plant.

The domestic wastewater generated in the colony is being treated in sewage treatment plant and treated water is used for plantation

3 Solid Waste Dedusted material from the air pollution control equipment is being recycled in the process. No solid

waste will be generated in the cement plant.

The sludge from the sewage treatment plant is utilized in greenbelt development as manure.




Chapter-3 Baseline Environmental Status


3.0 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1 Introduction

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the

study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study

area covers 10 km radius from the plant boundary. The existing environmental

setting is considered to adjudge the baseline environmental conditions, which are

described with respect to climate, hydrogeological aspects, atmospheric

conditions, water quality, soil quality, ecology, land use and socio-economic

profiles of people. The baseline studies have been carried out for three months,

representing pre monsoon-2015 in the various domains of environment.

EIA notification requires that 10 km radius area surrounding the project site shall

be covered under the study and the same is denoted as study area. As part of the

study, description of biological environment and human environment such as

environmental settings, demography & socio-economics, land-use/land cover,

ecology & biodiversity have been carried out for entire 10 km radius. However, as

a universally accepted methodology of EIA studies, physical environmental

attributes such as ambient air quality, water quality, soil quality, noise levels,

physiography, hydrology, ecology have been studied at selective locations

representing various land uses such as industrial, rural/residential, commercial

and sensitive locations including the densely populated areas, agricultural lands,

forest lands and other ecologically sensitive areas, if any falling within 10 km

radius study area.

This report incorporates the baseline data monitored for three months (1st March

2015 to 31st May 2015) representing pre monsoon season and secondary data

collected from various Government and Semi-Government organizations.

3.2 Geology and Hydrogeology

3.2.1 Physiography of Sutlej river basin near Baga area

The area is drained by Sutlej river, a perennial river which originates in Siwaliks

and flows through the lesser Himalyan ranges before entering in the plains of

Punjab. Sutlej river has a catchment area 57,770 km2, up to Kol dam and flows

through deep incised valleys formed within extremely rugged topography

comprising of hills with high peaks and steep slopes. The highest peak achieves

elevation of 1,888 m while the deepest elevation in Sutlej river in the area is 485

m above sea level.

There are number of streams (nalas) joining Sutlej on either sides but the two

prominent nalas of interest are Padiyar and Treda, both perennial and joining the

river from left hand side. Padiyar nala originates in south eastern side of plant

and lease area and takes northern circular flow joining Sutlej river near village

Padiyar. Treda nala originates in southwestern part of plant area and takes

northern course joining Sutlej river near village Balog.






3.2.2 Drainage

Drainage pattern of the area is dendritic with high stream density due to rugged

topography. Drainage is mostly westerly and south westerly.

3.2.3 Geology of the area

The geology of the area is mainly composed of Shali group of formations of

belonging to Upper Proterozoic to Lower Cambrian age. Shali group has been

Stratigraphically divided in to eight formations as under:

Group Formations Lithology

Sh

ali

8. Bandla

7.Pamali

6. Makri

5. Tattapani

4. Sorgharwari

3. Khatpul

2. Khaira

1. Roopri

Green & purple shales, slate, siltstone, sporadic

limestone and basic dykes & sills

Cherty limestone, grey limestone & quartzites

Shale & slate with or without cherty dolomite

Cherty dolomite with phyllitized shales

Pink & grey limestone with shale bands

Grey dolomitic limestone and algal stromatolites

Quartzites with thin bands of red shale

Shales with bands of dolomite

3.2.4 Hydrogeology of the area

Of all the rocks exposed in the area, valleys having unconsolidated to loosely

consolidated zone comprising boulders, pebbles, gravel and sand mixed with

clays form the potential aquifer while limestones and dolomites form principal

aquifers yielding low to moderate discharge due to its secondary porosity and low

hydraulic conductivity.

Depth to water ranges from 5 to 10 metres below the land surface in the area of

Sutlej river and in valleys while it is deeper, about 50 metres below the land

surface in hill slopes where hand pumps have been constructed at higher

elevation. Ground water occurs under water table conditions (phreatic conditions)

while it may be occurring under sub-confined conditions at deeper depths in

valleys.

No where, tubewells tapping deeper depths have been constructed. Water supply

in villages is either from springs or by hand pumps. Hand pumps have been

constructed by ODEX method up to average depth of 60 to 80 metres. Hand

pumps yield on average 500 to 1,000 litres per hour.






Nature of Occurrence of Ground Water

Ground water occurs under water table conditions and is transmitted alluvial zone

and through the fractures, joints and bedding planes of limestones and dolomites

in valleys. The limestones and dolomites being hard and fine grained are

impervious in nature and do not have primary porosity. The only porosity which is

developed due to secondary openings and is referred as secondary porosity or

fracture porosity. The secondary porosity decreases with depth due to overlying

weight of the rocks which reduces the secondary openings. Shales are

intercalated within limestones and dolomites and have very low hydraulic

conductivity and yield limited quantity of water through cleavage and bedding

planes.

Movement of Ground Water

As indicated earlier, ground water movement is controlled mainly by the

secondary porosity of limestone, intercalated with shales and dolomites. A review

of the topography and drainage pattern reveals that the general slope of Baga-

Bhalag area is towards north and northwest. The ground water flow also follows

the topography and surface water flow direction and moves in northern and north

western direction. Springs are common and form the main source of water supply

and are structurally and stratigraphically controlled. Rainfall falling on limestone

hill tops, gets percolated through limestones due to joints and bedding planes,

seeps out as springs at the contact of shales where further percolation is not

possible due to its very low hydraulic conductivity. Similarly there are few springs

which have originated along fault planes.

Nature of Hydraulic Conductivity

The principal aquifers of the area are mainly limestone and dolomites and the

hydraulic conductivity is developed due to secondary openings like joints,

fractures, bedding and cleavage planes and weathered zones. Despite all these

water receptacles, the hydraulic conductivity of consolidated sedimentaries

remains low and that too decreases with depth.

Yield of Wells

There are no tubewells and open dugwells in the buffer zone except hand pumps

tapping limestone and dolomites used for drinking purpose in villages. Hand

pumps have been constructed by the government by deploying DTH rigs up to

average depth of 60 to 80 metres. The yield of such hand pumps is not much and

is just sufficient to meet the drinking water requirement. The yield of such hand

pumps range from 500 to 1000 litres per hour of potable quality of water. There

are few springs which are used for drinking and its surplus water is used for

irrigation in lower reaches.

3.2.5 Ground Water Recharge

The main source of ground water recharge is by the rainfall by direct percolation

to the zone of saturation. As already indicated, there is well developed drainage

in the area due to moderate rainfall and loamy clay soils. A significant part of the






rainfall is lost as runoff from the area while a limited percentage of rainfall

therefore reaches zone of saturation and becomes the part of ground water

storage after meeting the evaporation and and evapo-transpiration losses.

Present Status Of Ground Water Development

The hydrogeology report was already prepared for the adjacent mine area and

the same have been taken as a base and details are provided in subsequent

section.

The total ground water recharge of 0.24 mcm, the ground water discharge by a

spring and hand pumps is only 0.037 mcm. The project area lies in safe category

as the against the long term ground water recharge of 21.75 mcm, the ground

water discharge by hand pumps and springs is only 2.05 mcm indicating the

ground water development status around 10%.

Although, the state ground water organization jointly with Central Ground Water

Board (CGWB) has not yet started regular monitoring of the hydrological network

system in the state as there is limited ground water abstraction by tubewells. The

general impression is that this part of the state lies in safe category of ground

water development.

The general findings of the state ground water organization and CGWB have

indicated that present status of ground water development is less than 20% and

therefore lies in safe category. The findings of this study for the buffer zone also

matches with the observations of the CGWB & state ground water unit.

Hydrogeology map is shown in Figure-3.2.1. The study area falls under Zone-V

which comes under least to moderately seismic category as per IS-1893 (Part-I)

2002. The map indicating flood prone zones in India is shown in Figure-3.2.2.






FIGURE-3.2.1

HYDROGEOLOGY MAP

Project Site






FIGURE-3.2.2

FLOOD ZONE MAPPING

Project Site






3.3 Land Use Studies

The objectives of land use studies are:

To determine the present land use pattern;

To analyze the impacts on land use due to plant activities in the study area;

and

To give recommendations for optimizing the future land use pattern vis-a-vis

growth of plant activities in the study area and its associated impacts.

3.3.1 Methodology

For the study of land use, literature review of various secondary sources such as

District Census Handbooks, regional maps regarding topography, zoning

settlement, industry, forest etc., were taken. The data was collected from various

sources like district census handbook, revenue records, state and central

government offices and Survey of India (SOI) topo sheets and also through

primary field surveys.

3.3.2 Land use Based on Secondary Data

Based on the census report, 10 km radial distance around this plant boundary has

been considered in the study. These areas were studied in detail to get the idea

of land use pattern in the study area. The land use census data 2011 is yet to be

published and the land use pattern of the study area as per 2001 Census is

presented in Table-3.3.1. The village wise land use data is presented in

Annexure-VIII.

TABLE-3.3.1

LAND USE PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No

Particulars of Land use 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km Area %

1 Forest Land 1548 8588 5594 15730 40.94

2 Land under Cultivation

a) Irrigation Land 179 904 715 1798 4.68

b) Un Irrigated Land 634 2627 3019 6280 16.35

3 Cultivable Waste Land 2237 1943 3393 7573 19.71

4 Area not Available for Cultivation 972 3162 2903 7037 18.32

Total Area 5570 17224 15624 38418 100.00

Source: District Census Hand Book –2001

Forest

The revenue forestland under the study area consists 15730 ha (40.94%) of the

total geographic area.

Land under Cultivation

Altogether 8078 ha cultivable land (irrigated and un-irrigated) was observed in

the study area. The irrigated land admeasures to about 1798 ha in the study area

which works out to be 4.68 % of total study area. The un-irrigated land

admeasures about 6280 ha and works out to about 16.35 % of the total study






area.

Cultivable Waste

This land includes that land, which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant

during the past 5 years in succession. Such lands may either be fallows or

covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. Lands under thatching grass,

bamboo bushes, other grooves useful for fuel etc., and all grazing lands and

village common lands are also included in this category. The study area

comprises about 19.71% cultivable wastelands.

Land not available for Cultivation

The land not available for cultivation is 18.32 % of the total study area.

3.3.3 Land Use Pattern based on Remote Sensing Data

Remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and interpreted for the 10 km

radius study area for analyzing the land use pattern of the study area. Based on

the satellite data land use/land cover maps have been prepared.

3.3.3.1Land Use/Land Cover Classification System

The present land use/land cover maps were prepared based on the classification

system of national standards. For explanation for each of the land use category

the details as given in Table-3.3.2 were considered.

TABLE-3.3.2

LAND USE/LAND COVER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Sr. No. Level-1 Level-2

1 Built-up Land Town/cities

Villages

Institution/Industry/Godown etc

Plotted Area/Layout

2 Agriculture Land Crop Land

Plantations

Fallow

3 Forest Evergreen/Semi evergreen

Deciduous

Forest Plantation

4 Wastelands Rocky/Stony Waste

Land with /without scrubs

Saline/sandy & Marshy/swampy

5 Water Bodies River/Stream

Lake/Reservoir/Tanks

6 Others Orchard/Other Plantation

Shifting cultivation

Salt Pans, Snow covered/Glacial

Barren/Vacant Land

3.2.3.2 Data Requirements

IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX (5 m resolution) was acquired for 13th February 2014






and was used for the mapping and interpretation. Besides, other collateral data

as available in the form of maps, charts, census records, other reports and

especially topographical survey of India maps are used. In addition to this,

ground truth survey was also conducted to verify and confirm the ground

features.

3.3.4.3 Methodology

The methodology adopted for preparation of land use/land cover thematic map is

monoscopic visual interpretation of geocoded scenes of IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX

(5 m resolution) and field observations are taken. The various steps involved in

the study are preparatory field work, field survey and post field work.

3.3.3.4 Pre-field Interpretation of Satellite Data

The False Colour Composite (FCC) of IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX (5 m resolution)

satellite data used for pre-field interpretation work. Taking the help of topo-

sheets, geology and geomorphology and by using the image elements the

features are identified and delineated the boundaries roughly. Each feature is

identified on image by their image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape,

size, pattern and association. A tentative legend in terms of land cover and land

use, physiography and erosion was formulated. The sample areas for field check

are selected covering all the physiographic, land use/land cover feature cum

image characteristics.

Ground Truth Collection

Both topo-sheets and imagery were taken for field verification and a transverse

plan using existing road network was made to cover as many representative

sample areas as possible to observe the broad land use features and to adjust the

sample areas according to field conditions. Detailed field observations and

investigations were carried out and noted the land use features on the imagery.

Post Field Work

The base maps of the study area were prepared, with the help of Survey of India

Topo-sheets. Preliminary interpreted land use and the land cover features

boundaries from IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX (5 m resolution) False Colour

Composite were modified in light of field information and the final thematic details

were transferred onto the base maps. The final interpreted and classified

thematic map was catrographed. The cartographic map was coloured with

standard colour coding and detailed description of feature with standard symbols.

All the classes noted and marked by the standard legend on the map.

3.3.3.5 Final Output

The final output would be the land use/land cover map numerals were given

different colour code for each category as shown in map. Area estimation of all

features of land use/land cover categories was noted.

3.3.3.6 Observations






The following are the main interpreted land use/land cover classes of the study

area and their respective areas are given in hectares in Table-3.3.3 for the year

2013. The thematic map and land use pattern within 10 km radius based on IRS

Resourcesat 2 L4FMX (5 m resolution) for 21st November 2013 are shown in

Figure-3.3.1 and 3.3.2 respectively. Digital elevation model of the study area

(10 km radius) is shown in Figure-3.3.3.

TABLE-3.3.3

LAND USE/LAND COVER BREAK-UP BASED ON IRS RESOURCESAT 2 L4FMX

(5 M RESOLUTION) DATA–21st NOVEMBER 2013

Sr. No.

Level-I Level-II Area

(Hectares) Area (%)

1 Built-up Land

1.1 Settlements 1461 4.00

1.2 Industry/Institutional Land 261 0.72

2 Forest Protected/Reserved

2.1 Dense/Open Forest 3737 10.23

2.2 Degraded Scrub Land 753 2.06

2.3 Forest Blank 143 0.39

Others

2.4 Dense/Mixed Jungle 345 0.94

3 Agricltural Land

3.1 Plantation 6 0.02

3.2 Agriculture Land/Single Crop 2072 5.67

3.3 Fallow Land 5539 15.17

4 Waste Land

4.1 Land with/without Scrub 21515 58.92

4.2 Rocky/Stony/Barren Land 24 0.07

4.3 Quarry/Mining Land 249 0.68

5 Water Body

5.1 Stream/River 410 1.12

5.2 Tank/Reservoir/Pond 1 0.00

Total 36515 100.00

Source: IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX (5 m resolution) Data – 21st November 2013






FIGURE-3.3.1

THEMATIC MAP OF STUDY AREA IRS RESOURCESAT 2 L4FMX (5 M

RESOLUTION)






FIGURE-3.3.2

LAND USE/LAND COVER PATTERN BASED ON SATELLITE DATA






FIGURE-3.3.3

DIGITAL ELEVATION MODEL (DEM)






3.4 Soil Characteristics

It is essential to determine the potentiality of soil in the area and to identify the

impacts of urbanization on soil quality. Accordingly, the soil quality assessment

has been carried out.

3.4.1 Data Generation

The sampling locations have been identified with the following objectives:

To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area;

To determine the impact of proposed expansion project on soil characteristics;

and

To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural

productivity point of view.

For studying soil characteristics of the region, soil sampling locations were

selected to assess the existing soil conditions in and around the project area

representing various land use types. The physical, chemical and heavy metal

concentrations were determined. The samples were collected using ramming a

core cutter into the soil up to a depth of 90 cm.

The present study on the soil profile establishes the baseline characteristics. Eight

soil samples were collected from the study area. At each location, soil samples

were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm below

the surface and homogenized. The homogenized samples were analyzed for

physical and chemical characteristics.

The details of the soil sampling locations are given in Table-3.4.1 and shown in

Figure-3.4.1.

TABLE-3.4.1

DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code No. Location Distance w.r.t. Plant

Boundary (Km) Direction

S1 Cement Plant Site - -

S2 ML Area 0.5 NE

S3 Changar Village 2.0 W

S4 Kasol Village 5.2 NW

S5 Beri Village 4.1 E

S6 Siarli Village 4.9 SE

S7 Sulang Village 8.9 S

S8 Kharsi Village 1.0 SW






FIGURE-3.4.1

SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Malokhar

Basla

Charahu

Aslu

Chakoh

Parnu

Tansi

Matrech Jhadowi

Ghanna

Cheran

Samlehu

Baga GhawraiBeri

10 KM

Thach

76° 55'76° 50' 77° 00'

NH-88 31°

15'

31°

20'

76° 55'76° 50'

31°

15'

31°

20'

31°

25'31°

25'

Gari

Daroba

Harnora

Dhar

Ghagas

Sandauli

Ban

Rawa

Changar

Kandar

Malothi

JajarPanali

Sahnali

PauriBholang

Tepra

Mamau

Hawoni

Cholog

Dabar

Kathpur

Bamla

Dunglu

Dagsech

Bag

Behli

BarnunPasaya

Silha

Rajghat

Shyari

Daseran

Bhanda

Bandla

Chanalag

Magrot

Dades

Juras

Deoli

RopaSamdhar

Kasol

Daudi

Jartu

Bohi

Pata

Kolthi

Ratheh

Siarli

Mandno

Sabar Baadu

Bartha

Kuphar

Cheori

BadnuPati

Ghamru

HalogdaSamal

Bagra

Chouri

Balag

Majhali

Keri

LalagDhara

Kathla

Dal

Badi

Gagal

Barmanan

Panjgain

Suli

SulangSamana

Matianj Kalan

Matianj Khurd

Chamrol

Ropa

Talwand

Ghiyana

Dhar

Gaiharu

Nagri

Sanihan

Barech

Suin

Marora

Chamba

Karyad

Chida

Niholog

Sohra Bhyan

Kian

Kalsua

Dhawahal

Dharsi

Kol Huwani

77° 00'

TROHATP.F

SKOR P.F

SIARLI P.F

KHATRUL P.F

MATRECHP.F

BANA

P.F

GATE P.F

GHAMRU

P.F

SUIN

MARORA P.F

BAJARIALP.F

Ujra P.F

BUNGA P.F

MUNDLIDHAR

P.F

GAIHAR P.F

BADI P.FCHHABIAWAN

P.F

BURYANS

P.F

SANGAN P.F

MUNGRANIP.F

P.F

MAJHATAL WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

BANDLI WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

SCALE

1 0 1 2 Km


KUFT

HU P

.F

Kufthu

NH-8

8

Balog

Aina Padyar

Nyu

Mohlar

Naugaon

Janed

Panjel

Panjag

Jabal

Kutal

Sahrah

PariahKagriPardhot

BarpatRopri

Sia

Panjeli

Soldha

Kirfa

Loongari

Torti

ML Area-Existing

LEGEND


River / Nala

Village

Forest Boundary


Kharsi

SATLUJ R

IVER

ALI KHAD

Sagithi

Sargohri

Parnali

Kharoti

Badsour

Bahairari Khad

Soil Sampling Locations

S1

S2

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S3






3.4.2 Baseline Soil Status

The soil characteristics are shown in Table-3.4.2. The results are compared with

standard soil classification given in Table-3.4.3.

TABLE-3.4.2 (A)

SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS

Sr. No. Parameters UOM S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

1 pH (1:5 soil water extract) --- 8.1 7.7 7.9 7.4 8.2

2 Electrical Conductivity (1:5 soil water extract)

µS/cm 236 186 275 210 295

3 Texture --- Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

4 Sand % 43 42 46 38 39

5 Silt % 24 22 20 25 25

6 Clay % 33 36 34 37 36

7 Bulk Density g/cc 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.0

8 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca Mg/kg 2348 4520 3026 2956 3310

9 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg

Mg/kg 195 745 586 303 625

10 Exchangeable Sodium as Na Mg/kg 120 145 95 130 140

11 Available Potassium as K Kg/ha 276 220 196 285 197

12 Available Phosphorus as P Kg/ha 46.7 36.4 45.8 49.6 44.3

13 Available Nitrogen as N Kg/ha 358 305 290 379 285

14 Organic Matter % 1.48 1.12 1.59 1.0 1.77

15 Organic Carbon % 0.86 1.23 0.92 0.58 1.03

16 Water soluble Chlorides as Cl Mg/kg 260 270 143 290 230

17 Water soluble Sulphates as SO4 Mg/kg 107 58 76 93 172

18 Sodium Absorption Ratio --- 0.32 0.26 0.21 0.30 0.29

19 Aluminum % 1.37 1.36 1.23 2.76 1.34

20 Total Iron % 1.21 1.26 1.11 2.45 1.20

21 Manganese Mg/kg 286 256 685 746 295

22 Boran Mg/kg 16 32 25 19 19

23 Zinc Mg/kg 45 73 85 103 44

TABLE-3.4.2 (B)

SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS

Sr. No. Parameters UOM S6 S7 S8

1 pH (1:5 soil water extract) --- 7.6 8.0 7.8

2 Electrical Conductivity (1:5 soil water extract)

µS/cm 265 426 354

3 Texture --- Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

4 Sand % 47 43 41

5 Silt % 20 22 25

6 Clay % 33 35 34

7 Bulk Density g/cc 1.1 1.1 1.0

8 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca Mg/kg 2476 6455 3520

9 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg Mg/kg 435 270 350

10 Exchangeable Sodium as Na Mg/kg 110 85 90

11 Available Potassium as K Kg/ha 245 255 253






Sr. No. Parameters UOM S6 S7 S8

12 Available Phosphorus as P Kg/ha 63.4 56.1 63.2

13 Available Nitrogen as N Kg/ha 310 325 318

14 Organic Matter % 1.65 0.98 0.89

15 Organic Carbon % 0.96 0.57 0.52

16 Water soluble Chlorides as Cl Mg/kg 250 270 220

17 Water soluble Sulphates as SO4 Mg/kg 130 73 120

18 Sodium Absorption Ratio --- 0.27 0.14 0.19

19 Aluminum % 0.34 0.31 0.13

20 Total Iron % 0.15 0.18 0.11

21 Manganese Mg/kg 135 170 189

22 Boran Mg/kg 19.7 11 25

23 Zinc Mg/kg 22 25 15

3.4.2.1 Observations

It has been observed that the pH of the soil in the study area varied from 7.4

to 8.2. The maximum pH value of 8.2 was observed at S5 where as the

minimum value of 7.4 was observed at S4.

The electrical conductivity was observed to range from 186 µmhos/cm to 426

µmhos/cm with the maximum observed at S7 with the minimum observed in

S2.

The nitrogen value varies from 285-379 kg/ha. The nitrogen content in the

study area falls in sufficient category.

The phosphorus values varies from 36.4 to 63.4 kg/ha, indicating that the

phosphorus content in the study area falls in medium to on an avg. sufficient

category.

The potassium values varies from 196 to 285 kg/ha. The potassium content in

the study area falls in medium to average category.

The organic carbon value varies from 0.52 % to 1.23 %. The organic carbon

content in the study area falls in very less to sufficient category.

TABLE-3.4.3

STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION

Sr. No. Soil Test Classification

1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic

4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic

5.51-6.00 Moderately acidic

6.01-6.50 Slightly acidic

6.51-7.30 Neutral

7.31-7.80 Slightly alkaline

7.81-8.50 Moderately alkaline

8.51-9.00 Strongly alkaline

>9.00 Very strongly alkaline






Sr. No. Soil Test Classification

2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity

(ppm)

(1 ppm =640 mho/cm)

Upto 1.00 Average

1.01-2.00 harmful to germination

2.01-3.00 Harmful to crops

(sensitive to salts)

3 Organic Carbon Upto 0.20: Very less

0.21-0.40: Less

0.41-0.50: Medium,

0.51-0.80: On an avg. sufficient

0.81-1.00: Sufficient

>1.00 : More than sufficient

4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Up to 50 Very less

51-100 Less

101-150 Good

151-300 Better

>300 Sufficient

5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Upto 15 Very less

16-30 Less

31-50 Medium,

51-65 On an avg. sufficient

66-80 Sufficient

>80 More than sufficient

6 Potash (Kg/ha) 0 -120 Very less

120-180 Less

181-240 Medium

241-300 Average

301-360 Better

>360 More than sufficient Source: Hand Book of Agriculture, ICAR, New Delhi

3.5 Meteorology

The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is very useful for

proper interpretation of the baseline information as well as for input prediction

models for air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological parameters

will also play an important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of

the region.

The year may broadly be divided into four seasons:

Winter season : December to February

Pre-monsoon season : March to May

Monsoon season : June to September

Post-monsoon season : October to November

On-site monitoring was undertaken for various meteorological variables in order

to generate the site-specific data. Data was collected at site every hour

continuously from 1st March 2015 to 31st May 2015. The generated data then

compared with the meteorological data generated by nearest India Meteorological

Department (IMD) station located at Sundarnagar. The available meteorological

data of IMD, Sundarnagar station has been collected and analyzed.






3.5.1 Methodology

Site specific data covering micro-meteorological parameters were recorded on

hourly basis during the study period and comprises of parameters like wind

speed, wind direction (from 0 to 360 degrees), temperature, relative humidity,

atmospheric pressure, rainfall and cloud cover. The minimum, maximum and

average values for all the parameters except wind speed and direction are

presented in Table-3.5.1.

TABLE-3.5.1

SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT SITE

Month Temperature

(0C) Relative Humidity

(%)

Rainfall (mm)

Atmospheric Pressure (mb)

Min Max Min Max Min Max

March, 2015 13.1 26.3 69 88 34 874.3 881.2

April, 2015 18.9 31.7 58 75 46 881.9 883.5

May, 2015 20.3 38.5 46 63 0.8 879.3 884.9

Range 13.1 – 38.5 46 - 88 80.8 874.3 – 884.9

Wind Speed/ Directions

The windrose for the study period representing pre monsoon season is shown in

Figure-3.5.1 and presented in Table-3.5.2.

TABLE-3.5.2

SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN AT THE STUDY AREA

Season Pre Monsoon season 2015

First Predominant Wind Direction NW (9.6%)

Second Predominant Wind Direction SW (7.9%)

Calm conditions (%) 62.4% Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates percentage of time wind blows

Pre-Monsoon Season, 2015

Predominant winds from NW direction were observed for 9.6% of the total time.

In the SW direction winds were observed for 7.9% of the total time. Whereas in

W direction the winds were observed for 4.1% of the total time. In other

directions, the percentage frequencies observed were SSE (0.3%), WNW (0.4%),

NNW (0.4%), ESE (0.4%), SSW (0.5%), ENE (0.7%), NNE (0.9%), WSW (1.1%),

N (1.8%), E (1.8%), NE (2.8%), SE (2.8%), S (2.1%), and calm conditions

prevailed for 62.4% of the time.

3.5.2 Secondary Data collected from IMD-Sundarnagar

Secondary data from IMD-Sundarnagar has been collected for pressure,

temperature, relative humidity, rainfall, evaporation, wind speed and direction.

The data at IMD is usually measured twice a day viz., at 0830 and 1730 hr.






3.5.2.1 Meteorological Data

The meteorological data is collected from the IMD-Sundarnagar, which is the

nearest IMD station to the project site. The data collected from IMD includes wind

speed, wind direction (recorded in sixteen directions), temperature, relative

humidity, atmospheric pressure; rainfall and cloud cover over a period of 10

years. The monthly maximum, minimum and average values are collected for all

the parameters except wind speed and direction. The collected data is tabulated

in Table-3.5.3.

TABLE-3.5.3

CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA-STATION: IMD, SUNDARNAGAR (1981-2000)

Month Atmospheric Pressure (mb)

Temperature (0C) Relative Humidity (%)

Rainfall (mm)

0830 1730 Mean Min Mean Max 0830 1730

January 876.1 874.3 3.0 17.3 57 73 56.3

February 879.6 876.2 5.0 18.9 55 71 81.5

March 883.4 879.4 8.9 23.5 51 68 88.6

April 887.2 884.6 12.6 28.5 53 72 45.8

May 885.3 881.5 16.9 33.2 48 65 79.1

June 883.4 879.1 20.0 34.3 56 74 197.9

July 881.9 878.7 21.7 30.7 59 76 404.9

August 884.7 883.6 21.5 29.8 64 81 333.9

September 883.5 879.1 18.6 30.2 67 85 132.4

October 881.6 876.7 11.3 28.4 63 77 34.3

November 878.4 876.4 6.3 23.8 59 72 20.7

December 876.2 873.3 3.6 18.9 55 68 22.4

Range 876.1-884.6 3.0-34.3 48-85 1497.8

3.5.2.2 Wind Speed/Direction

Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light

and moderate particularly during the morning hours. While during the afternoon

hours the winds were stronger. The wind roses for the study period representing

winter, pre-monsoon, monsoon and post-monsoon seasons along with annual

windrose are shown in Figure-3.5.2 to Figure-3.5.6 and presented in Table-

3.5.4.

TABLE-3.5.4

SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN – IMD SUNDARNAGAR

Season First Predominant

winds Second Predominant Winds % Calm

Condition

0830 1730 0830 1730 0830 1730

Pre-Monsoon NW (2.8) NW (16.6) SE (2.3) SW (14.7) 90.5 46.1

Monsoon NW (2.3) SW (20.6) SE (1.3) NW (8.2) 92.5 55.0

Post Monsoon SE (0.5) SW (18.5) SW (0.5) S (3.5) 98.5 71.0

Winter SE (1.7) SW (17.6) SW (0.6) S (5.0) 96.7 68.7

Annual NW (1.5) SW (17.7) E (1.4) NW (7.3) 93.5 60.1

Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates % of time wind blows from direction

3.5.3 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Data

The India Meteorological Department (IMD) records the data at two times a day

viz. 0830 hr and 1730 hr while the site specific data has been recorded at an hourly






interval. On comparison of site specific data generated for study period vis-à-vis

the IMD data, slight variations were observed. The following observations are

brought out:

The temperature was recorded on site when compared vis-à-vis the IMD data,

slight variations was found. The minimum and maximum temperatures

recorded at site during study period were 13.1oC and 38.5oC, whereas the

minimum and maximum values recorded at IMD-Sundarnagar during the same

period are 8.9oC and 33.2oC respectively;

The Relative Humidity was observed to range from 46 %–88 % during the

study period at the site, whereas according to IMD- Sundarnagar the Relative

Humidity was observed to be in the range of 48 %–72 % during the same

season; and

The wind pattern of the study area is broadly in comparison with the IMD data.

The data generated at project site when compared with the data recorded at IMD,

it is observed that the data generated at the site is broadly in comparison with

regional meteorology, except minor variations as described above. The variation

can be attributed to the hilly terrain in the study area.






FIGURE-3.5.1

SITE SPECIFIC PRE MONSOON SEASON WINDROSE (2015)

SPEED CALM

SCALE 5%

1.0 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr

JP-Baga Bhalag Himachal Pradesh

C-62.4%

N 1

.8%

NNE 0

.9%

NE 2.8%

ENE 0.7%

E 1.8%

ESE 0.4%

SE 2.8%

SSE 0

.3%

S 2

.1%S

SW

0.5

%

SW 7.9%

WSW 1.1%

W 4.1%

WNW 0.4%

NW 9.6%

NNW

0.4

%






FIGURE-3.5.2

PRE-MONSOON SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

08-30hrs

PRE MONSOON

17-30hrs

PRE MONSOON

C-90.5%

0.0% WSW

1.0%

SW

0.0

% S

SW

0.4

% S

SE 2.3%

E 1.7%ENE 0.0%NE 1.

0%

NNE 0

.0%

N 0

.0%

0.0

% N

NW

2.8% N

W 0.0% WNW

0.3% W

SSE 0

.0%

ESE 0.0%

C-46.1%

14.7%

SW

16.6% N

W

0.0

% N

NW

NNE 0

.0%

0.0

% S

SW

0.7% WSW

3.1

% S

0.0% WNW 7.3% W

ESE 0.0%SE 3.4%

SSE 0

.0%

ENE 0.0%

E 2.0%

N 2

.7%

NE 3.

4%

SPEED CALM

SCALE 5%

1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr






FIGURE-3.5.3

MONSOON SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

2.3% N

W

0.8%

SW

0.0

% N

NW

NNE 0

.0%

SSE 0

.0%

SE 1.3%

0.0

% S

SW

C-92.5%

0.0% WSW

0.0

% S

0.5% W

0.0% WNW

ESE 0.3%

ENE 0.0%

E 1.0%

N 0

.3%

NE 1.

0%

MONSOON

08-30hrs

NNE 0

.0%

0.0

% N

NW

8.2% N

W

20.6%

SW

SSE 0

.0%

0.0

% S

SW

C-55.0%

0.0% WSW

2.7

% S

0.0% WNW

7.1% WESE 0.0%SE 2.8%

E 1.3%ENE 0.0.%

N 0

.8%

NE 1.

.5%

MONSOON

17-30hrs

SPEED CALM

SCALE 5%

1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr






FIGURE-3.5.4

POST MONSOON SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

0.5% N

W

0.5%

SW

0.0

% N

NW

NNE 0

.0%

SSE 0

.0%

SE 0.5%0.0

% S

SW

C-98.5%

0.0% WSW

0.0

% S

0.0% W

0.0% WNW

ESE 0.0%

ENE 0.0%

E 0.0%

N 0

.0%

NE 0.0%

POST MONSOON

08-30hrs

NNE 0

.0%

0.0

% N

NW

3.0% N

W

18.5%

SW

SSE 0

.0%

0.0

% S

SW

C-71.0%

0.0% WSW

3.5

% S

0.0% WNW 2.0% W

ESE 0.0%SE 1.0%

E 0.5%ENE 0.0%N

0.0

%

NE 0.5%

POST MONSOON

17-30hrs

SPEED CALM

SCALE 5%

1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr






FIGURE-3.5.5

WINTER SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

0.4

% S

SW

0.0

% N

NW

0.3% N

W

0.6%

SW

0.0% WSW

0.0% WNW 0.0% W

NNE 0

.0%

SE 1.7%

SSE 0

.0%

ENE 0.0%

ESE 0.0%

0.3

% S

C-96.7% E 0.0%

NE 0.

0%

N 0

.0%

WINTER

08-30hrs

1.7% N

W

0.0

% N

NW

NNE 0

.0%

0.0

% S

SW

17.6

% S

W

0.0% WSW

0.0% WNW 2.0% W

SSE 0

.0%

ENE 0.0%

SE 3.0%

ESE 0.0%

5.0

% S

C-68.7% E 1.0%

NE 1.

0%

N 0

.0%

WINTER

17-30hrs

SPEED CALM

SCALE 5%

1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr






FIGURE-3.5.6

ANNAUL WINDROSES-IMD SUNDARNAGAR

NNE 0

.0%

0.0

% N

NW

7.3% N

W

0.0% WNW

0.2% WSW

17.7

% S

W

SSE 0

.0%

0.0

% S

SW

C-60.1%

3.6

% S

4.6% W

ESE 0.0%SE 2.6%

ENE 0.0%

E 1.2%

NNE 0

.0%

1.5% N

W

0.0

% N

NW

0.0% WNW

0.0% WSW

0.8%

SW

SSE 0

.0%

SE 1.3%0.1

% S

SW

ANNUAL

08-30hrs

N 1

.0%

NE 1.

7%

0.2

% S

0.3% W C-93.5%ESE 0.2%

ENE 0.0%

E 1.4%

N 0

.2%

NE 0.

5%

SPEED CALM

SCALE 5%

1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr

ANNUAL

17-30hrs






3.6 Air Quality

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10 km radius around the

plant forms the baseline information. The prime objective of the baseline air quality

study was to assess the existing air quality of the area. This will also be useful for

assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality during the

operation of plant. The study area represents mostly rural/residential environment.

This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for

sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. Ambient air quality

monitoring has been carried out during 1st March 2015 to 31st May 2015

representing pre-monsoon season.

3.6.1 Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey

Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a

scientifically designed ambient air quality-monitoring network. The design of

monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the

following considerations:

Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale;

Topography of the study area;

Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status;

and

Representatives of likely impact areas.

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at eleven locations

with due consideration to the above mentioned points during to March-May 2015.

Table-3.6.1 gives the details of environmental setting around each monitoring

station. The locations of the selected stations with reference to the plant area are

given in the same table and shown in Figure-3.6.1.

Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at a frequency of two days per

week for three months (March to May 2015) at each location representing pre-

monsoon season. Ambient air quality monitoring has been conducted at 11

locations (1 location in the plant area) within the study area of 10 km radial

distance from the plant area is presented in Table-3.6.1. The baseline data of air

environment was monitored for parameters mentioned below as per revised MoEF

notification dated 16th November 2009:

Particulate Matter (PM10); Particulate Matter (PM2.5); Sulphur dioxide (SO2); Nitrogen dioxide (NO2);

Carbon monoxide (CO); Ozone (O3); Lead (Pb);

Ammonia (NH3); Benzene (C6H6); Benzo (a) pyrene (BaP) in Particulate Phase;

Arsenic (As); and Nickel.






FIGURE-3.6.1

AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Malokhar

Basla

Charahu

Aslu

Chakoh

Parnu

Tansi

Matrech Jhadowi

Ghanna

Cheran

Samlehu

Baga GhawraiBeri

10 KM

Thach

76° 55'76° 50' 77° 00'

NH-88 31°

15'

31°

20'

76° 55'76° 50'

31°

15'

31°

20'

31°

25'31°

25'

Gari

Daroba

Harnora

Dhar

Ghagas

Sandauli

Ban

Rawa

Changar

Kandar

Malothi

JajarPanali

Sahnali

PauriBholang

Tepra

Mamau

Hawoni

Cholog

Dabar

Kathpur

Bamla

Dunglu

Dagsech

Bag

Behli

BarnunPasaya

Silha

Rajghat

Shyari

Daseran

Bhanda

Bandla

Chanalag

Magrot

Dades

Juras

Deoli

RopaSamdhar

Kasol

Daudi

Jartu

Bohi

Pata

Kolthi

Ratheh

Siarli

Mandno

Sabar Baadu

Bartha

Kuphar

Cheori

BadnuPati

Ghamru

HalogdaSamal

Bagra

Chouri

Balag

Majhali

Keri

LalagDhara

Kathla

Dal

Badi

Gagal

Barmanan

Panjgain

Suli

SulangSamana

Matianj Kalan

Matianj Khurd

Chamrol

Ropa

Talwand

Ghiyana

Dhar

Gaiharu

Nagri

Sanihan

Barech

Suin

Marora

Chamba

Karyad

Chida

Niholog

Sohra Bhyan

Kian

Kalsua

Dhawahal

Dharsi

Kol Huwani

77° 00'

TROHATP.F

SKOR P.F

SIARLI P.F

KHATRUL P.F

MATRECHP.F

BANA

P.F

GATE P.F

GHAMRU P.F

SUIN

MARORA P.F

BAJARIAL

P.F

Ujra P.F

BUNGA

P.FMUNDLIDHAR

P.F

GAIHAR P.F

BADI P.FCHHABIAWAN

P.F

BURYANS

P.F

SANGAN P.F

MUNGRANIP.F

P.F

MAJHATAL WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

BANDLI WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

SCALE

1 0 1 2 Km


KUFT

HU P

.F

Kufthu

NH-8

8

Balog

AinaPadyar

Nyu

Mohlar

Naugaon

Janed

Panjel

Panjag

Jabal

Kutal

Sahrah

PariahKagriPardhot

BarpatRopri

Sia

Panjeli

Soldha

Kirfa

Loongari

Torti

ML Area-Existing

LEGEND


River / Nala

Village

Forest Boundary


Kharsi

SATLUJ R

IVER

ALI KHAD

Sagithi

Sargohri

Parnali

Kharoti

Badsour

Bahairari Khad

Ambient Air Quality Locations

AAQ1

AAQ2

AAQ3

AAQ4

AAQ5

AAQ6

AAQ7

AAQ8

AAQ9

AAQ10

AAQ11

SPEED CALM

SCALE 5%

1.0 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr

JP-Baga Bhalag Himachal Pradesh

C-62.4%

N 1

.8%

NNE 0

.9%

NE 2.8%

ENE 0.7%

E 1.8%

ESE 0.4%

SE 2.8%

SSE 0

.3%

S 2

.1%S

SW

0.5

%

SW 7.9%

WSW 1.1%

W 4.1%

WNW 0.4%

NW 9.6%

NNW

0.4

%






TABLE-3.6.1

DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Station Code

Name of the Station Distance (km)

Direction Environmental Setting

AAQ1 Plant Site - - -

AAQ2 ML Boundary Near Bholang Village

0.5 SE Downwind

AAQ3 Kasol Village 5.2 NW Upwind

AAQ4 Daudi Village 1.5 N Crosswind

AAQ5 Kandar Village 1.4 NE Crosswind

AAQ6 Beral Village (Beri) 4.1 E Downwind

AAQ7 Siarli Village 4.9 SE Downwind

AAQ8 Sulang Village 8.9 S Crosswind

AAQ9 Kharsi Village 1.0 SW Crosswind

AAQ10 Janed Village 5.1 SSW Upwind

AAQ11 Changar Village 2.0 W Crosswind

Duration of Sampling

The sampling duration for PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx is twenty four hourly

continuous samples per day and CO and HC are sampled for 8 hours continuously

thrice a day. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards

mentioned in the latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board

(CPCB) (November 2009).

3.6.2 Presentation of Primary Data

Various statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, minimum and

maximum values have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ

monitoring stations. The results of monitoring carried out are presented in

Annexure-IX. The summary of these results representing pre-monsoon season

are given in Table-3.6.2. These are compared with the standards prescribed by

Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for rural and residential zone and industrial

zone.

TABLE-3.6.2 (A)

SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS

PRE-MONSOON 2015

Station Code

Location/ Village PM10 (µg/m3) PM2.5 (µg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98%

AAQ1 Plant Site 52.1 64.2 58.0 63.6 26.0 28.2 27.1 28.2


57.8 67.4 61.6 67.1 26.6 31.8 28.5 31.3

AAQ3 Kasol Village 38.7 44.6 41.5 44.4 23.1 26.8 24.7 26.4

AAQ4 Daudi Village 43.6 50.6 47.4 50.5 21.3 23.6 22.4 23.6

AAQ5 Kandar Village 49.6 55.6 52.4 55.1 22.1 24.8 23.3 24.7

AAQ6 Beral Village (Beri) 39.2 44.1 41.7 44.0 22.0 24.9 23.0 24.5

AAQ7 Siarli Village 45.7 49.8 47.7 49.8 22.6 25.0 23.7 24.9

AAQ8 Sulang Village 35.1 41.2 37.3 40.6 22.1 23.7 22.9 23.7

AAQ9 Kharsi Village 35.9 42.1 38.7 41.7 21.9 24.4 23.3 24.3

AAQ10 Janed Village 33.7 39.8 35.9 39.2 22.0 23.4 22.6 23.4

AAQ11 Changar Village 42.9 54.1 47.4 53.2 21.8 25.8 23.4 25.5

Range 33.7-67.4 21.3-31.8






TABLE-3.6.2 (B)


PRE-MONSOON 2015

Station Code

Location/ Village SO2 (µg/m3) NOX (µg/m3)


AAQ1 Plant Site 11.2 13.5 12.6 13.5 14.9 18.3 17.0 18.3


12.3 14.8 13.4 14.7 16.7 19.2 17.7 19.2

AAQ3 Kasol Village 10.1 11.7 11.0 11.7 13.7 15.5 14.4 15.4

AAQ4 Daudi Village 9.8 13.1 11.7 12.9 12.7 15.3 14.1 15.2

AAQ5 Kandar Village 10.4 12.6 11.9 12.6 15.4 17.2 16.1 17.2

AAQ6 Beral Village (Beri) 10.1 11.6 10.8 11.6 13.2 16.1 14.7 16.0

AAQ7 Siarli Village 10.5 12.2 11.3 12.1 12.3 14.5 13.3 14.4

AAQ8 Sulang Village 8.4 10.4 9.1 10.3 10.7 13.3 11.9 13.3

AAQ9 Kharsi Village 8.7 10.6 9.6 10.5 12.5 14.4 13.5 14.4

AAQ10 Janed Village 8.1 10.2 8.9 10.0 10.2 12.8 11.4 12.8

AAQ11 Changar Village 10.3 12.4 11.3 12.4 13.5 16.9 15.2 16.8

Range 8.1-14.8 10.2-19.2

TABLE-3.6.2 (C)


PRE-MONSOON 2015

Station Code

Location/ Village CO (µg/m3) O3 (µg/m3)


AAQ1 Plant Site 389 507 437 503 4.3 8.4 6.2 8.2

AAQ2 ML Boundary Near Bholang Village 386 545 449 540 5.0 8.1 6.3 8.0

AAQ3 Kasol Village 242 442 312 377 2.1 6.2 4.1 6.1

AAQ4 Daudi Village 273 419 341 412 3.1 6.1 4.6 5.9

AAQ5 Kandar Village 306 496 408 490 2.6 7.3 5.2 7.2

AAQ6 Beral Village (Beri) 261 429 344 421 1.9 6.1 3.8 5.9

AAQ7 Siarli Village 234 402 337 402 2.1 5.4 3.5 5.3

AAQ8 Sulang Village 162 386 271 379 1.9 5.9 3.6 5.6

AAQ9 Kharsi Village 176 376 256 371 2.1 5.2 3.3 5.0

AAQ10 Janed Village 157 381 266 372 1.7 5.7 3.3 5.5

AAQ11 Changar Village 267 398 314 371 2.2 6.4 4.1 6.2

Range 157-545 1.7-8.4

TABLE-3.6.2 (D)


PRE-MONSOON 2015

Station Code

Location/ Village NH3 (µg/m3) Pb (ng/m3)


AAQ1 Plant Site <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ2 ML Boundary Near

Bholang Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

AAQ3 Kasol Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ4 Daudi Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ5 Kandar Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ6 Beral Village (Beri) <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ7 Siarli Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ8 Sulang Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ9 Kharsi Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ10 Janed Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 AAQ11 Changar Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

Range <20.0 <0.05






TABLE-3.6.2 (E)


PRE-MONSOON 2015

Station Code

Location/ Village Bap (ng/m3) As (ng/m3)



Bholang Village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2


Range <1.0 <0.2

TABLE-3.6.2 (F)


PRE-MONSOON 2015

Station Code

Location/ Village Ni (ng/m3) C6H6 (ng/m3)



Bholang Village <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0


Range <0.1 <1.0

Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

The minimum and maximum concentrations for PM2.5 were recorded as 21.3 µg/m3

and 31.8 µg/m3 and respectively. The minimum concentration was recorded at

Daudi Village (AAQ4) and maximum concentration was recorded at ML Boundary

Near Bholang Village (AAQ2).

Particulate Matter (PM10)

The minimum and maximum concentrations for PM10 were recorded as 33.7 µg/m3

and 67.4 µg/m3 and respectively. The minimum concentration and the maximum

concentrations were recorded at Janed Village (AAQ10) and Mine Lease Boundary

near Bholang Village (AAQ2).

Sulphur Dioxide






The minimum and maximum SO2 concentrations were recorded as 8.1 µg/m3 and

14.8 µg/m3. The minimum concentration was recorded at Janed Village (AAQ10)

and the maximum concentration was recorded at Mine Lease Boundary near

Bholang Village (AAQ2).

Nitrogen Oxide

The minimum of 10.2 µg/m3 observed at Janed Village (AAQ10) and maximum

concentration of 19.2 µg/m3 for NOx was recorded at Mine Lease Boundary near

Bholang Village (AAQ2).

Carbon Monoxide

The minimum and maximum carbon monoxide concentrations were recorded as

157 µg/m3 and 545 µg/m3.

Hydrocarbons

The values of hydrocarbons are observed below detectable levels.

Ozone (O3)

The minimum and maximum O3 concentrations were recorded as 1.7 g/m3 and

8.4 g/m3.

Ammonia (NH3)

The values of NH3 are observed <20.0 g/m3.

Lead (Pb)

The values of Pb are observed <0.05 ng/m3.

Benzo ( a) Pyrene (BaP)

The values of BaP are observed <1.0 ng/m3.

Arsenic (As)

The values of As are observed <0.2 ng/m3.

Nickel (Ni)

The values of Ni are observed <0.1 ng/m3.

Benzene (C6H6)

The values of C6H6 are observed <1.0 ng/m3.

Air quality monitoring was carried out as per G.S.R no. 826 (E), dated 16th

November 2009 and the observations at all the monitored locations are well within

the limits as per prescribed standards.






3.7 Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of ground water and surface water resources

within the study area has been studied for assessing the water environment and

evaluate anticipated impact of the proposed expansion project. Understanding the

water quality is essential in preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment and

to identify critical issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for

implementation.

The purpose of this study is to:

Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;

Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions,

recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and

Prediction of impact on water quality by this project and related activities.

The information required has been collected through primary surveys and

secondary sources.

3.7.1 Methodology

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized

based on:

Drainage pattern;

Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact

areas; and

Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.

Water sources covering 10 km radial distance were examined for physico-chemical,

heavy metals and bacteriological parameters in order to assess the effect of

industrial and other activities on water. The samples were collected and analyzed

as per the procedures specified in 'Standard Methods for the Examination of Water

and wastewater' published by American Public Health Association (APHA).

Samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene carboys. Samples

collected for metal content were acidified with 1 ml HNO3. Samples for

bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized glass bottles. Selected physico-

chemical and bacteriological parameters have been analyzed for projecting the

existing water quality status in the study area. Parameters like temperature,

Dissolved Oxygen (DO), free Chlorine and pH were analyzed at the time of sample

collection.

3.7.2 Water Sampling Locations

Water samples were collected from 8 ground water and 4 surface water-sampling

locations. These samples were taken as grab samples and were analyzed for

various parameters to be compared with the standards for drinking water as per

IS:10500. The water sampling locations are listed below in Table-3.7.1 and are

depicted in Figure-3.7.1.






FIGURE-3.7.1

WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Malokhar

Basla

Charahu

Aslu

Chakoh

Parnu

Tansi

Matrech Jhadowi

Ghanna

Cheran

Samlehu

Baga GhawraiBeri

10 KM

Thach

76° 55'76° 50' 77° 00'

NH-88 31°

15'

31°

20'

76° 55'76° 50'

31°

15'

31°

20'

31°

25'31°

25'

Gari

Daroba

Harnora

Dhar

Ghagas

Sandauli

Ban

Rawa

Changar

Kandar

Malothi

JajarPanali

Sahnali

PauriBholang

Tepra

Mamau

Hawoni

Cholog

Dabar

Kathpur

Bamla

Dunglu

Dagsech

Bag

Behli

BarnunPasaya

Silha

Rajghat

Shyari

Daseran

Bhanda

Bandla

Chanalag

Magrot

Dades

Juras

Deoli

RopaSamdhar

Kasol

Daudi

Jartu

Bohi

Pata

Kolthi

Ratheh

Siarli

Mandno

Sabar Baadu

Bartha

Kuphar

Cheori

BadnuPati

Ghamru

HalogdaSamal

Bagra

Chouri

Balag

Majhali

Keri

LalagDhara

Kathla

Dal

Badi

Gagal

Barmanan

Panjgain

Suli

SulangSamana

Matianj Kalan

Matianj Khurd

Chamrol

Ropa

Talwand

Ghiyana

Dhar

Gaiharu

Nagri

Sanihan

Barech

Suin

Marora

Chamba

Karyad

Chida

Niholog

Sohra Bhyan

Kian

Kalsua

Dhawahal

Dharsi

Kol Huwani

77° 00'

TROHATP.F

SKOR P.F

SIARLI P.F

KHATRUL P.F

MATRECHP.F

BANAP.F

GATE P.F

GHAMRU P.F

SUIN

MARORA P.F

BAJARIAL

P.F

Ujra P.F

BUNGA

P.FMUNDLIDHAR

P.F

GAIHAR P.F

BADI P.FCHHABIAWAN

P.F

BURYANS

P.F

SANGAN P.F

MUNGRANIP.F

P.F

MAJHATAL WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

BANDLI WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

SCALE

1 0 1 2 Km


KUFT

HU P

.F

Kufthu

NH-8

8

Balog

Aina Padyar

Nyu

Mohlar

Naugaon

Janed

Panjel

Panjag

Jabal

Kutal

Sahrah

PariahKagriPardhot

BarpatRopri

Sia

Panjeli

Soldha

Kirfa

Loongari

Torti

ML Area-Existing

LEGEND


River / Nala

Village

Forest Boundary


Kharsi

SATLUJ R

IVER

ALI KHAD

Sagithi

Sargohri

Parnali

Kharoti

Badsour

Bahairari Khad

Ground Water Locations

GW1

GW2

GW8

GW6

GW7

GW4

GW3

Surface Water Locations

GW5

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4






TABLE-3.7.1

DETAILS OF WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Location Distance (km) Direction

Ground Water

GW1 Plant site - -

GW2 ML Boundary near Bholang Village 0.3 E

GW3 Baga village 0.3 W

GW4 Kharsi village 1.0 SW

GW5 Khandar village 1.5 NE

GW6 Siarli Village (Beri) 4.2 SE

GW7 Janed Village 4.8 SSW

GW8 Beral Village (Beri) 3.7 E Surface Water

SW1 Malokhar pond 2.2 S

SW2 Baga pond 0.3 W

SW3 Satluj river 2.1 NW

SW4 Kharet river 4.7 S

3.7.3 Presentation of Results

Eight ground water and four surface water samples representing water

environment have been considered around the proposed expansion plant within

the periphery of 10 km taking in to account the various uses. The results of

ground water samples and the surface water quality are presented in Table-

3.7.2 and Table-3.7.3.

TABLE-3.7.2 (A)

GROUND WATER QUALITY

Parameters Unit IS:10500

Limits† GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5

pH - 6.5-8.5 7.3 7.2 7.4 7.2 7.1

Colour Hazen 5(15) 4 3 2 5 1

Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

Odour - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Conductivity µS/cm $ 525 295 382 286 426

Turbidity NTU 1(5) 2 3 4 1 3

TDS Mg/l 500(2000) 370 210 270 205 300

Total Hardness as Caco3

mg/l 200(600) 122 67 85 66 92

Total Alkalinity mg/l 200(600) 223.0 125.0 155.0 119 178

Calcium as Ca2+ mg/l 75(200) 29.6 14.3 19.8 13.5 22.6

Magnesium as Mg2+

mg/l 30(100) 11.6 7.5 8.6 7.8 8.6

Residual Chlorine

mg/l 0.2(1) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

Boran mg/l 0.5(1) 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.04

Chloride as Cl mg/l 250(1000) 11.6 8.0 10.8 9.8 11.8

Sulfates as So-42-

mg/l 200(400) 9.1 6.5 9.9 6.2 9.5

Fluoride as F mg/l 1.0(1.5) 0.6 0.5 0.3 0.4 0.2

Nitrates as No3 mg/l 45(NR) 10.6 4.5 7.6 4.6 6.6

Sodium as Na mg/l $ 55.0 32.0 39.8 29.8 46.0






Parameters Unit IS:10500

Limits†

GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5

Potassium as K mg/l $ 15.6 9.8 13.5 10.9 15.5

Phenolic Compounds

mg/l 0.001(0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Cyanides as CN- mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

Anionic Detergents

mg/l 0.2(1.0) <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

Mineral Oil mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.003(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Arsenic as As mg/l 0.01(0.05) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05(1.5) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Lead as Pb mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Manganese as Mn

mg/l 0.1(0.3) 0.04 <0.01 0.02 <0.01 0.02

Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3(NR) 0.11 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.08

Chromium as Cr+6

mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Zinc as Zn mg/l 5.0(15) 0.03 0.02 0.05 0.02 0.03

Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.03(0.2) 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.05

Mercury as Hg mg/l 0.001(NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Pesticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

E.Coil - Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

Total Coliforms MPN/ 100ml

10 NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL

†: Limits in parenthesis are permissible limits in absence of alternate source; $: Limits not specified; NR: No relaxation specified; UO: Un-objectionable; Ag: Agreeable.

TABLE-3.7.2 (B)

GROUND WATER QUALITY

Parameters Unit IS:10500 Limits† GW6 GW7 GW8

pH - 6.5-8.5 7.7 7.9 7.6

Colour Hazen 5(15) 2 3 4

Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

Odour - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Conductivity µS/cm $ 886 407 305

Turbidity NTU 1(5) 2 4 2

TDS Mg/l 500(2000) 605 290 215

Total Hardness as Caco3 mg/l 200(600) 224 96 79

Total Alkalinity mg/l 200(600) 313 165 121

Calcium as Ca2+ mg/l 75(200) 62.3 20.1 16.7

Magnesium as Mg2+ mg/l 30(100) 16.6 11.1 9.1

Residual Chlorine mg/l 0.2(1) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

Boran mg/l 0.5(1) 0.09 0.03 0.02

Chloride as Cl mg/l 250(1000) 59.6 14.6 12.1

Sulfates as So42- mg/l 200(400) 26.4 10.8 9.0

Fluoride as F mg/l 1.0(1.5) 0.4 0.2 0.4

Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 45(NR) 16.4 9.4 5.6

Sodium as Na mg/l $ 89.5 41.5 28.5

Potassium as K mg/l $ 17.5 15.1 9.9

Phenenolic Compounds mg/l 0.001(0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Cyanides as CN- mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

Anionic Detergents mg/l 0.2(1.0) <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

Mineral Oil mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01






Parameters Unit IS:10500 Limits† GW6 GW7 GW8

Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.003(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Arsenic as As mg/l 0.01(0.05) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05(1.5) <0.01 <0.01 0.01

Lead as Pb mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Manganese as Mn mg/l 0.1(0.3) 0.08 0.02 <0.01

Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3(NR) 0.21 0.03 0.04

Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Zinc as Zn mg/l 5.0(15) 0.08 0.02 <0.01

Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.03(0.2) 0.11 0.03 <0.01

Mercury as Hg mg/l 0.001(NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Pesticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent

E.Coil - Absent Absent Absent Absent

Total Coliforms MPN/ 100ml

10 NIL NIL NIL

†: Limits in parenthesis are permissible limits in absence of alternate source; $: Limits not specified; NR: No relaxation specified; UO: Un-objectionable; Ag: Agreeable.

TABLE 3.7.3

SURFACE WATER QUALITY

Sr. No Parameters Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

1 pH - 7.2 7.4 7.1 7.3

2 Colour Hazen 3 4 2 3

3 Conductivity µS/cm 314 356 215 375

4 TDS mg/l 220.0 250.0 150.0 265.0

5 DO mg/l 6.1 5.9 6.0 6.2

6 BOD mg/l <3 <3 <3 <3 7 COD mg/l <5 <5 <5 <5

8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 68.0 81.0 45.0 87.0

9 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 130 145 81 145

10 Calcium as Ca mg/l 14.5 18.2 12.1 18.1

11 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 7.6 8.6 3.2 10.2

12 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 8.9 11.1 7.6 15.1

13 Residual free Chlorine mg/l <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

14 Phosphates as PO4 mg/l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

15 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 7.6 9.1 9.2 10.2

16 Fluorides as F mg/l 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.2

17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 5.4 7.1 3.6 10.1

18 Sodium as Na mg/l 33.5 37.1 22.9 37.4

19 Potassium as K mg/l 12.6 13.1 8.6 14.6

20 Total Boron as B mg/l 0.02 0.03 0.02 0.03

21 Cyanides mg/l <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

22 Phenolic Compounds mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

23 Oil and Grease mg/l <1 <1 <1 <1

24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

25 Arsenic as As mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

26 Copper as Cu mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

27 Lead as Pb mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

28 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.04 0.11 0.04 0.03

29 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

30 Selenium as Se mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

31 Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.01 32 Aluminum as Al mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 33 Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001






Sr. No Parameters Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

34 SAR - 0.77 1.80 1.48 1.73

35 insecticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent 36 Anionic Detergents mg/l <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 37 Total Coliforms MPN/100 10 12 15 10

Note: Values in paranthesis are ‘Permissible limit in the absence of Alternate source’. NR: No relaxation, $: Limits not specified, UO: Un-Objectionable, Agr-Agreeable IS: 10500 (the standard prescribes the requirements for the essential and desirable characteristics required to be tested for ascertaining the suitability of water for drinking purpose)

3.7.4 Observations

Ground Water Quality

The analysis results indicate that the pH ranges in between 7.1 to 7.9, which is

well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. The minimum pH of 7.1 was

observed at GW5 and the maximum pH of 7.9 was observed at GW7.

Total hardness was observed to be ranging from 66 to 224 mg/l. The minimum

hardness (66 mg/l) was recorded at GW4 and the maximum hardness (224

mg/l) was recorded at GW6.

Chlorides were found to be in the range of 8.0 mg/l to 59.6 mg/l, the minimum

concentration of chlorides (8.0 mg/l) was observed at GW2, whereas the

maximum value of chlorides (59.6 mg/l) was observed at GW6.

Sulphates were found to be in the range of 6.2 mg/l to 26.4 mg/l. The

minimum value observed at GW4 (6.2 mg/l) whereas the maximum value

observed at GW6 (26.4 mg/l).

The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) concentrations were found to be ranging in

between 205 to 605 mg/l, the minimum TDS observed at GW4 (205 mg/l) and

maximum concentration of TDS observed at GW6 (605 mg/l).

Iron is found in between 0.03 mg/l to 0.21 mg/l and Zinc found 0.02 mg/l to

0.08 mg/l.

Surface Water Quality

The analysis results indicate that the pH values were found to be 7.1 to 7.4.

DO was observed to be in the range of 5.9 to 6.2 mg/l. The TDS was observed

in the range of 150 mg/l to 265 mg/l, the minimum TDS value was observed

at SW3, and where as maximum value was observed at SW4.

The chlorides and Sulphates were found to be in the range of 7.6 to 15.1 mg/l

and 7.6 to 10.2 mg/l, respectively.

Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 ranges between 45 to 87 mg/l. The

concentration of nitrate fluctuates between 3.6 to 10.1 mg/l.






The calcium & magnesium were found to be in the range of 12.1 to 18.2 mg/l

and 3.2 to 10.2 mg/l, respectively. Iron values are found between 0.03 – 0.11

mg/l and zinc is found between 0.01 – 0.03 mg/l.

3.8 Noise Level Survey

The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency.

Noise in general is sound which is composed of many frequency components of

various types of loudness distributed over the audible frequency range. Various

noise scales have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the response of

an average human to a complex sound made up of various frequencies at different

loudness levels. The most common and universally accepted scale is the A

weighted Scale which is measured as dB (A). This is more suitable for audible

range of 20 to 20,000 Hz. The scale has been designed to weigh various

components of noise according to the response of a human ear.

The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:

Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in

nature). It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is

continuously varying in loudness;

The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in

residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and

The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive landuse, which

determines the loudness and period of exposure.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise

Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise. The

environmental impact assessment of noise from the existing plant, construction

activity, and vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration

various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and

annoyance and general community responses.

The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline

noise levels, and assess the impact of the total noise generated by the plant

operations around it.

3.8.1 Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major

noise generating sources in the area. Noise at different noise generating sources

has been identified based on the activities in the village area, ambient noise due to

industries and traffic and the noise at sensitive areas like hospitals and schools.

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at nine

locations in the study area. The noise levels at each location were recorded for 24

hours. The environment setting of each noise monitoring location is given in Table-

3.8.1 and shown in Figure-3.8.1.






TABLE-3.8.1

DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Location Code

Location Distance (km)

Direction Zone

N1 Plant site - - Industrial

N2 ML area 0.5 NE Industrial

N3 Changar Village 2.0 W Residential

N4 Kasol Village 5.2 NW Residential

N5 Kandar Village 1.4 NE Residential

N6 Beri Village 4.1 E Residential

N7 Siarli Village 4.9 SE Residential

N8 Sulang Village 8.9 S Residential

N9 Kharsi Village 1.8 SW Residential

3.8.2 Method of Monitoring

Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The

readings were taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been

monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the

locations covered in 10 km radius of the study area.

3.8.3 Presentation of Results

The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at eight locations during

pre-monsoon season. The parameters are analyzed for Lday, Lnight, and Ldn. These

results are tabulated in Table-3.8.2.

TABLE-3.8.2

NOISE LEVELS IN THE STUDY AREA

Code Location L10 L50 L90 Leq Lday Lnight Ldn

N1 Plant site 65.1 61.4 57.8 62.3 62.9 59.7 66.7

N2 ML area 66.8 63.1 59.5 64.0 64.7 60.5 67.8

N3 Changar Village 49.2 45.3 41.5 46.3 47.2 43.6 50.7

N4 Kasol Village 46.9 43.1 39.6 44.0 44.6 41.6 48.6

N5 Kandar Village 50.1 46.5 42.8 47.4 47.9 44.9 51.9

N6 Beri Village 48.7 44.8 41.0 45.8 46.8 42.9 50.1

N7 Siarli Village 45.6 41.9 38.3 42.8 43.3 40.4 47.4

N8 Sulang Village 46.2 42.6 38.9 43.5 44.0 40.9 47.9

N9 Kharsi Village 48.6 44.8 41.3 45.7 46.6 43.4 50.4 a) Daytime Noise Levels (Lday)

The day time noise levels at all the locations are observed to be within the range of

43.3 to 64.7 dB (A). The minimum noise level was observed to be 43.3 dB (A) at

Siarli Village (N7) and maximum noise level was observed to be 64.7 dB (A) at ML

area (N2).

b) Night time Noise Levels (Lnight)

The night time noise levels at all the locations were found to be in the range of

40.4 to 60.5 dB (A). The minimum night time noise level was observed to be 40.4

dB (A) at Siarli Village (N7) and maximum night time noise level was observed to

be 60.5 dB (A) at ML area (N2).






FIGURE-3.8.1

NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Malokhar

Basla

Charahu

Aslu

Chakoh

Parnu

Tansi

Matrech Jhadowi

Ghanna

Cheran

Samlehu

Baga GhawraiBeri

10 KM

Thach

76° 55'76° 50' 77° 00'

NH-88 31°

15'

31°

20'

76° 55'76° 50'

31°

15'

31°

20'

31°

25'

31°

25'

Gari

Daroba

Harnora

Dhar

Ghagas

Sandauli

Ban

Rawa

Changar

Kandar

Malothi

JajarPanali

Sahnali

PauriBholang

Tepra

Mamau

Hawoni

Cholog

Dabar

Kathpur

Bamla

Dunglu

Dagsech

Bag

Behli

BarnunPasaya

Silha

Rajghat

Shyari

Daseran

Bhanda

Bandla

Chanalag

Magrot

Dades

Juras

Deoli

RopaSamdhar

Kasol

Daudi

Jartu

Bohi

Pata

Kolthi

Ratheh

Siarli

Mandno

Sabar Baadu

Bartha

Kuphar

Cheori

BadnuPati

Ghamru

HalogdaSamal

Bagra

Chouri

Balag

Majhali

Keri

LalagDhara

Kathla

Dal

Badi

Gagal

Barmanan

Panjgain

Suli

SulangSamana

Matianj Kalan

Matianj Khurd

Chamrol

Ropa

Talwand

Ghiyana

Dhar

Gaiharu

Nagri

Sanihan

Barech

Suin

Marora

Chamba

Karyad

Chida

Niholog

Sohra Bhyan

Kian

Kalsua

Dhawahal

Dharsi

Kol Huwani

77° 00'

TROHATP.F

SKOR P.F

SIARLI P.F

KHATRUL P.F

MATRECHP.F

BANA

P.F

GATE P.F

GHAMRU P.F

SUIN

MARORA P.F

BAJARIAL

P.F

Ujra P.F

BUNGA

P.FMUNDLIDHAR

P.F

GAIHAR P.F

BADI P.FCHHABIAWAN

P.F

BURYANS

P.F

SANGAN P.F

MUNGRANIP.F

P.F

MAJHATAL WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

BANDLI WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

SCALE

1 0 1 2 Km


KUFT

HU P

.F

Kufthu

NH-8

8

Balog

Aina Padyar

Nyu

Mohlar

Naugaon

Janed

Panjel

Panjag

Jabal

Kutal

Sahrah

PariahKagriPardhot

BarpatRopri

Sia

Panjeli

Soldha

Kirfa

Loongari

Torti

ML Area-Existing

LEGEND


River / Nala

Village

Forest Boundary


Kharsi

SATLUJ R

IVER

ALI KHAD

Sagithi

Sargohri

Parnali

Kharoti

Badsour

Bahairari Khad

Noise Monitoring Locations

N1

N2

N4

N6

N7

N9

N3

N5

N8






3.9 Flora and Fauna Studies

3.9.1 Introduction

The present section deals with the ecological evaluation pertaining to the

proposed development. As such, it is to support the assessment of the impact of

a proposed development by providing guidance on how to describe the ecological

features within the area affected, how to value them, and how to predict the

value losses caused by the development. Among the human activities that pose

the highest threat to the conservation of biodiversity are the developmental

projects in particular. Such projects represent artificial elements that cut through

the landscape and interfere with the natural habitat and its conditions by

emissions that may be solid, liquid and or gaseous. This in turn influences the

abundance and distribution of plant and animal species, i.e., the biodiversity of

the areas impacted.

The description of the actual ecological assessment provided by the ecological

baseline study serves to set a reference for the subsequent impact analysis.

Moreover, it helps decision-makers and EIA reviewers to become familiar with the

environmental features and the needs of the study area.

3.9.2 Objectives of the Study

The present study was undertaken with the following objectives to assess both

terrestrial and aquatic habitats of the study area:

To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the existing

project site.

To assess the fauna in the study area.

To understand the ecology of the water bodies.

To identify and quantify the ethno botanical importance of the plant species.

To ascertain the migratory routes of fauna, presence of breeding grounds and

sensitive habitats in the study area, if any.

To assess the presence of protected areas in the study area.

To review the information from secondary sources and discuss the issues of

concern with the relevant authority and stakeholders.

Impact prediction based on primary and secondary data sources to formulate

mitigation measures.

3.9.3 Methodology

To achieve the above objectives a detailed study of the area was undertaken with

the existing plant as its centre. The different methods adopted were as follows:

Generation of primary data by undertaking systematic ecological studies in the

study area;

Primary data collection for flora through random sampling method for trees,

shrubs and herbs from the selected locations to know the vegetation cover

qualitatively.






Faunal studies by taking transect in the study area to spot the fauna and also

to know the fauna through secondary indictors such as pugmarks, scats, fecal

pallets, calls and other signs.

For ecological information, the secondary sources such as local officials,

villagers and other stakeholders were interviewed.

Sourcing secondary data with respect to the study area from published

literature.

The locations for terrestrial and aquatic ecological studies are shown in Figure-

3.9.1 and the details are given in Table-3.9.1.

TABLE-3.9.1

ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Station Location Distance Direction

Terrestrial

TE1 Near Village Jajar 1.7 NW

TE2 Near Village Karyad 1.4 NNE

TE3 Near Village Beri 3.8 E

TE4 Near Village Malokhar 2.3 SSE

TE5 Near Village Kharsi 1.0 SW

Aquatic

AE1 Near Village Barmana 9.0 NNW

AE2 Near Village Matrech 3.5 SE

AE3 Near Village Aslu 4.6 SSE

3.9.4 General Biodiversity

The altitudinal variation, environmental setting and distinct climatic zones has

endowed the state with rich biodiversity that includes many tropical, sub-tropical,

temperate as well as alpine vegetation. Diverse group of fauna associated with

these different vegetations and together have made this region one of the most

important ecosystem on the planet. Hence it is of high importance to assess the

biodiversity of the region with respect to the proposed expansion project area and

its surrounding.

The study area falls in the Western Himalayas of India which has hilly terrains

with steep mountain slopes and valleys. The region has considerable land cover

under forest and it has many rivers forming the source for one of the major

rivers-Sutlaj. The major source of water in this region is the Himalayan snow melt

and monsoonal precipitation. Being a part of Himalayan ranges, this region

harbours rich biodiversity and wealth of natural resources.

The forests of the State have been classified on an ecological basis as laid down

by Champion and Seth, and can be broadly classified into Coniferous Forests and

broad-leaved forests. Distribution of various species follows fairly regular

altitudinal stratification. The vegetation varies from Dry Scrub Forests at lower

altitudes to Alpine Pastures at higher altitudes. In between these two extremes,

distinct vegetation zones of Mixed Deciduous Forests, Bamboo, Chil, Oaks,

Deodar, Kail, Fir and Spruce, are found. The richness and diversity of flora can be

gauged from the fact that, out of total 45,000 species found in the country as

many as 3,295 species (7.32%) are reported in the State. More than 95% of the

species are endemic to Himachal Pradesh and characteristic of Western

Himalayan flora, while about 5% (150 species) are exotic, introduced over the

last 150 years.






FIGURE 3.9.1

LOCATIONS FOR TERRESTRIAL AND AQUATIC ECOLOGICAL

Malokhar

Basla

Charahu

Aslu

Chakoh

Parnu

Tansi

Matrech Jhadowi

Ghanna

Cheran

Samlehu

Baga GhawraiBeri

10 KM

Thach

76° 55'76° 50' 77° 00'

NH-88 31°

15'

31°

20'

76° 55'76° 50'

31°

15'

31°

20'

31°

25'

31°

25'

Gari

Daroba

Harnora

Dhar

Ghagas

Sandauli

Ban

Rawa

Changar

Kandar

Malothi

JajarPanali

Sahnali

PauriBholang

Tepra

Mamau

Hawoni

Cholog

Dabar

Kathpur

Bamla

Dunglu

Dagsech

Bag

Behli

Barnun Pasaya

Silha

Rajghat

Shyari

Daseran

Bhanda

Bandla

Chanalag

Magrot

Dades

Juras

Deoli

RopaSamdhar

Kasol

Daudi

Jartu

Bohi

Pata

Kolthi

Ratheh

Siarli

Mandno

Sabar Baadu

Bartha

Kuphar

Cheori

BadnuPati

Ghamru

HalogdaSamal

Bagra

Chouri

Balag

Majhali

Keri

LalagDhara

Kathla

Dal

Badi

Gagal

Barmanan

Panjgain

Suli

SulangSamana

Matianj Kalan

Matianj Khurd

Chamrol

Ropa

Talwand

Ghiyana

Dhar

Gaiharu

Nagri

Sanihan

Barech

Suin

Marora

Chamba

Karyad

Chida

Niholog

Sohra Bhyan

Kian

Kalsua

Dhawahal

Dharsi

Kol Huwani

77° 00'

TROHAT

P.F

SKOR P.F

SIARLI P.F

KHATRUL P.F

MATRECH

P.F

BANA

P.F

GATE P.F

GHAMRU P.F

SUIN

MARORA P.F

BAJARIALP.F

Ujra P.F

BUNGA P.F

MUNDLIDHARP.F

GAIHAR P.F

BADI P.FCHHABIAWAN

P.F

BURYANS P.F

SANGAN

P.F

MUNGRANIP.F

P.F

MAJHATAL WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

BANDLI WILDLIFE

SANCTUARY

SCALE

1 0 1 2 Km


KUFT

HU P

.F

Kufthu

NH-8

8

Balog

Aina Padyar

Nyu

Mohlar

Naugaon

Janed

Panjel

Panjag

Jabal

Kutal

Sahrah

PariahKagriPardhot

BarpatRopri

Sia

Panjeli

Soldha

Kirfa

Loongari

Torti

ML Area-Existing

LEGEND


River / Nala

Village

Forest Boundary


Kharsi

SATLUJ R

IVER

ALI KHAD

Sagithi

Sargohri

Parnali

Kharoti

Badsour

Bahairari Khad

Terrestrial Sampling Locations

Aquatic Sampling Locations

TE1

TE5

TE3

AE1

TE2

TE4 AE2

AE3






3.9.4.1 Forest Types of the Region

The following Table-3.9.2 gives the forest types of Himachal Pradesh with

general floristic compositions with respect to the altitude.

TABLE-3.9.2

FOREST TYPES OF THE REGION

Classification based

on Latitudinal Zones Flora of Himachal Pradesh

Lower Motane Zone (up to 1000m above msl)

A. Trees B. Shrubs

C. Grasses

Khair, Siris, Kachnar, Semal, Tun, Mango, Behul, Shisham, Ritha, Tut, Behera & Chil. Vitex, Munj, Ber, Ipomea, Dodonea, Bamboo. Vetiver, Sanchrus, Munjh.

Middle Motane Zone (From 1,000metres to 2000m above msl)

A. Trees

B. Shrubs C. Grasses

Kunish, Poplar, Willow, Ohi, Robinia, Drek, Kail, Chil Toon, Behmi, Chulli, Walnut, Khirik. Vitex, Berberis, Carrisa. Lolium, Dactylis, Phleum, Phylaris.

Temperate Zone (From 2,000m to 3000metres above msl)

A. Trees

B. Shrubs C. Grasses

Deodar, Fir Spruce, Maple, Ash, BhojPatra,

Horse Chestnut, Alder, Robinia, Poplar, Walnut. Berberis. Festuca, Dactylis, Bromus, Lucerne, white Clover, Red Clover, Dioscorea.

Alpine Zone (Above 3000m above msl)

A. Trees B. Shrubs

C. Grasses

Birch, Juniper, Cypress, Willow.

Saussurea lappa, Cotoneaster microphylla, Artemesia. Festuca arundinacea, Dectylis glomerata.

3.9.4.2 Cropland Ecosystem

This is also known as manmade ecosystem or artificial ecosystem because of man

tries to control biotic community and physical environment. The common crops in

crops land ecosystem in study area are Oryizasativa Sativa, Elusine coracona,

Zea mays, Triticum vulgare, Triticum diococcum, Sorghum vulgare, which are

mainly dependent on rainwater during monsoon season, canal irrigation and river.

In this crop land ecosystem in addition to the crop raised, a number of weeds like

Cynodon dactylon, Euphorbia hirta, Cyperus rotundus, Digetaria sp. and

Alyscicarpus sp. also occur in the fields. Apart from that commercial crops like

ground nut sunflower and several vegetable crops are also grown in this region.

3.9.4.3 Terrestrial Ecosystem

Natural vegetation is mostly restricted to herb layer having drought resistance.

Other than herb layer the area is almost devoid of major forest type tree except

agroforestry types and commercial plantations such as Eucalyptus hybrid, Acacia

leucopholoe, Leucena leucophloe, Phoenix aculis, Azadirachta indica, Ficus sp.,

Acacia sp and Zizyphus jujube, Euphorbia sp. which are mainly restricted to

waste and culturable waste lands and near villages and agricultural lands, Delonix






regia, Peltoforrum ferrusinum, Albizia procera, Albizia lebbeck, Dalbergia sissoo,

Terminalia catapa, and Tamarindus indica are predominant. About 248 plant

species were recorded from 72 families in the study area.

3.9.4.4 Composition and Condition of the Forests in the Study Area

The major portion of the study area belongs to Kunihar and Bilaspur Forest

division of Shimla and Bilaspur districts. The Kunihar division consists of

Nalagarh, Arki, part of Kasauli and part of Shimla tehsils. Due to wide variations

in altitude, aspect of soil depth and texture and available moisture, the

vegetation met with in the tract also shows great variations. Chil, Khair, bamboos

and other broad-leafed species like Chhal, Simbal, Jhingam etc are the most

important species met in the area. Biotic interference like excessive grazing, fires,

grass cutting and felling of trees also bring about great changes in the vegetation

even within a limited area. Natural regeneration of all the species is generally

deficit, though good patches of Chil plantations are met within area brought

under artificial regeneration and the areas are away from habitations and are not

subjected to adverse biotic influences. The forests of this division can be grouped

under the following types as per the revised survey of the forest types of India by

Champion and Seth (1968).

Group-5:- Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests

Sub-Group 5B Northern Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests

1. C2 Northern dry mixed deciduous forests

2. DSI Dry deciduous scrub

3. E9 Dry bamboo brake

Group 6:- Tropical Thorn forests

Sub-Groups 6B Northern Tropical Thorn forests

1. DS2, Tropical Euphorbia scrub

Group 9 DS2:- Sub-Tropical Euphorbia scrub

Group 9 Sub:- Tropical Pine forests

Type C1. Himalayan sub-tropical chill pile forests

a. Lower Shivalik Chil Pine forests

b. Upper or Himalayan Chil Pine forests

Group 12 Himalayan Moist temperature forests

C1 Lower Western Himalayan Temperate forests

a. Ban Oak forests (Quercus incana)

From the point of view of management forests of Group 5 B(1) and group 5 B(2)

have been taken as one type. Scrub forests. The forests of type 5 B(3) are

bamboo brakes. The forests of group 6 are mainly thorn or Euphorbia scrub

forests. The main floristic of these types is described as follows.

Mixed Deciduous Forests (Scrub)






This type occurs on altitudes from 300 m to 1300 m and extends even upto 1500

m on warmer aspects and scarp slopes. They are at their best at sites with deep

soil with favorable soil moisture conditions. The upper canopy is usually a very

open with thin shrubby under growth. During the hot weather the trees are

leafless and the soils fully exposed, whereas during the monsoons it is fully

covered with foliage. In most areas, due to adverse biotic influences, the crop has

been reduced to a few scattered trees only. The principal species met with the top

canopy are Chhal (Anoegeissus latifolia), Jhingan (Lannea coramandalica), Siris

(Albizzia lebbeck), Albizzia procera, Albizzia odarattissima, Simal (Bambax cieba),

Pula (Kydia calcina), Barnasi (Forenia limonia), Amaltas (Cassaia fistula),

Chamror (Ehretia leavis), Sandan (Ougenia oojensis, Kaim (Mitragyna parviflora),

Kangu (Flacartia indica), Khair (Acacia catechu), Iaman (Syzygium cumini), Chilla

(Caseria tomentosa), Amla (Emblica officinalis), Kachnar (Bauhinia sp) Toon

(cedrela toona) in depressions, Dhaman (Grewia sp), Shingar (Boernemeria

regulosa) very commonly seen locally on the moist soils, Kamal (Mallotus

phillippines), Blojho (Sapium insigne), Ber (Ziziphus mauritiana), Bel (Aegle

marmelos) and Dhak (Butea monosperma).

Under growth consist of Harsinghar (Nyctanthes arbortristis), Karunfa (Carissa

apaca), Dhavi (Woodfordia fruticosa), Kathi (Indigofera pulchella), Gundhella

(Murayya keonigii), Basuti (Adhatoda vasica), Mehendru (Dodonaea viscosa) and

Keor (Holarrhena antidycenterica).

The important grasses are Bhabar (Ishammum augustifolium), Makora

(Heteropogon contortus), Dub (Cynodon dactylon), Dhaulu (Chrysopogon

montanatus), Labb (Cymbopogon martinii) and Munj (Erianthus munja).

Climbers Tour (Bauhinia vahlii), Salary (Pueraria tuberose), Karingham

(Caesalpina sepiera), Kurar (Acacia pinnata), Dhudi (Cryptolepis bulchanani).

Natural regeneration of almost all the species is deficient, primarily due to

adverse biotic factors mainly excessive grazing. In some of these forests, khair

has been successfully introduced after clarification the existing growth, Khair

plantations in blanks such as UF Surujpur, Dholar, Mandbhala, Betar and

kuranwala in Kuthar range are also doing well. But where after plantation,

adequate protection and maintenance has not been carried out, the areas have

been invaded by Lantana camara as is seen in UF Matkuda, Dhar Jhokari and

Khadli etc in Kuthar range. This type of forests starts from Chandi in Kuthar

range and extends upto Kashlog in Dhami range.

Mixed Deciduous Forests (Bamboos)

These types are found upto 1000m elevation on well drained and loose textured

Shivalik formations. It closely resembles the foregoing type the only difference

being that in this case, bamboos (Dendrocalamus strictus) is met within the top

canopy. The development of bamboo clumps in Ramgarh, Baddu, Majru, Retali

and Dassua in Nalagarh tract is good, whereas it is moderate in Awar, Braghu,

Bhowan, Nalki of Kuthar Range. The floristic characteristics are same as that of

mixed deciduous type.






Thorn Forests or Euphorbia Scrub Forests

Generally these types of forests are recently formed habitats due to dry seasons

and degradation of existing forests. Heavy grazing pressure and frequent fires

has played as significant role in their presence. Some bamboos are also present

in patches. The tree growth is very sparse or even non-existent and only the very

hardy species form the part of these stands. Many large areas are uniformly

occupied by Euphorbia. Most of the areas of Arki and Dhami ranges between

Kunihar and Kashlog are the best representation of this habitat. Moreover,

Lantana has spread over most of the areas on southern and western slopes of

Kuthar range between Patta and Banalgi. The growth of pure Lantana is so thick

that it has completely replaced other vegetation as seen in Khadli, Matkuda,

Chandi and Shan etc. Shrubs like Carissa apca along with few grasses occurs

throughout these habitats.

The main floristic composition is as under:

Top Story:

Khair (Acacia catechu), Jhingan (Lannea coramandalica), Amaltas (Cassia fistula),

Bel (Aegle marmelos), Baranasi (Feronia limonia), Kangu (Flacourtia indica).

Under growth:

Thor (Euphorbia royleana), Phil lark (Lantana camara), Karunda (Carissa apica),

Ghandela (Murraya Koenigii) and Kuri (Nyctanthes arortristis).

Grasses:

Makora (Heteropogon montanus), Bubba (Cynodon dactylon), Dhaulu (Carissa

apica), Ghandela (Murraya koenigii) and Kuri (Nyctanthes arortristis).

Chil Pine Forests:

These are most important forests of the tract occurring between 800 to 1800 m in

elevation. Biotic influences play an important part in the regeneration and

distribution of this species. With favorable soil conditions and on northern and

eastern aspects, chil comes down to even 800 m elevation or it can extend upto

1800 m or more in elevation. The pine, generally, will stand singly or in groups

with the scattered lower deciduous tree storey along its lower altitudinal limit

where there is usually a fairly continuous low scrub growth of xenophytic shrubs.

Regeneration can naturally establish itself easily, if proper protection is afforded

and mother trees are well distributed over the area. Chanol and Bohli Katli of

Kuthar range, DF sergharakhru of Dhami range and Kamal Pandal and Jaglog

forests of Ramshehr range can be cited as examples of good regeneration.

Upper Storey: Chil (Pinus roxburghii)

Middle Storey:






Kanto (Pyres pasha), Ban oak (Quercus incana), Kamal (Mallotus phillippines,

Amla (Emblica officinalis), Khair (Acacia catechu) and Dare (Punica granatum).

Undergrowth:

Karaunda (Carissa apica), Mehnder (Dodonia viscose), Akha (Rubus ellipticus),

Chhota jhunjra (Myrsine Africana), Dhavi (Woodfrodia fruticaosa), Padar

(Colebrookia sp), Kashmal (Berberis lyceum), Kathi (Indigofera pulchela) and

Gandhela (Murraya koenigii).

Grasses:

Chrysopogon fulvus, Chrysopogon sp, Dichanthium annalatum, Heteropgon

contortus and Themeda anathera.

Climbers: Very few Gulab (Rosa moschatus) is the most common.

Cryptogamic Vegetation

The area shows many algae, fungi, bryophytes and ferns. Algae are present in

aquatic bodies or in marshy places. Fungi, particularly from ascomycetes and

basidiomycetes are located on ground or epiphytically. Lichens of crustose, foliose

and fruticose types are present on different substrates (Lichen, Ascomycetes and

Basidiomycetes could be observed near old building tops, old walls of the

houses). Bryophytes occur in wet areas and occasionally on barks of trees and old

walls of houses.

3.9.5 Present Status of Biodiversity

While these hilly states once harboured rich biodiversity, presently, these are in

various stages of degradation. There are only a few patches that still have the

natural species composition comprising of native species. Many other plant

communities have been disturbed on account of habitat loss, degradation, soil

erosion and biological invasions. Hence the government of Himachal Pradesh was

instrumental in preserving the rich areas under wildlife sanctuaries and parks of

the state.

In order to protect these species from large-scale commercial felling there is a

green felling ban imposed in the state. This has been implemented, as these

species have a large turnover cycle (100 or more years), poor germination

percentages, poor seedling recruitment and slow growth rates.

This study area is well accessible by road and the area also harbours a river and

other smaller rivulets flowing through it. The vegetation in the buffer zone

comprises of sparse to well protected vegetation in different categories such as

open land, reserve forests, wildlife sanctuaries inter-mixed with villages and

agricultural land. The buffer zone includes two wildlife sanctuaries viz: Bandli

Wildlife Sanctuary in the North and Majhatal Wildlife Sanctuary in the South. The

details of the Protected Areas and Reserve Forest are given in Table-3.9.3. The

authenticated map of the proposed site with respect to the two wildlife

sanctuaries is shown in Annexure-X (A).






TABLE-3.9.3

LIST OF FORESTS IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Forests Distance Direction

1 Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary 9.9 N

2 Majhathal Wildlife Sanctuary 5.5 SE

3 Darla Wildlife Sanctuary 12.2 S

4 Baga PF 0.4 N

5 Khatrul PF 1.2 SE

6 Siarli PF 1.4 E

7 Bajarial, PF 2.1 NE

8 Suin Marora PF 2.5 ENE

9 Mungrani PF 2.5 W

10 Sangan PF 2.6 NW

11 Matrech PF 3.0 NE

12 Bana PF 3.8 SE

13 Trohat PF 4.3 E

14 Skor PF 5.4 SE

15 Badi PF 6.3 N

16 Chhabiawan PF 6.4 NNW

17 Gaihar PF 7.0 NE

18 Ghamru PF 8.2 E

19 Bunga PF 8.3 NE

20 Mandlidhar PF 8.8 NE

21 Kufthu PF 8.6 E

22 Buryans PF 9.2 NW

23 Gate PF 9.7 S

24 Bhagadurpur PF 10.4 S

3.9.6 Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary

Himachal Pradesh ranks third among all the states in the country in terms of the

percentage of total area of the state under Protected Area (PA) coverage. Its

thirty two Sanctuaries and two National Parks occupy 13.6% of the state’s

geographical area as compared to the national average of 4.7% (HPFD 2004b).

While two of the state’s sanctuaries each over a large area of more than 1000

km2, as many as sixteen out of the total thirty two sanctuaries are less than 75

km2 in area. One of these is the Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary-a small Protected Area

of 41.32 km2 located at a distance of about 8 km from the town of Sundernagar,

District Mandi, Himachal Pradesh. It extends from 31º25’21” to 31º29’02” North

and 76º52’04” to 76º56’54” East. The Sanctuary was established in by notifying

gazetter in 1999 it is representative of the North-West Himalaya province of the

Himalayan biogeographic zone classified as 2A.

Physiographic Features

Topography

Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary occurs in hilly terrain spanning an altitudinal range from

about 600 m to over 2000 m. The change in altitude is abrupt and steep with the






highest point of Bandli Tibba at an altitude of 2162 m. The area consists of steep

rock and cliffs with about 5% of the area under precipitous rocky slopes.

Land Use

The approximate proportion of land use categories in Bandli WLS consists of 40%

land under tree cover and an equal proportion under grasslands. Land under

shrub cover and precipitous rocks comprise 15% and 5% respectively.

Drainage

The southern, western and northern sides of the Sanctuary form part of the

catchments of the Satluj River while the eastern side drains into the Beas River

through Bhadrolu Nala. The southern side is bound by Seri Khad. Numerous nalas

dissect the terrain of the sanctuary.

Rock and Soil Type

The rock type is predominantly calcite limestone with a few shale bands and gray

colored dolomite having quartz veins. The base rock has resulted in shallow

textured soils which, on the whole, are well-drained. Open areas near habitation

have soil which is poor in organic matter due to repeated burning. Northern and

eastern aspects consist of certain areas with soil rich in nutrient content.

Climate

The cold, dry and wet seasons are distinctly marked with temperature variation

ranging from 36ºC in summer to as low as -1ºC in winter. The highest reaches of

the area receive mild snowfall every year. Ground frost is common during winter

and mild fog conditions persist for a small duration during the monsoon season.

The annual rainfall in the area averages to about 1500 mm. Wind conditions

remain mild for most of the year with high velocity winds only occurring on

hilltops.

Vegetation

The vegetation of the area corresponds with Northern Dry Mixed Deciduous

Forests 5B/C2, Himalayan subtropical Chir Pine Forest 9/C1b 12/C1/1a and Lower

West Himalayan Temperature Forest–Ban Oak Forest categories of forest as per

Champion and Seth (1968).

Northern Dry Mixed Deciduous type of forest is found on the southern and also

partly on the western slopes of the Sanctuary occurring in the lowest areas of

Bandli WLS from about 600 m upto the higher reaches till about 1300 m. Some of

the major species characterizing this type in the sanctuary are given in Table -

3.9.4.

TABLE- 3.9.4

PREDOMINANT PLANT SPECIES IN BANDLI WILDLIFE SANCTUARY

Sr. No Scientific Name Local Name

1 Acacia catechu Khair

2 Adhatoda vasica Basuti






Sr. No Scientific Name Local Name

3 Bauhinia racemosa Safed kachnar

4 Bauhinia vahlii Vahli

5 Carissa opaca Garna, Karauda

6 Cassia fistula Amaltas

7 Dalbergia sissoo Shisham

8 Dodonaea viscosa Mendar

9 Emblica officinalis Amla

10 Euphorbia royleana Danda Thuar

11 Felmingia fruticulosa Kanphuta

12 Indigofera dosua Indigofera

13 Lannea coramalica Lanea

14 Mallotus phillippinensis Kamal

15 Murraya kownigii Currbaypatta, Gandhela

16 Phoenix sp Wilddates

17 Pinus roxburghii (chir pine)

18 Pueraria tuberosa Indian kuduzu

19 Quercus leucotrichophora Ban oak

20 Rubus eliticus Rubus

21 Syzygium cumini Jamun

22 Terminalia bellerica Bahera

23 Viburnum coriaceum Basmol

24 Woodfordia floribunda Dhataki

25 Zizyphus mauritiana Ber

Fauna

Mammals: Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary provides habitat for a variety of mammalian

species that include carnivores such as the leopard and leopard cat. Among wild

ungulates, goral and barking deer are found here. The major faunal species

recorded presented in Table–3.9.5.

TABLE 3.9.5

DETAILS OF RECORDED IN MAMMALS IN BANDLI WILDLIFE

Sr. No Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status as

Wildlife Protection Act, 1972

1 Barking deer Muntiacus muntjak Schedule III

2 Black bear Ursus thibetanus Part I of Schedule I

3 Common Indian mongoose Herpestres edwardsi Part II of Schedule II

4 Leopard Panthera pardus Part III of Schedule I

5 Goral Naemorhedus goral Schedule III

6 Hanuman Langur Semnopithecus entellus Schedule II

7 Himalayan palm civet Paguma lrvata Schedule II

8

Himalayan yellow throated

marten Martes flavigula Schedule II

9 Indian flying squirrel Petaurista petaurista Schedule II

10 Indian fox Vulpes bengalensis Schedule II

11 Indian hare Lepus nigricollis Schedule IV

12 Indian porcupine Hystrix indica Schedule IV

13 Jackal Canis aureus Schedule III

14 Jungle cat Felis chaus Schedule II

15 Leopard cat Prionailurus bengalensis Part III of Schedule I








16 Rhesus macaque Macaca mullata Schedule II

Reptiles: The recorded reptilian fauna from sanctuary area are presented in

Table–3.9.6.

TABLE-3.9.6

DETAILS OF RECORDED REPTILIAN FAUNA FROM SANCTUARY



1 Common krait Bungarus caeruleus Schedule IV

2 Monitor lizard Varanus bengalensis Part II of Schedule I

3 Rat snake Ptyas mucosus Schedule III

Avifauna: Bandli WLS supports a large variety of birds including four species of

pheasants. The sanctuary is a stronghold for Himalayan pheasants particularly

the Cheer Pheasant (Catreus wallichii), a vulnerable species endemic to the

Himalaya. In addition to the Cheer Pheasant, the sanctuary also supports

populations of the Kalij pheasant (Lophura leucomelanos), Indian peafowl (Pavo

cristatus) and red jungle fowl (Gallus gallus). Table–3.9.7 lists some of the

important avifauna of Bandli Wildlife sanctuary.

TABLE-3.9.7

DETAILS OF RECORDED BIRDS FROM SANCTUARY

Sr. No Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status

as Wildlife Protection Act, 1972

1 Cheer pheasant Catreus wallichii Part III of Schedule I

2 Indian peafowl Pavo cristatus Part III of Schedule I

3 Kalij pheasant Lophura leucomelanos Part III of Schedule I

4 Red junglefowl Gallus gallus Schedule IV

5 Chukor Alectoris chukar Schedule IV

6 Black partridge Francolinus francolinus Schedule IV

7 Grey partridge Francolinus Pondicerianus Schedule IV

8 Common quail Coturnix coturnix Schedule IV

9 Red -wattled lapwing Vanellus indicus Schedule IV

10 Common hoopoe Upupa epops Schedule IV

11 Common Indian nightjar Caprimulgus asiaticus Schedule IV

12 Rufous treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda Schedule IV

13 Black-headed jay Garrulus lanceolatus Schedule IV

14 Yellow-billed blue magpie Urocissa flavirostris Schedule IV

15 Blue-throated barbet Megalaima asiatica Schedule IV

16 Coppersmith barbet Megalaima haemacephala Schedule IV

17 Paradise flycatcher Terpsiphone paradise Schedule IV

18 Pied bush chat Saxicola caprata Schedule IV 19 Indian robin Saxicoloides fulicata Schedule IV 20 Magpie robin Copsychus saularis Schedule IV

21 Common pariah kite Milvus migrans Schedule I 22 Rock pigeon Columba livia Schedule IV 23 House sparrow Passer domesticus Schedule IV 24 Common kestrel Falco tinnunculus Schedule IV 25 Spotted dove Streptopelia chinensis Schedule IV

26 Ring dove Streptopelia decaocto Schedule IV






Sr. No Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status

as Wildlife Protection Act, 1972

27 Spotted owlet Athene brama Schedule IV

28 Golden oriole Oriolus oriolus Schedule IV

29 Black-lored tit Parus xanthogenys Schedule IV

30 Great tit Parus major Schedule IV

31 Verditer’s flycatcher Muscicapa (Eumyias) thalassina Schedule IV

32 White-throated fantail flycatcher Rhipidura albicollis Schedule IV

33 Spotted forktail Enicurus maculates Schedule IV 34 Asian Koel Eudynamys scolopacea Schedule IV 35 Brainfever bird Hierococcyx varius Schedule IV

36 Eurasian eagle owl (Indian great-horned owl) Bubo bubo Schedule IV

37 Jungle babbler Turdoides striatus Schedule IV

38 Blue (himalayan) whistling thrush Myophonus caeruleus Schedule IV

39 Jungle crow Corvus macrorhynchos Schedule IV

40 Common myna Acridotheres tristis Schedule IV

41 Brahminy myna Sturnus pagodarum Schedule IV

42 Rock bunting Emberiza cia Schedule IV

43 Himalayan Bulbul Pycnonotus leucogenys Schedule IV

44 Red-vented bulbul Pycnonotus cafer Schedule IV

45 Black bulbul Hypsipetes leucocephalus Schedule IV

46 Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus Schedule IV

47 White-breasted king fisher Halcyon smyrnensis Schedule IV

48 Plum-headed parakeet Psittacula cyanocephala Schedule IV

49 Slaty-headed parakeet Psittacula himalayana Schedule IV

3.9.7 Majhatal Wildlife Sanctuary

This wildlife sanctuary is part of Kunihar Forest Division. Majathal Sanctuary

is situated in the Shimla and Solan districts. Its terrain is undulating and steep on

the mountain ridge in the south. It was established in: 1962 (first notified) and

March 1974 (re-notified).

Area and Altitude: It covers an area of 39.4 square kilometers on varying

altitudes of 900 to 1966 meters above sea level.

Forest Cover: Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary has a forest cover typical to the lower

elevations of the west Himalayan region. The forest is of Himalayan dry

temperate type.

Climate and Visiting Season: With an annual average temperature of -1 to

29°C, this sanctuary can be visited any time of the year. The monsoon season

during July to September has an annual rainfall of 1040 millimeters. The

probability of landslides increases when it rains. Forested with grasses dominating

the sanctuary are oak trees of ban, kharsu and moru species. Chir pine is the

only conifer growing in this area.

Fauna at the Majathal Sanctuary: Majathal Sanctuary has a good population

of the Cheer Pheasant and Goral. Other animals which inhabit the protected area

are Himalayan Black Bear, Leopard, Rhesus Macaque, Jungle Cat, Himalayan

Palm Civet, Yellow Throated Marten, Barking Deer, Sambar, Indian Wild Bear and






Langur. There considerable number of bird species residing the protected area

some rare ones such as oriental white backed vulture (Schedule-I), black

francolin and koklas pheasants and in total 104 species have been documented as

per the Envis database as given in Annexure-X (B).

3.9.8 Results of Primary Field Survey

3.9.8.1Terrestrial Flora

The terrestrial sampling results revealed that most of the areas which are

categories under Reserve forest and other protection status have comparatively

good forest cover and biodiversity. The study area has many villages, a road

network to few areas and also developmental pockets such as industries, mining

areas, agricultural land and human habitation. The study area also includes one

of the major river-Satluj and its associate tributaries. Many small streams and

springs emerge in different valleys which ultimately join the large river. The

streams and springs occurring in the study area are perennial while many others

are ephemeral. Because of the hilly terrains and steep elevation of the mountains

and the presence of streams and rivers, make it inaccessible hence many parts of

the forest areas still remain less disturbed. The authenticated list of flora

commonly occurring in the core as well as buffer zone of the study area is given

as Annexure-X (C).

The most dominant tree in the study area is Pinus roxberghii. This tree has a

conspicuous distribution in most of the areas and it does not allow much of the

under-growth. In most of the areas it has a uniform growth range and thus

reveals that these pine forests are the result of historic silviculture practices.

Other species also represent the region but with lower abundance, these are

Bombax ceiba, Cedrela toona, Emblica officinalis and Bauhinia variegate. The

other large tree representation is of Eucalyptus sp. mostly showing patchy

monoculture. The overall diversity of the under storey was observed to be low

owing to the presence of Pine forest and Eucaliptus plantations which allow very

less growth underneath.

Many areas have growth of Euphorbia royleana which forms a more open

scrubland forest with less number of large tree species. Weed intrusion can be

seen profoundly in all the areas and roadside vegetations and moreover in the

vegetation that are near the human habitation or villages. Species such as

Lantana camara, Nyetanthes arbor tristis, Tridax sp., Murraya koenigii and

Mallotus phillipinensis are very common and in many areas are the only dominant

shrubs out competing other species of shrubs and grasses.

Some areas have patches of Bamboo stands. The major species of bamboo that

dominates the study area is Bambusa arundinacea. Some of the bamboo clumps

can be seen dry which might be due to the flowering and drying of the entire

clump. The other bamboo stands of B. arundinacea which are green might have

late flowering and others seen to be green are of different species. The climber

Bauhinia vahlii is commonly observed in most of the vegetation and on the

roadside plantation. At some places the ground vegetation is occupied by grasses

like Agrostis stolonifera, Andropogon tristis, Chrysopogon echinulatus and

Dichanthium annulatum. The detailed list of plant species recorded from the






study area is given as Annexure-X (D) and the habitats with species in the

study area are depicted in Figure-3.9.2.

3.9.8.2 Terrestrial Fauna

Wide altitudinal ranges and varied topography has resulted in making it a very

rich repository of wild fauna. From dry deciduous to luxuriant temperate forests

to alpine scrub, the region has free ranging animals in all the climatic zones.

Whereas, Snow Black Bear, Wild Boar, Barking Deer, Sambhar, Rhesus Macaque,

Hanuman Langur, Jungle Cat, Hare, Fox and Leopard among mammals are

common inhabitants of the region. Birds like Chir Pheasant, Koklas, Kaleej Red

Jungle Fowl and Pea Fowl. The authenticated list of commonly occurring fauna in

the core and the buffer zone of the study area is given in Annexure-X (E) and

the detailed list of mammals, Reptiles and Amphibians is given in Annexure-X

(F). The list of birds observed during the study is given below in Table-3.9.8.

The list of butterflies from the study area is given in Table-3.9.9. The state is

endowed with a rich wildlife and some of the species have witnessed considerable

increase in population sizes and numbers after a ban on hunting was imposed in

the State. There are, however, lack of authentic data/figures regarding lower

groups of species, such as insects, molluscs, Soil-borne micro-fauna for example

soil nematodes and ciliates etc.






Eucalyptus stands Pinus roxburghii

Dry bamboo stands Lantana camara

Euphorbia royleana Stream in the study area

FIGURE-3.9.2

HABITATS IN THE STUDY AREA






TABLE-3.9.8

LIST OF BIRDS OBSERVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Common Names Sr No. Common Names

1 White Cheeked Bulbul 10 White Capped Water Redstart

2 Hill/Jungle Babbler 11 Common Myna

3 Blue Rock Pigeon 12 Great Tit

4 Red Headed Vulture 13 Crow Pheasant

5 Great Hill Barbet 14 Warbler

6 Red Jungle Fowl 15 Cheer Pheasant

7 Spotted Forktail 16 Himalayan Whistling Thrush

8 Red Whiskered Bulbul 17 Oriental White Eye

9 Red Billed Blue Magpie 18 Wallcreeper

TABLE-3.9.9

LIST OF BUTTERFLIES FROM THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name

1 Graphium agamemmos Tailed Jay

2 Papilo polymnstor Blue Mormon

3 Junonia altites Grey Pansey

4 Junonia almana Peacock Pansey

5 Pelopidas assamensis Great swift

6 Polytrema discrete -

7 Euploca core -

8 Euploca crassa -

3.9.8.3 Agro-Ecosystems

Agriculture being the major occupation of the people of this region, is also one of

the land use change that affects biodiversity. Clearing of forest areas for crop

cultivation and creation of orchards has reduced the forest areas to great extents

over the years. The legal protection to the existing forest lands somehow acts as

conservation effort and also is the matter of conflict between the wildlife and the

villages around the protected areas. Wildlife often intruders the farms for food

resources but there is no provision of compensation for crop damage by wild

animals, which further increases the conflict. Farmers are, however, allowed crop

protection licenses under which they can kill certain animals like Wild Boar,

Rhesus Macaque in their fields to save their crops from damage. However, such

option is seldom availed by the farmers due to procedural complexities or

religious sentiments.

The buffer zone has terrain farmlands on the hilly regions which primarily grow

rice, wheat, green vegetables, tubers etc. The presence of human population also

requires forest produce for their day to day activities. These resource demands

such as timber, firewood, medicinal plants impose great pressure on the nearby

forests thus leading to their degradation and destruction.

3.9.8.4 Biodiversity Issues and Concerns

There are no issues pertaining to the proposed expansion project such as land

acquisition and forest land, as the forest land diversion and the associated






clearances have been already approved and the copy of approval letter is

enclosed in Annexure-XI.

Other issues such as wildlife killing due to various reasons is one of the concerns,

the various factors may include, killing for flesh, trade or resistance against

attack. Accidental road kills is also an important reason as wildlife has been

observed to cross the roads for food and water.

The region includes forests established and/or standing on private lands, much of

which also supports natural vegetation and trees as part of traditional agro-

forestry practices. Such a landscape, irrespective of the legal designation of the

area or ownership rights, provides suitable habitat for wildlife. The wildlife often

strays from the forest into the open lands hence wildlife encounters in the state

are frequent, irrespective of the ownership of the land in which the forest is

located. This often gives rise to conflicting issues at the human-wildlife interface,

especially where land use changes are observed.

Many cases of such conflicts where the wild animals, especially Himalayan Black

Bear and Leopard, attacking cattle or even human beings are reported every year

from the state. Though there is a state policy and, therefore, rules to provide

financial compensation where these conflicts result in injury or loss to the life,

human-wildlife conflicts are becoming a major concern for the people as well as

the forest department.

Sheep and Goat grazing in the nearby forest areas is commonly practices while

the Cows are usually fed in stalls. Dogs are kept by villagers to protect the

livestock, interaction with the villages and observations suggest that wild

predators mainly leopard has an affinity to pick livestock and dogs hence the

dogs are wearing a broad metal belt around the neck to protect them from

predatory attacks.

Pressure on the forest areas is due to everyday household requirements in the

nearby villages for fodder, livestock feeding and fuel wood for cooking and

heating fireplace. Overgrazing, tree cutting, collection of NTFPs, grass and lopping

has resulted in degradation of many areas. The alteration of vegetation can be

seen wherein nuisance species and weeds have increased while replacing native

and important species.

3.9.8.5 Cryptogamic Vegetation

The area shows many algae, fungi, bryophytes and ferns. Fungi, particularly from

ascomycetes and basidiomycetes are located either on ground or epiphytically.

Lichens of crustose, foliose and fruticose types are present on different

substrates. Bryophytes occur in wet areas and occasionally on barks of trees and

old walls of houses and other structures. The diversity and abundance of these

species shows high seasonality depending on the availability of moisture.

3.9.8.6 Aquatic Biodiversity






The buffer zone of the study area has few freshwater streams/springs which are

mostly ephemeral and some remain perennial. All the streams and rivulets join

the main lotic water body ie. Sutlaj River.

Phytoplankton: The phytoplankton diversity is represented by all the three

major groups ie; Chlorophyceae, Bacillariophyceae and Cyanophyceae. The

presence of high number of diatoms shows that the water body has healthy water

quality while the presence of blue-green algae with other species that form mats

and aggregates indicate water stagnation. As the study area has steep elevation

gradient, resulting in high speed of the river that allows very selective species to

grow. Moreover the available nutrients and the amount of sunlight also determine

the species composition. The list of species from the study area is given in

TABLE-3.9.10.

TABLE-3.9.10

LIST OF PHYTOPLANKTON OBSERVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Scientific Name Scientific Name

Gyrosigma sp. Microcystis sp.

Achananthes affinis Navicula gracilis

Gyrosigma accuminatus Nitzschia gracilis

Pandorina sp. Chroococcus minutes

Ankistrodesmus falcatus Spirulina princepes

Ankistrodesmus var.tumidus Pinnularia braunii

Pediastrum boryanum Synedra tabulate

Scenedesmus bijuga Cladophora sp.

Melosira granulate Cymbella sp.

Cyclotella meneghiana Navicula radiosa

Zooplankton: Zooplankton species composition and diversity forms the main

dietary composition of fishes. Zooplanktons partially decide the diversity and

abundance of fish in a given water body. The zooplankton species composition in

turn decided by the available phytoplankton community. The zooplankton species

are also a good indicator of water quality as the resistant groups such as

copepods, other crustaceans and insects dominate the water body which has poor

water quality. The oligotrophic water bodies have high diversity and presence of

many other groups such as cladocerans, rotifers and Ciliates. The most commonly

occurring zooplankton species are given Table-3.9.11.

TABLE-3.9.11

LIST OF ZOOPLANKTON OBSERVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Scientific Name Scientific Name

Mesocyclops sp. Mesocyclops leuckarti

Keratella sp. Mesocyclops hyalinus

Keratella monospina Coleps hirsutus

Brachirous caudatus Arcella sp.

Asplancha brighwell Actinophyros sp.

Colpidium colpoda Asplancha sp.

Daphnia sp. Ceriodaphnia sp.

Ceriodaphnia reticulata

Benthos: These animals are attached on rocks, logs, sediment, debris and

aquatic plants during some period of their life cycle. Their distribution depends on

water velocity, volume of water and nature of stream bed as well as presence of






nutrients. Diptera is associated with poor water quality as they are more resistant

to pollution.

The Ephemeroptera were found at some locations which indicates good water

quality for biotic communities. Ephemeroptera, Diptera, Trichoptera, Coleoptera,

Odonata, Oligochaeta and Mollusca.

Fishes: Being a high altitude region, the study area has Satluj, a major river of

the Himalayan region. The species occurring in this part of the river are mostly

cold water species showing migratory behavior due to extreme weather events.

The migratory phenomenon of the fish species is directly related to its life cycle

as the fishes move from one habitat to other for spawning. The breeding

migration starts with the onset of monsoon when a rise in water level in search of

suitable breeding grounds up-river. Even winter migration takes place for the

purpose of feeding in most of the fishes migrate towards downstream. It is

usually the periods of fish migration when fishing activities intensify in the area.

There is no fishing community but fishing is done by the riparian human

populations as well as the migrant labours using illicit method of poaching or

sometimes hooks and line as well as cast net.

Rainbow trout and Mahasheer are the important fishes in Himachal Pradesh. The

major fishes available in the streams and rivers are Trout, Mahasheer,

Nemacheilus spp., Barilus sp, Schizothoracids Crossocheilus sp. Glyptothorax spp.

etc. The detailed list of fish species is given as Annexure-XII.

3.9.9 Conclusions

The study area comprises of Reserve Forests and two Wildlife Sanctuaries. The

Core zone of the study area does not harbour any Schedule-I species or

migratory corridors of any fauna. As the two protected areas viz; Bandli Wildlife

Sanctuary and Majhtal Wildlife Sanctuary fall within the study area have species

of conservation importance and thus shall need a Conservation Plan.

Initially wildlife management plan was prepared and approved by the Chief

Wildlife Warden Himachal Pradesh for Rs 54.12 lakhs for taking remedial

measures. The plan is under implementation and is being executed by the Wild

Life Department. Further, a conservation plan with a provision of Rs 50.00 lakhs

for Schedule-I wildlife species under Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 has been

prepared in consultation with state wildlife department and authenticated by

PCCF (WL) Himachal Pradesh Simla, attached as Annexure-XIII.

3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics

The baseline data on demographic and socio-economic conditions prevailing in

the 10 km radius of the proposed expansion of existing project is studied. The

study area extends to 3 districts covering 305 villages in, Arki Tehsil, Solan

District, Sundarnagar Tehsil, Nihri Sub-Tehsil, Mandi District, Bilaspur Sadar

Tehsil, Bilaspur District of Himachal Pradesh”.

The data is collected and presented in this section for assessing the impending

impact in the study area. The data is collected for developing Social Impact

Management Plan not only for preventing impending any adverse impacts, but

also to take measures for further socio- economic development of the study area






under its CSR initiative.

The proposed expansion of the existing project doesn’t have any rehabilitation

and resettlement issues. But the project proponent is committed to take up the

socio-economic development initiatives not only to minimize the negative impact

on the population and also to improve the socio-economic status of population

living in 10 km radius of the project site.

3.10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes;

A project site visit is made for ascertain the Demographic and Socio-economic

conditions, health, education profile of the project area. Primary data collection

on progress made by the project proponent on the R&R and CSR commitment till

date.

Review of published secondary data (District Census Statistical Handbooks-2011

and Primary Census Abstract of Census-2011) with respect to population, social

stratification, literacy rate and occupational structure for 10 km radius study

area.

3.10.2 Review of Demographic and Socio-Economic Profile-2011

The village wise demographic data of 305 villages falling within 10 km radius of

the project site as per the 2011 census is given in Annexure-XIV. The salient

features of the demographic and socio-economic conditions are analyzed and

described in the following sections.

3.10.3 Demography

As per the 2001 census the total population of the study area was 79285. The

population reported as per the 2011 census is 90084. Overall around 13.62%

decennial growth is reported in the study areas. The Himachal Pradesh decennial

growth rate of population is 12.9% and national decennial growth rate of

population is 17.7%

The growth rate of population in the study area comparatively reported

marginally higher than the growth rate of state and much less than the national

average.

Distribution of Population

As per 2011 census the study area consisted of 90084 persons inhabited in 305

villages covering 3 districts of Himachal Pradesh. The distribution of population in

the study area is shown in Table-3.10.1.






TABLE-3.10.1

DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION

Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km

No. of Households 1746 6620 9116 17482

Male Population 5333 17791 23530 46654

Female Population 4256 16845 22329 43430

Total Population 9589 34636 45859 90084

Male Population (0-6 years) 571 2234 2828 5633

Female Population (0-6 years) 539 2130 2534 5203

Total Population (0-6 years) 1110 4364 5362 10836

% of (0-6 Years) to total population 11.58 12.60 11.69 12.03

Average Household Size 5.49 5.23 5.03 5.15

% of males to the total population 55.62 51.37 51.31 51.79

% of females to the total population 44.38 48.63 48.69 48.21

Sex Ratio (no of females per 1000 males) 798 947 949 931

Density 172 201 294 215


Average Household Size

The study area has a household size of 5.15 as per 2011 census, which has

declined from 5.48 in 2001. This is mainly due to decrease of 0-6 year’s

population from 13.14% in 2001 to 12.03% in 2011 over the decade due to

population control measures, migration, health awareness programs and literacy.

Population Density

The density of population reveals that the study area has an overall density of

215 persons per km2 (PP km2) as per 2011 census reports.

Sex Ratio

The configuration of male and female indicates that the males constitute to about

51.79% and females to 48.21% of the total population as per 2011 census data.

The study area on an average has 931 females per 1000 males as per 2011

census reports, which is very significantly less in comparison to the state and

marginally less than national sex ratio (state 972 and national 943).

The scenario indirectly reveals certain sociological and cultural aspects in relation

with female births in the area.

3.10.4 Social Structure

In the study area, as per 2011 census, 24.25 % of the population belongs to

Scheduled Castes (SC) and 0.16 % to Scheduled Tribes (ST). Overall the data of

social stratification reveals that the SC and ST % to population is more than 24%,

which is found to be very significant. The SC and ST community are marginalized

and they are considered at low level of social strata and calls for a special

attention in Social Impact Management Plan for improving their socio-economic






status, apart from preservation and protection of their art, culture and traditional

rights of livelihood.

The distribution of population by social structure is shown in Table-3.10.2.

TABLE-3.10.2

DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION BY SOCIAL STRUCTURE


Schedule caste 1765 8842 11237 21844

% To the total population 18.41 25.53 24.50 24.25

Schedule Tribes 15 22 109 146

% To the total population 0.16 0.06 0.24 0.16

Total SC and ST population 1780 8864 11346 21990

% To total population 18.56 25.59 24.74 24.41

Total population 9589 34636 45859 90084

Source: District Census Hand Book–2011

3.10.5 Literacy Levels

The study area has the literacy rate of 70.56 % (2011). The distribution of

literate and literacy rate in the study area is given in Table-3.10.3.

TABLE-3.10.3

DISTRIBUTION OF LITERATE AND LITERACY RATES


Male Population 5333 17791 23530 46654

Female Population 4256 16845 22329 43430


Male Population (0-6 years) 571 2234 2828 5633

Female Population (0-6 years) 539 2130 2534 5203

Total Population (0-6 years) 1110 4364 5362 10836

Male literates 4092 13449 18614 36155

Female literates 2509 10169 14732 27410

Total literates 6601 23618 33346 63565

% of Male literates to the total literates 61.99 56.94 55.82 56.88

% of Female literates to the total

literates 38.01 43.06 44.18 43.12

Average Male Literacy to the total population (%) 42.67 38.83 40.59 40.13

Average female Literacy to the total population (%) 26.17 29.36 32.12 30.43

Total Literacy rate (%) 68.84 68.19 72.71 70.56


The male literacy i.e. the percentage of literate males to the total literates of the

study area works out to be 56.88 %. The female percentage of literacy to the

total literates, which is an important indicator for social change, is observed to be

43.12 % in the study area as per 2011 census records.

3.10.6 Occupational Structure

The occupational structure of residents in the study area is studied with reference






to main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include

10 categories of workers defined by the Census Department consisting of

cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged in live-stock, forestry, fishing,

mining and quarrying; manufacturing, processing and repairs in household

industry; and other than household industry, construction, trade and commerce,

transport and communication and other services.

The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of

less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The

non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired

persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other

non-workers who do not fall under the above categories.

As per 2011 census records altogether the main workers works out to be 33.43%

of the total population. The marginal workers and non-workers constitute to

26.86% and 53.33% of the total population respectively. The distribution of

workers by occupation indicates that the non-workers are the predominant

population. The occupational structure of the study area is shown in Table-

3.10.4.

TABLE-3.10.4

OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE



Total workers 5725 18232 23848 47805

Work participation rate (%) 75.74 58.47 58.82 60.30

Total main workers 2747 9652 14108 26507

% of main workers to total population 36.34 30.95 34.80 33.43

Marginal workers 2978 8580 9740 21298

% of marginal workers to total population 39.40 27.52 24.02 26.86

Non-workers 3864 16404 22011 42279

% of non-workers to total population 51.12 52.61 54.29 53.33

Source: District Census Hand Book-2011

3.10.7 Health Environment

Health facilities in the study area are there in all the three systems. There are 02

allopathic hospitals and 01 Ayurveda hospital in the study area. But the Govt.

PHC hospitals are found with inadequate facilities like ambulance and support

staff. In one of the PHCs doctor’s post is vacant for the past 3 months.

In the remote areas of the study area providing the health facilities is one of the

important role of government. Health is an important indicator for human

development, releasing this, based on the health needs of the area the JP group

has started an hospital in the project. The project proponent JP group is running a

30 beds hospital as part of its CSR initiative and serving around 27000 per annum

for common ailments like amoebiasis, gastro enteritis, diabetics, ailments,

bronchitis, asthama and other acute upper respiration. The hospital is found to be

providing good health services to the population in study area. Photographs of

Socio Economic Survey are shown in Figure-3.10.1.






FIGURE-3.10.1

SOCIO ECONOMIC SURVEY






3.11 Traffic Density Survey

The traffic studies have been conducted to know the prevailing traffic volumes on

the roads in the study area. It is essential to consider these details for assessing the

anticipated future traffic volumes as a part of overall impacts assessment for the

project.

The variations of traffic densities depend upon the working days and time and also

vary in day and night times. In order to assess the prevailing traffic volumes on the

roads, the survey was conducted during normal working days of the week by

avoiding local holidays or abnormal situations to reflect the true picture of the traffic

densities. The traffic study was conducted at one location for two days.

3.11.1 Selection of Sampling Location

The traffic density study was conducted at Kharsi to Baga road which is about 0.1

km away from the plant area.

3.11.2 Methodology

3.11.2.1 Vehicular Count

The vehicles plying in both the directions were counted continuously for 12 hours at

one location. The vehicles were counted every hour and recorded under respective

category. The maximum traffic count in an hour is termed as peak hour traffic. The

vehicles were categorized under various heads like trucks/tankers, buses, Multi

Axles, cars, 2/3 wheelers, cycles and bullock carts.

3.11.2.2 Categorization of Traffic

The engine driven vehicles were categorized into various heads viz. Light Motor

Vehicles (LMV) as two wheelers (scooters, motor cycles etc.), three wheelers

(auto rickshaws, 3-wheel tempo etc.); Medium Motor Vehicles (cars, jeeps),

tractors (6 wheelers), minibuses and mini trucks (8 wheelers); Heavy Motor

Vehicles such as Buses, trucks and Tankers (10 wheelers).

3.11.3 Results and Discussion

The summary of daily traffic count for the location was monitored during the study

period is summarized in Table-3.11.1 and % of composition of the vehicles are

given in the Table-3.11.2.

It was observed that the 2/3 wheelers, Cars/Jeeps and trucks/buses forms the

major volume of the traffic. The total traffic PCU of this road is minimal.

3.11.3.1Presentation of Results

The present level of traffic has been converted to Passenger Car Units (PCU) at this

location as per the conversion factors stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). The

Passenger Car Unit (PCU) recorded at the selected traffic location, which is towards

Kharsi to Baga Road is in between 3300 PCU to 3382 PCU.






TABLE-3.11.1

TRAFFIC DENSITY (VEHICLES/DAY)

Code Location Wheelers

(Bicycle/Sco

oter/

Motorcycle)

Wheelers

(Car/Jeep)

Tractors

Buses Trucks

Total

PCU’S

Day-1 Towards Kharsi to Baga Road

135 326 17 67 912 3382

Day-2 129 412 13 72 856 3300

Note: PCU rating: (2/3 wheelers: 0.5, Car/Jeep: 1.0, Tractor: 3.0, Buses: 3.0, Trucks/HMV: 3.0)

TABLE–3.11.2

COMPOSITION OF EXISTING TRAFFIC VOLUME

Code Total

Vehicles

No. Of Vehicles % Composition

LMV MMV HMV LMV MMV HMV

Day-1 1457 135 343 979 9.26 23.54 67.19

Day-2 1482 129 425 928 8.70 28.68 62.62

Note: LMV-Light Motor Vehicles (Scooter, Motorcycle & Auto Rickshaw etc.) MMV-Medium Motor Vehicles (Car, Jeep, Tractor, mini Bus, mini Trucks) HMV-Heavy Motor Vehicles (Bus, Trucks and Tankers)




Chapter-4 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures


4.0 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 Identification of Impacts

This chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts of the

proposed expansion of cement plant.

Generally, the environmental impacts can be categorized as either primary or

secondary. Primary impacts are those, which are attributed directly by the project

and secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced and typically

include the associated investment and changed pattern of social and economic

activities.

The impacts have been prepared assuming that the pollution due to the existing

activities such as rural & domestic activities has already been covered under

baseline environmental monitoring and continue to remain same during the

operation of the project. The project is likely to create impact on the environment

in two distinct phases:

During the construction phase which may be regarded as temporary or short

term; and

During the operation phase which would have long-term effects.

Impact prediction is most important phenomenon in evaluating the

environmentally potential adverse impact for any proposed project. The impact

prediction is always carried out under worst possible conditions so as to mitigate

or to eliminate the environmental hazards. These predictions thus calculated are

superimposed over the baseline data to calculate the net impact on the

environment after the project comes into production.

The construction and operation of the proposed expansion of cement plant project

comprises of various activities each of which will have an impact on some or other

environmental parameters. Various impacts during the operation phase on the

environment parameters have been studied to estimate the impact on the

environment and are discussed briefly below and elaborated in the subsequent

sections.

4.2 Impacts during Construction Phase

Line-I

No construction activity involved as the proposed enhancement of clinker

production will be by optimizing the operation parameters within the operating

plant.

Line-II

The proposed project includes the following activities such as leveling of site,

construction of main plant and other related structures, erection of plant






equipment like vertical roller mills, pre-calciner, rotary kiln, clinker cooler, cement

mills, packing units, coal mill and other related equipment.

4.2.1 Impact on Land Use

The proposed expansion project is within the existing cement plant complex.

Hence, there will not be any change in the land use and land cover. The total area

of the cement plant complex is 166.01 ha. The Line-II of the plant will be

established adjacent to the existing Line-I plant within the premises.

Hence, no additional land is required for the proposed expansion. The green belt

development will be in an area of 55.0 ha which is under development. The

existing roads are well established and will be further strengthened.

4.2.2 Impact on Soil

No vegetation at proposed project site. Hence no adverse impact on the soil in

the surrounding area is anticipated.

4.2.3 Impact on Air Quality

During construction phase, dust generation will be the main pollutant, which

would generate from the site development activities and vehicular movement on

the road. However, concentration of NOx and CO may also be slightly increased

due to increased vehicular traffic movement. To mitigate these impacts, regular

sprinkling of water will be done at the construction site. The approach roads will

be black carpeted and vehicles will be kept in good order to minimize automobile

exhaust.

However, the impact of such activities would be temporary and restricted to the

construction phase and will be confined to the project boundary and is expected

to be negligible outside the plant boundaries. Proper upkeep and maintenance of

vehicles, sprinkling of water on roads, providing sufficient vegetation etc are

some of the measures that would greatly reduce the negative impacts during the

construction phase.

4.2.4 Impact on Water Quality

Impact on water quality during construction phase may be due to non-point

discharges of solids from soil loss and sewage generated from the construction work

force stationed at the site. However, as the construction will be carried out on the

flat area, the soil losses will be negligible. Further, the construction will be more

related to mechanical fabrication, assembly and erection; hence the water

requirements would be meager. Temporary sanitation facilities (septic tanks and

soak pits) will be set-up for disposal of sanitary sewage generated by the work force

through contractors. The overall impact on water environment during construction

phase due to proposed project is likely to be short term and insignificant.






4.2.5 Impact on Noise Levels

The major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic,

construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes,

generators, pumps, compressors, rock drills, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc.

The operation of this equipment will generate noise ranging between 70-85 dB

(A). The noise produced during the construction will have significant impact on

the existing ambient noise levels. The major work will be carried out during the

daytime. The construction equipment may have high noise levels, which can

affect the personnel operating the machines. Use of proper personal protective

equipment will mitigate any significant impact of the noise generated by such

equipment.

4.2.6 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

Most of the land identified for the proposed project is already under industrial

category and cutting of trees will not be required. Therefore, no major loss of

biomass is envisaged during construction phase. Although the land required for

the proposed plant would be put to industrial use, there may not be any

significant impact on soil and agriculture in the general area. These impacts are,

however, restricted to the early phase of construction.

The removal of herbaceous vegetation from the soil and loosening of the topsoil

generally causes soil erosion during dry season. However, such impacts would be

primarily confined to the project site during initial periods of the construction

phase and would be minimized through adoption of mitigatory measures like

paving and surface treatment, water sprinkling and appropriate plantation

program. The project site and township area will be extensively landscaped with

the development of green belt consisting of a variety of taxa, which would enrich

the ecology of the area and add to the aesthetics.

Hence, in view of the above measures, the impact on terrestrial ecology would be

bare minimum and insignificant.

4.2.7 Demography and Socio-Economics

As the proposed expansion project site lies in the existing plant premises, there

are no persons who will be affected due to land acquisition and no rehabilitation is

required.

The non-workers constitute about 53.33% of the total population in 10 km radius

study area. Some of them will be available for employment in the proposed

expansion during construction activities. As the labourers are generally unskilled,

the locals would get opportunities for employment during construction activities.

In addition to the opportunity of getting employment as construction labourers,

the local population would also have employment opportunities in related service

activities like petty commercial establishments, small contracts/sub-contracts and

supply of construction materials for buildings and ancillary infrastructures etc.

Consequently, this will lead to economic upliftment of the area.






4.2.8 Impact on Climate

Temperature

The average, monthly minimum and maximum temperatures have been

monitored at the proposed plant site and also analyzed based on the data from

nearest IMD station at Sundarnagar. The trend of temperature shows a regular

cyclic pattern. The temperature pattern indicates a regional behavior and

construction of the cement plant complex will not have any bearing on the macro

level temperature patterns.

Rainfall

The average annual rainfall in the region is 1497.8 mm as per IMD data of

Sundarnagar. Any changes in the pattern of rainfall will be on regional scale

because of cumulative reasons. The operation of plant is not expected to have

any adverse effect on the rainfall pattern of the area.

Wind Speed

The wind speeds of any area depend on the existence of elevations and

depressions in the region. The proposed expansion will have minor change in

topography and creation of structures in project area and its immediate vicinity.

Due to change in the topography of the project area minor variations are

envisaged at local level.

Humidity

The relative humidity in the area is not likely to change because of the

construction operations, as it will not cause any changes in the prevailing

temperatures and rainfall of the region.

4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase for Line-I and Line-II

The cement plant project may cause environmental degradation and if adequate

control measures are not taken to prevent/mitigate the adverse environmental

impacts, these operations may cause irreversible damage to the ecosystem. The

environmental parameters which are most commonly affected by the project

activities are:

Land use/Land cover;

Soil;

Air quality;

Drainage;

Water resources and quality;

Noise levels;

Ecology (terrestrial and aquatic); and

Socio-economics.






4.3.1 Impact on Land use/ Land cover

No additional impact on land use and land cover is envisaged during the operation

stage of the project. The land use of the project site is under industrial use.

The land use pattern of the proposed expansion project is under industrial

category. No acquisition of land as the proposed expansion will be within the

existing cement plant complex.

4.3.2 Impact on Soil vis-à-vis Generation of Solid Waste

No solid waste will be generated in the process of cement plant. The dust

collected in air pollution control equipment will be re-cycled into the system.

Domestic waste generated in the form of sludge will be generated from the

sewage treatment plant, which will be used as manure for greenbelt

development.

Further, the proposed greenbelt program with diversified species not only

increases the biomass, soil fertility, productivity but also works as pollution sink

and control of soil erosion. Hence, the likely impact on the soil characteristics will

be insignificant.

4.3.3 Topography and Climate

The plant site is located on the hilly terrain which is already levelled as part of

Line-I project. Minimum leveling is required to be carried out during the

construction of the plant. This will not cause any significant topographical

changes in the area.

4.3.4 Impact on Air Quality

Particulate matter will be the major source of pollution. However following

measures are under implementation at the existing cement plant to minimize the

pollution:

Adequate capacity of air pollution control devices (Bag houses & ESPs)

installed at all point source to control the dust emissions;

Raw materials, intermediate product and product stored in closed, covered

yard/silos;

The bag filters installed at all the transfer points to control the fugitive

emissions from transportation and conveying of the material; and

The dedicated water tanker, accompanied with water spraying system

deployed to control the fugitive emissions from the roads (internal as well as

external).

SO2 emissions controlled, by proper raw mix design in such a way so that the

sulphur content in the fuel will be minimal.

Low NOx burner considered, kiln temperature & residence time of the combustion

maintained in such a way that there will be minimal NOx emissions in exit gases.






Details of Mathematical Modeling

For prediction of maximum ground level concentrations (GLC’s), the air dispersion

modeling software (AERMOD version 7.1.0) was used. AERMOD is steady state

advanced gaussian plume model that simulates air quality and deposition fields

upto 50 km radius. AERMOD is approved by USEPA and is widely used software.

It is an advanced version of industrial source complex (ISCST3) model, utilizes

similar input and output structure to ISCST3 sharing many of the same features,

as well as offering additional features. The model is applicable to rural and urban

areas, flat and complex terrain, surface and elevated releases and multiple

sources including point, area, flare, line and volume sources.

Dispersion modeling using AERMOD requires hourly meteorological data. Site

specific data recorded during pre-monsoon 2015 at project site is used for

executing modeling studies. The site specific meteorological data is processed

using AERMET processor.

Model Set-up

The model set-up details are presented in Table-4.1 below:

TABLE-4.1

MODEL SET-UP

Sr. No. Parameter Details

1 Model name AERMOD (Version 7.1.0)

2 Model type Steady state Gaussian plume air dispersion model

3 Topography Rural, hilly terrain

4 Averaging time 24 hours

5 Source type Point source

6 Boundary limits 10 km X 10 km

7 Co-ordinate system polar grid

8 Receptor height 0

9 Anemometer 10 m

10 Surface meteorological data Site specific data processed by AERMET

11 Upper air data Upper air estimator using AERMET processor

Model Input Data

The air pollution modeling carried out represents the worst case and normal

operating scenarios. The pollutants considered for modeling include suspended

particulate matter, sulphur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen.

The details of the stack and emissions envisaged from the proposed expansion

project Line-II are given in Table-4.2.

TABLE-4.2(A)

STACK DETAILS AND EMISSION RATES FOR THE EXISTING PLANT

(LINE-I)

Stack

Attached to H (m) Dia

(m) Temp oC

Exit Velocity

(m/s) PM

(g/s) SO2

(g/s) Nox

(g/s)

Raw mill / Kiln 150 8.20 230 5.94 12.52 43.6 14.3

Cooler 70.4 6.5 100 7.40 7.27 - -






Stack Attached to

H (m) Dia (m)

Temp oC

Exit Velocity (m/s)

PM (g/s)

SO2

(g/s) Nox

(g/s)

Coal mill 55 2.75 80 6.23 1.56 - -

Cement mill 65 5.0 80 5.31 4.40 - -

TABLE-4.2(B)

STACK DETAILS AND EMISSION RATES

EXISTING CEMENT PLANT (LINE-I) CLINKER EXPANSION

* Exit velocity (m/s) will be same in both cases as there will be changes in operational days of plant

The details of the stack and emissions envisaged from the proposed expansion

project Line-II are given in Table-4.3.

TABLE-4.3

STACK DETAILS AND EMISSION RATES FOR

THE PROPOSED EXPANSION (LINE-II)

Stack Attached to

H (m) Dia (m)

Temp oC

Exit Velocity (m/s)

PM (g/s)

SO2

(g/s) Nox (g/s)

Raw mill / Kiln 130 7.0 230 6.0 6.77 37.9 12.4

Cooler 70 5.5 110 7.5 6.84 - -

Coal mill 55 2.3 80 6.0 1.09 - -

Cement mill 65 3.8 80 5.2 2.54 - -

The predicted incremental Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) for PM, SO2 and

NOx likely to be contributed by the existing are presented in Table-4.4.

TABLE-4.4

SHORT TERM INCREMENTAL MODELING RESULTS

LINE-I & LINE-II

Pollutant Incremental Levels (µg/m3) Distance (km) Direction

PM10 3.27 2.8 SE

SO2 2.27 1.4 SE

NOx 0.73 1.4 SE

PREDICTED RESULTANT INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS DUE TO

AUGMENTATION

Parameter Baseline Conc.

(µg/m3)

Ground Level Concentration (µg/m3)

Predicted Resultant

Concentration after

Implementation

NAAQS 2009

Line-I & Line-II

PM10 67.4 3.27 70.67 100

SO2 14.8 2.27 17.07 80

NOx 19.2 0.73 19.93 80

Well within the limits as per NAAQS

Stack Attached to

H (m) Dia (m)

Temp oC Exit Velocity (m/s)

PM (g/s)

SO2

(g/s) Nox

(g/s)

Raw mill / Kiln 150 8.20 230 5.94 12.52 39.6 12.9

Cooler 70.4 6.5 100 7.40 7.27 - -

Coal mill 55 2.75 80 6.23 1.56 - -

Cement mill 65 5.0 80 5.31 4.40 - -






A perusal of the results reveal that the maximum short term 24 hourly

incremental ground level concentrations for PM, SO2 and NOx during normal

operations of the cement plant are likely to be 70.67 µg/m3, 17.07 µg/m3 and

19.93 µg/m3 respectively occurring at a distance of 1.4 km in SE direction during

pre-monsoon season.

The isopleths for pollutants PM, SO2 and NOx are presented in Figure-4.1, Figure-

4.2 and Figure-4.3.

Hence, the impact on the surrounding ambient air quality due to the proposed

project activity is likely to be within the permissible limits after implementation of

the project.

The cumulative impact assessment due to the industries within 10 km study area

is given in Annexure-XV.






FIGURE-4.1

SHORT TERM GLC CONCENTRATION OF PM






FIGURE-4.2

SHORT TERM GLC CONCENTRATION OF S02






FIGURE-4.3

SHORT TERM GLC CONCENTRATION OF NOx






4.3.4.1 Fugitive Emissions

The plant will be completely enclosed, so that fugitive dust will be very limited but

certain noxious gases will be emitted as a result of the fuel burned in the kiln. Air

emissions from coal are usually associated with trace elements including nickel,

arsenic, chromium and cadmium. Other contaminants are sulphur, nitrogen

chlorine and fluorine sulphur dioxide (SO2) will be the most significant air

pollutant from the combustion of coal. This has the potential for negative impact.

However, the technology used ensures compliance with norms. This fact, together

with the distance from near neighbours and lack of other sources of industrial or

urban pollution, should result in a very low level of human health impact.

Dust is generated by the limestone grinding plant, which will be fitted with the

best technology to limit dust emissions, in the workplace and emissions to the

environment, to within the MoEF/CPCB limits.

4.3.4 Impact Due to Transport

Transportation of incoming and outgoing material in cement plant will be by

road/rail and conveyor belt.

4.3.4.1 Impact of off-Site Traffic on Air Quality

On account of various associated activities, there will be increased vehicular

traffic on connecting roads. Generation of gaseous emissions is therefore, of

primary concern.

The extent of these impacts, at any given time depends upon

The rate of vehicular emission within a given stretch of the road; and

The prevailing meteorological conditions.

The impacts have strong temporal dependence as both of these factors vary with

time and would have diurnal, seasonal as well as long term components. The

transportation of incoming and outgoing material in the cement plant will be by

17 truck trips/hour.

The plant area has been taken as core zone and 10 km radius from boundary is

considered as study area for the present modelling study. The mode of

transportation of each incoming and outgoing material is presented in Table-4.5.

And for computation of traffic modelling studies frequency of vehicles has been

calculated for hour.

Environmental Impact Assessment for Expansion of Clinker Production Capacity from 2.97 MTPA to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-

II) to produce 2.50 MTPA Clinker & 1.50 MTPA Cement at Baga Village, Arki Tehsil, Solan District, Himachal Pradesh

Chapter-4

Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures


TABLE-4.5

DETAILS OF TRANSPORTATION

Raw Material Existing Plant

(Line-I) Clinker

Production Enhancement -

Line-I (2.97 to 3.5

MTPA)

Proposed Line-II

Total Capacity after expansion


No. of Vehicles

(trucks/day)

(To & Fro)

No of Vehicles

(trucks/hr)

PCU/hr (To &

Fro)

MTPA TPD* MTPA TPD* MTPA TPD* MTPA TPD*

A. Incoming Material

Limestone 4.50 13636.4

0.75 2272.7

3.9 11818.2

9.15 27727.3

Captive limestone mine

Pipe Conveyor e Belt + Covered Conveyor Belt

- - -

Laterite/Iron Ore

0.06 181.8

0.01 30.3

0.05 151.5

0.12 363.6 Madhya Pradesh Rail/Road 21 1 3

Coal/Petcoke/Imported

0.52 1575.8

0.09 272.7

0.45 1363.6

1.06 3212.1

MP/Bihar; Pet Coke from IOCL-Panipat HPCL-Bhatinda, Bina Refineries; South African Coal from

Rail/Road 184 8 23

Fly ash

0.41 1242.4

No Chang

e

0 0.5 1515.2

0.91 2757.6

Roper Power Plants in the vicinity

Road 158 7 20

Gypsum 0.10 303.0

No Chang

e

0 0.075 227.3

0.175 530.3 Rajasthan Rail/Road 30 1 4

Source: JHCP * PCU- Passenger Car Units * Based on 330 working days per annum Even though rail transportation is also proposed considering worst case ie;the entire transportation of raw material & finished product by road has been taken for modelling computations






TABLE-4.6

OUTGOING MATERIAL TRANSPORATION

Product Capacity

(MTPA)

TPD* No. of Trucks

(35 T Capacity)

Clinker (Out of 6.0 MTPA 3.0

MTPA will be utilised in Baga Cement Plant)

6.00 9090.9

(Only 3.0 MTPA considered)

260

Cement 4.04 12242.4 350

*Based on 330 working days in an year

Outgoing Transportation Material:

Total production of clinker will be about 6.0 MTPA. Out of this, 3.0 MTPA will be

utilised at Baga plant and remaining quantity 3.0 MTPA will be sent to Bagheri,

Roorkee and other grinding units. Total cement production will be 4.04 MTPA

which will be transported from plant to suppliers by road.

4.3.4.2 Details of Mathematical Modeling

For prediction of maximum Ground Level Concentrations (GLC’s), the air

dispersion modeling software (AERMOD version 7.1.0) was used. AERMOD is

steady state advanced Gaussian plume model that simulates air quality and

deposition fields upto 50 km radius. AERMOD is approved by USEPA and is widely

used software. It is an advanced version of Industrial Source Complex (ISCST3)

model, utilizes similar input and output structure to ISCST3 sharing many of the

same features, as well as offering additional features. The model is applicable to

rural and urban areas, flat and complex terrain, surface and elevated releases

and multiple sources including point, area, flare, line and volume sources.

Dispersion modeling using AERMOD requires hourly meteorological data. Site

specific data is used for executing modeling studies. The site specific

meteorological data is processed using AERMET processor.

Model Input Data

The predictions of traffic volume incremental concentrations of CO and NOX due

to additional traffic assumed are estimated based on site specific meteorological

conditions and line source. The emission rates as inputs to the line source model

are calculated based on “Emission factor development for Indian Vehicles”, a

project executed by Automative Research Association of India, Pune, 2008. The

inputs used for modeling area given in Table-4.7.






TABLE-4.7

PARAMETERS CONSIDERED FOR MODELLING

Sr. No. Parameter Description

1 Cement production

(Out of 6.0 MTPA 3.0 MTPA will

be utilised in Baga cement

plant)

Clinker: 6.0 MTPA

Cement: 4.04 MTPA

2 Truck capacity 35 T

3 No. of trucks 1002 trucks/day

4 Emission factors

CO (g/km/vehicle) 6.0

NOx (g/km/vehicle) 9.3

5 Emission rate

CO (g/s) 1.94

NOx (g/s) 2.85

Model Predictions

The predicted CO and NOx concentrations from vehicular traffic are presented in

Table-4.8. To & Fro vehicular movement has been considered for modelling

predictions.

TABLE-4.8

PREDICTED INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS DUE

TO ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC

Sr. No. Parameter Concentration ( g/m3)

1 Carbon Monoxide 40.0

2 Oxides of Nitrogen 58.6

The observation from predictions reveal that the maximum NOx and CO

concentration of 58.6 g/m3 and 40.0 g/m3 likely to occur at 10 m from the

centre of the road. The CO and NOx concentrations are likely to be very low when

compared with NAAQS for CO (4000 g/m3) and WHO standard of 400 g/m3 for

hourly average for NOx. Hence, it is assumed that the impact on the present

ambient air quality will be within the permissible limits due to the additional

traffic from the proposed project.

4.3.5 Impact on Traffic Density

Impact of Enhanced Traffic on Road Adequacy

With present level of traffic and the increase in existing traffic due to the project

during operational phase has been estimated by comparison with the

recommendations stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). The IRC

recommendations on traffic capacity are presented below in Table-4.9.






TABLE-4.9

RECOMMENDATIONS ON TRAFFIC CAPACITY - IRC

Sr. No. Category of Road Maximum PCU/day

1 Two lane roads (7-m) with earthen shoulders 15,000

2 4-lane highway with earthen shoulders 35,000

As per the above recommendations the existing road which is a two land road is

having maximum capacity of 15000 PCU/day. The estimated peak traffic in terms

of PCUs are compared with the stipulated standards by IRC for traffic capacity of

the existing road network.

4.3.6 Impact Due to Transport on Traffic Density

The incoming raw material and outgoing finished products have been considered.

The total number of vehicles per day due to existing plant is about 94 trucks per

days where as the increase in traffic due to expansion will be 908 vehicles per

day. PCU for total vehicles per day will be about 3006 which is less than IRC

standard given for two lane road category road. Project traffic impacts have been

analyzed in terms of generally acceptable procedures for trip generation, trip

distribution, and traffic assignment.

4.3.7 Impact on Drainage

The proposed expansion will be brought out within the existing premised of the

plant. Therefore, no adverse impacts are envisaged on drainage pattern of the

study area.

4.3.7.1 Impact on Water Environment

No additional water will be required for clinker expansion of existing Line-I.

The water requirement for proposed Line-II will be 1000 m3/day which will be

sourced from Sutlej river which is flowing at a distance of 2.2 Km from the plant.

IPH division Arki Himachal Pradesh has issued a clearance letter to draw 3500

m3/day of water from two nallas (Trendy and Padiyar) near their confluence with

Sutluj River. A copy of the same is enclosed as Annexure–VII.

However, JAL has already implemented the rain water harvesting structures, roof

top harvesting structures as well as check dams in surrounding area to recharge

ground water in the region.

Wastewater Generation

As the cement plant will be operated on the dry process and air is using as

cooling media, water is mainly used for water spray in cement mills. As the

system involved is a close circuit there is no scope for process wastewater

generation. The domestic wastewater will be treated in the existing STP and

utilized for green belt development. The wastewater generation from the

proposed cement plant is presented below in Table-4.10.






TABLE-4.10

DETAILS OF WATER CONSUMPTION AND WASTEWATER GENERATION

FROM THE PROPOSED EXPANSION OF CEMENT PLANT

Sr. No.

Particulars

Existing Plant

(Line-I)

Clinker Production

Enhancement -Line-I

(2.97 to 3.5 MTPA)

Proposed Line-II

Total Requirement

Source

1 Industrial

1000 (Cement plant + Mine)

No Change 800

(Cement plant)

1800

Existing sanction of 3500 m3/day from two nallas (Trenda & Padiyar) near their confluence with Satluj River (2.5 km from Plant Site)

2

Domestic & other consumption

700 No Change 200 900

Total 1700 -- 1000 2700

Source: JHCP

No process wastewater will be generated from proposed plant operations. Treated

sewage water will be used for watering the greenbelt. The plant will be operated

on “Zero Discharge Basis”. There will be no process wastewater generation in the

proposed cement plant and greenbelt development. The entire wastewater will be

utilized fully for suppression of dust and greenbelt development. Wastewater

generation will be mainly from sanitary wastes generated from domestic uses.

The sanitary treatment process includes bar screen, grit chamber, aeration tank,

clarifier, clarifloculator and sand filters. The effluent passes through bar screen

and grit chamber before the biological treatment in aeration tank. From the

aeration tank the effluent will be sent to clarifier to remove the solids and then to

clarifloculator with alum addition for settlement of fine solids by coagulation. The

effluent will then pass through sand filter. The sludge from the clarifloculator is

routed to sludge drying beds. The treated water will be reused for greenbelt

development.

Treated Effluent Characteristics

The expected characteristics of treated effluent are given in Table-4.11.

TABLE-4.11

EXPECTED TREATED WASTE WATER CHARACTERISTICS

Sr. No.

Parameters Treated Water

Limits as per GSR 422 (E) for on Land Irrigation

1 pH 7.0-7.5 5.5-9.0

2 Appearance Clear -

3 Total Suspended Solids (mg/l) <100 200

4 Bio-Chemical Oxygen Demand (3 days at 27oC)

<30 100

5 Oil & Grease <1.0 10.0






Effluent Disposal

The treated water will be reused for greenbelt development and other purposes.

Due to the above treatment process and 100% re-utilization of the treated water,

there will not be any adverse impact on the water quality as no effluent will be

discharged outside the plant premises or into any surface water bodies.

Impact of Noise Levels

Industrial complex consists of several sources of noise in clusters or single. These

clusters / single source may be housed in buildings of different dimensions made of

different materials or installed in open or under sheds. The noise levels at the

source will be in the range of 70-90 dB(A). For computing the noise levels at

various distances with respect to the plant site, noise levels are predicted using a

user friendly model.

Input for the Model

The prediction of incremental noise levels due to the proposed expansion project

has been carried out using mathematical model. Noise levels are mainly

generated from raw mill, kiln, coal mill, compressor house, pump house, cement

mill and packing plant. All the equipment are designed to comply with the

Factories Rules and Stipulations and will not exceed 90 dB (A) at 1 m distance.

The range of noise levels of machinery in cement plant are given in Table-4.12.

TABLE-4.12

EXPECTED NOISE LEVELS AT THE CEMENT PLANT

Sr. No. Location Noise Levels dB(A) Place of Monitoring

1 Limestone Crusher 76-80 Operators Cabin

2 Raw Meal Bins 86-100 Ambient Noise

3 Raw Mill – 86-100 3 m from Equipment

4 Kiln String Fan 76-96 3 m from Equipment

5 Calciner String Fan 76-96 2 m from Equipment

6 Coal Mill Main Motor 82-88 1 m from Equipment

7 Coal Mill Fan 85-90 1 m from Equipment

8 Coal Mill Blower Room 85-90 2 m from Equipment

9 Compressor House 82-105 2 m from Equipment

10 Pump House 85-89 3 m from Equipment

11 Kiln Main Motor Area 85-90 3 m from Equipment

12 Cooler ESP Fan 85-90 3 m from Equipment

13 Cooler Area 85-90 1 m from Equipment

14 Cement Mill 85-90 1 m from Equipment

15 Packers 75-80 Workers Exposure

Source: JHCP

Presentation of Results-Plant operations

The model results are discussed below and the predicted model results at plant

boundary are tabulated in Table-4.13. The predicted noise contours are given in

Figure-4.4.






TABLE-4.13

PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS AT PLANT BOUNDARY

Sr. No. Plant Boundary Noise Level, dB(A)

1 N 54

2 NE 50

3 E 52

4 SE 46

5 S 42

6 SW 42

7 W 54

8 NW 54

Work Zone Noise Levels

The damage criteria as enforced by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health

Administration) to reduce hearing loss, stipulates that noise level upto 90 dB (A)

are acceptable for 8 hour working shift per day. It was observed from the

modelling results that, high noise levels ranging between 42 to 54 dB (A) are

limited to work zone only. At the corners of the plant boundary, noise levels are

found to be <55 dB (A), which is well within the prescribed norms.

Adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear plugs will be provided

to the workers working in high noise areas. All the necessary noise protective

equipment will be supplied to workmen operating near high noise generating

sources. In addition, reduction in noise levels in the high noise machinery areas

could be achieved by adoption of suitable preventive measures such as suitable

building layout in which the equipment are to be located.

Community Noise Levels

Day and night sound pressure levels Ldn is often used to describe the community

noise exposure, which includes 10 dB (A) night time penalty. The predicted noise

levels at a distance of 0.3 km and above from plant boundary would be less than

<55 dB (A). Most of the human settlements are at a distance greater than ~1.9

km from the plant site. Hence, impact on general population would be

insignificant.






FIGURE-4.4

PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS AROUND THE PLANT

-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000

-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000

-1000

-800

-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000

-1000

-800

-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000






Impact on Ecology

The baseline flora and fauna has been depicted in Section-3.8 of Chapter-3. There

are two wildlife sanctuaries exist in 15 km radius circle.

The major ecologically sensitive aspects pertaining to the expansion of cement

plant project site are the forest areas and the faunal diversity in the adjoining

areas. The most important and sensitive area are the two wildlife sanctuaries

which harbours schedule-I species. These protected areas falls within the

boundary of the study area although the core area does not harbour any

scheduled-I species.

Impacts on Flora

Introduction of obnoxious or exotic species and increase in weed frequencies is an

important threat to the ecosystem functioning. These species might overwhelm

the local biodiversity and thus eliminate local species occurring in the adjoining

forest areas. There is likelihood of introducing exotic species due to clinker

capacity enhancement and proposed cement plant project activity. Influx of

humans and regular human movement from the project area and the adjoining

areas may result in introduction of obnoxious species. The vehicular movement

and road traffic also sometimes results in introduction of unwanted species. Air

emissions and increase in dust may also result in restricted growth, regeneration

and degradation of sensitive vegetation. Loss of top soil may occur if the

overburden is not conserved properly and restored. These alterations will have

low impacts in the future course of proposed development, thus the impacts will

be low from ecosystem functioning point of view.

Impacts on Fauna

All the species occurring in the study area have large species range and there is

no occurrence of endemic species in the core zone. Furthermore, the core project

area and the adjoining areas share similar habitat and thus clearing of ground will

not eliminate habitat of any species permanently. If the project activities are not

regulated, potential negative impacts can be anticipated on the fauna due to

increase in noise levels, deterioration of air emissions, increase in dust levels,

degradation of vegetation, elicit hunting and road kills.

Impacts on Water Bodies

Since the unit will be operating on zero discharge process, no adverse impact on

aquatic ecology is envisaged. The plant drainage system will be suitably designed

such that the storm water does not carry any pollutants.

Impacts on Ecosystem

The proposed activity does not result in vegetation clearing of large surface areas

of land, degradation of surrounding habitat, introduction of weeds, increased road

traffic, habitat fragmentation and wildlife poaching and forest fires. These

activities may act at the larger level and reduce ecosystem resilience.






Ecosystem resilience is the overall diversity of the habitat, which helps to resist

the adverse conditions and or calamities that may seriously damage that

particular habitat. The proposed enhancement of project area may impose

negative ecological attributes and might result in overall reduction in ecosystem

resilience of the habitat if the activities are not managed properly.

Cumulative Impacts

It is important to take into account a holistic view for better representation of the

predicted impacts of the proposed enhancement of project. This requires a

consideration of cumulative impacts of existing and past developmental activities

in the vicinity of the project. The addition of present capacity enhancement and

proposed cement plant project with the earlier large and small-scale activities

shall give cumulative impacts. This may further be analysed by adding the

proposed and predicted developmental activities in the near future if known.

Existence of other industrial activities which are located in the study area may

attribute to overall high disturbance to the ecosystems. The secondary impacts

that occur are due to increase in human pressure result in tree cutting, lopping,

cattle grazing and absence of large mature trees.

Mitigation Measures

The anticipated impacts due to air, water and noise and soil have been mitigated

by adhering to the norms of respective regulatory guidelines and using best

practices in the industry.

Considering the proximity of the proposed project to the two Wildlife Sanctuaries

and the anticipated impacts, a Wildlife Conservation Plan has been prepared to

mitigation the possible impacts is enclosed in Annexure-XIII and a green belt

development plan has been prepared to mitigation any residual impacts is

enclosed in Annexure-XVI.

Impacts on Socio-Economics

Impacts on Employment Generation

The project will require about 250 personnel during operation of plant. In addition

to the above, contract labour will be required for carrying out the activities of

unloading coal, gypsum, iron ore from trucks as also for loading of trucks with

cement filled bags and cleaning work.

This project will also create many job opportunities for the local people. Local

people will be given preference whenever found suitable for all the jobs in the

plant. The employment of people will be both on permanent as well as on

contract basis.

The company may need to have a network of retailers (cement stockiest)

throughout the state and in its marketing regions. Each stockiest will have at

least three employees. This will provide employment to several thousand persons.

Thus, the project will have a positive impact on the employment pattern of the

region.






Impacts on Infrastructure Development

The availability of social infrastructure depends to a large extent on the

industrialization of the area. The establishment of the cement plant would aid in

the overall social and economic development of the region.

Apart from jobs, the JHCP will provide medical and educational facilities to the

employees, which can also be availed by the people around the plant. There will

be significant growth in the infrastructure of the area. The company is also

dedicated towards community development by organizing immunization programs

and medical camps, mobile dispensary etc.

Economic Multiplier Effect of the Project

The proposed project would act as a nucleus to trigger an era of industrialization

in the area by way of:

Regular availability of cement would be ensured, triggering continuous

construction activity in the various parts of the central and northern regions;

The industrial activity of the proposed plant coupled with its ancillary

industries would contribute to overall regional development;

The realization of the project will result into direct revenue accruals to both

state and central exchequer in terms of power tariff, taxes, duties, royalties as

also direct and indirect employment besides the easy availability of cement

and increased industrial activities in and around the region;

Cement based industries like hume pipes, cement concrete poles, cement

concrete prefab structures etc. could be developed since regular availability of

cement will be ensured from the plant within the state;

Since the cement plant alone will consume considerable amount of HDPE

bags, bag manufacturing units are likely to come up;

Ancillary industries, which would cater to the proposed expansion of JHCP

plant, would also come up around the plant site. Thus plant site may become

a growth center with educational, medical, sanitary, sports and entertainment

facilities; and

The company would be buying substantial quantity of stored items from within

the state and more shops that would cater to the proposed expansion of JHCP

plant would come up.

Impacts on Human Health

The impact from the air emissions of PM is not expected to be significant since

the stack design and the atmospheric conditions are such that the ambient air

quality at present as well as in future after the implementation of the project will

be well within the prescribed ambient air quality limits set forth by CPCB. The

proponents of this facility will adopt effective control systems at all the identified

sources of dust generation.






Impact on Human Settlement

Land for construction of cement plant is already under possession of proponent

and replacement of people or rehabilitation of people is not envisaged. Hence, no

impact on human settlements is envisaged.

Impact on Civic Amenities, Educational and Heath Care Facilities

The existing project has created desirable civic amenities in the area. The

population from the surrounding villages are getting social benefits in the form of

education, drinking water, sanitation, roads, communication facilities,

transportation, marketing, banking, postal services, and health facilities directly

and indirectly. The project located, Baga village of Mangal Panchayat, is

converted to non-backward village from the backward village category.

Government of Himachal Pradesh Planning department notification number PLG

(BASP)/2012-13(Misc.)).

JHCP committed to continue the improvement of the civic amenities and providing

the services, thus impacting on the socio-economic development of the

population. Details of the CSR expenditure are given in Annexure-XVII.

4.4 Impact on Places of Tourist/Religious/Historical Importance

There are no places of historical importance in the near vicinity. Hence, no

adverse impact is anticipated on any place of historical importance due to

expansion of cement plant.

4.5 Indirect Impacts

4.5.1 Impacts on Public Health and Safety

Plant will be operated on zero discharge concept. Stack emissions will be well

below the prescribed norms. Hence no adverse impact on public safety and health

is envisaged. It is predicted that the impacts on public safety will be negligible,

due to the effective safety system and safety management available in the plant.

4.5.2 Impacts on Cultural Resources

There are no historical monuments or ancient temples within the study area.


MTPA to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA


Chapter-4A Environmental Control Measures of Fugitive Emissions

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C4(A)-1

4A.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL MEASURES OF FUGITIVE EMISSIONS

Effective control measures for potential fugitive emission sources in cement

manufacturing plants, specific requirements along with guidelines have been

given by CPCB. In order to establish proper management practices, requirements

such as operation and maintenance aspects trained manpower and documents

and records to be maintained.

Adequate measures have already been implemented/incorporated in the design of

existing plant to control the fugitive dust generation. Latest design of dust

collection and extraction system/bag filter have been installed at various transfer

point to minimize fugitive dust emission and same practice will further be

implemented/adopted for expansion project. Measures for effective section wise

prevention and control measures for fugitive emissions to be provided are given

in the following sections.

4A.1 Unloading Section

Control measures for reducing the fugitive dust in unloading section area given in

Table-4A.1.

TABLE-4A.1

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE UNLOADING SECTION

Sr. No. Control Measures Proposed

be Provided Details

1 Enclosure would be provided for all unloading operations, except wet materials like gypsum

The enclosures for the unloading sides would be flexible curtain type material covering up to height of dumpers discharge from the roof.

2 Water shall be sprayed on the material prior and during Unloading

A dust suppression system would be provided to spray water. The amount of water sprayed would preferably be optimized by employing proper design of spray system. Suitable systems will be adopted to reduce the problems like choking, jamming of the moving parts.

4A.2 Material Handling Section

Control measures to be taken in material handling sections are given in Table-

4A.2.

TABLE-4A.2

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE MATERIAL HANDLING SECTION


be Provided Details

1 All transfer point locations would be fully enclosed

The enclosures from all sides with the provision for access doors, which shall be kept, closed during operation. Spillages would be periodically removed

2 Airborne dust at all transfer operations / points would be controlled either by spraying water or by extracting to bag filter

Either water spray system would be provided for suppressing the air borne dust or dry extraction cum bag filter with adequate extraction volume

3 Belt conveyors would preferably be closed

This will avoid wind blowing of fines






4A.3 Coal Storage Section

Control measures to be adopted in coal storage sections are presented in Table-

4A.3.

TABLE-4A.3

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE COAL STORAGE SECTION

Sr. No. Control Measures Proposed be

Provided Details

1 Coal yard / storage area would be clearly earmarked.

A board would be erected to display the area earmarked.

2 The pathways in coal yard for vehicle movement would be paved.

Proper pathways with entry and exit point would be provided.

3 Accumulated dust shall be removed / swept regularly and water the area after sweeping.

Any deposits of dust on the concrete roads would be cleaned regularly by sweeping machines.

4 The coal stock pile would preferably be under covered shed.

The enclosure would be from three sides and roof so as to contain the airborne emissions.

5 Dust suppression measure with following additional control measures would be provided.

a Wetting before unloading.

Coal would be sufficiently moistened to suppress fines by spraying minimum quantity of water, if possible.

b Spray water at crusher discharge and transfer points.

Water spray would also be applied at crusher discharge and transfer points.

4A.4 Clinker Cooler Section

Control measures and preventive measures to control fugitive emissions from

clinker cooler sections are provided in Table-4A.4.

TABLE-4A.4

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE CLINKER COOLER SECTION


be Provided Details

1 Air borne fines extracted from clinker cooler shall be separated and sent to last possible destination directly.

Clinker and cement dust generated from the process being trapped in pollution control devices especially Bag house & ESP. The dust so collected is 100% recycled back to the last possible destination ie; clinker & cement silo respectively. Fines separation may be achieved by passing collected dust through cyclone, the fines escaping cyclone to be separated, cyclone collection (coarse particles) would be recycled.

4A.5 Clinker Stock Piles Section

Control measures to be taken in clinker stock piles section are given in Table-

4A.5.






TABLE-4A.5

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE CLINKER STOCK PILES SECTION

Sr. No.

Control Measures Proposed be Provided

Details

1 Clinker would be stored in silo

Closed RCC silo of adequate capacity has been constructed. For transportation of clinker, closed pan conveyor-belt has been provided.

2 The dust extracted and captured in bag filter would be avoided to feed back / recycled to the clinker stockpile

Extracted dust would be captured in bag filter and the collected dust would be avoided to feed back to the clinker stockpile, is recycled at last possible destination.

4A.6 Storage of Raw Materials and Additives

Control measures for control of dust emissions in storage of raw materials and

additives are given in Table-4A.6.

TABLE-4A.6

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE STORAGE OF RAW MATERIALS AND ADDITIVES

Sr. No. Control Measures Proposed be

Provided Details

1 The storage would be done under covered shed.

The enclosure walls shall cover minimum two sides up to roof level.

2 Dry flyash shall be transported by closed tankers. In case of wet flyash trucks may be used for transportation.

Flyash shall be pumped directly from the tankers to silos pneumatically in closed loop such that fugitive emissions do not occur.

3 Dry Flyash shall be stored in silos only.

The silo vent be provided with a bag filter type system to vent out the air borne fines.

4 Flyash in the dry form would be encouraged and in wet form would be discouraged.

The dry flyash would be sent to closed silos and transported to the respective cement mills through a set of air slides and bucket elevator and controlled by a solid flow meter dozing valve combination.

4A.7 Cement Packing Section

Measures to be taken in packing section are given in Table-4A.7.

TABLE-4A.7

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE CEMENT PACKING SECTION


be Provided Details

1 Providing dust extraction arrangement for packing machines.

The packing machines would be equipped with dust extraction arrangement such that the packing operation is performed under negative pressure. The dust may be captured in bag filters.

2 Providing adequate ventilation for the packing hall.

Adequate ventilation for the packing hall would be provided for venting out suspended particulate thereby ensuring dust free work environment.

3 Spillage of cement on floor shall be minimized and cleared daily to prevent fugitive emissions.

The spilled cement from the packing machine would be collected properly and sent for recycling. The spilled cement on the shop floor would be swept by vacuum sweeping machines periodically.






Sr. No. Control Measures Proposed be Provided

Details

Proper engineering controls to prevent the fugitive emissions may include arrangements like providing guiding plate, scrapper brush for removing adhered dust on cement bag etc.

4 Prevent emissions from the recycling screen by installing appropriate dust extraction

system.

The vibratory screen provided for screening/ recycling spilled cement would be provided with a dust extraction arrangement to prevent fugitive

emission from that section.

4A.8 Silo Section

Preventive and control measures to be taken in silo section are given in Table-

4A.8.

TABLE-4A.8

CONTROL MEASURES IN THE SILO SECTION


be Provided Details

1 The silo vent be provided with a bag filter type system to vent out the air borne fines.

The bag filter would be operated and maintained properly, especially the cleaning of bags to avoid pressurization of silos thereby causing fugitive emissions from leakages etc.

4A.9 Roads

Fugitive dust control measures to be taken on roads are given in Table-4A.9.

TABLE-4A.9

CONTROL MEASURES ON THE ROADS


be Provided Details

1 All roads on which vehicle movement of raw materials or products take place would be paved.

The paved roads would be maintained as paved at all times and necessary repairs to be done immediately after damages to the road if any.

2 Limiting the speed of vehicles. Limiting the speed of vehicle to 10 km/h for heavy vehicles within the plant premises to prevent the road dust emissions.

3 Employing preventive measures to minimize dust build up on roads.

Preventive measures include covering of trucks and paving of access areas to unpaved areas.

4 Carry out regular sweeping of roads to minimize emissions.

Mitigative controls include vacuum sweeping, water flushing.

4A.10 Maintaining Documentation and Records

The complex will maintain records to document the specific dust control actions

taken and maintain such records for a period of not less than two years and make

such records available to the regulatory authorities upon request, Table-4.31

details the documents and records proposed to be maintained.






4A.11 Employing of Trained Manpower

The complex will employ or contract a “dust control officer” who will be

available on site during working hours and would have authority to

expeditiously employ sufficient dust mitigation measures to ensure control of

fugitive emissions especially in abnormal circumstances. Environmental Officer

may act as a Dust Control Officer. A suitably qualified person would be

designated to operate as dust control officer. He would be provided necessary

training and would be aware of operational, maintenance aspects. He would

be responsible for proper control of fugitive emissions.

Regular training would be given to the personnel operating and maintaining

fugitive emissions control systems on the operational and maintenance

aspects and record keeping responsibility.

4A.12 General Control Measures

Apart from the specific control measures provided for some specific

sections/areas, for all other fugitive dust emitting areas, following general control

measures will be provided.

The complex would prevent fugitive emission from all active operation and

storage piles, such that the emissions are not visible in the atmosphere beyond

the boundary line of the emission source.

The complex will conduct active operations by utilizing the applicable best

available control measures to minimize the fugitive dust emission from each

fugitive dust source type within active operation.

Except for gypsum and clinker, all storage piles would be kept in moist

condition by spraying water at regular intervals for controlling fugitive

emission, wherever possible

The operation of the pay loaders will be slowed down whenever the average

wind speed is high exceeding 50 km/h, which may cause fugitive emission.

All storage silos will be vented to bag filters, which would have proper bag

cleaning arrangement so as to avoid choking of filter bags, thereby to avoid

pressurization of silos.

Regular inspection at a pre-determined frequency will be carried out of all

fugitive dust control system and records be maintained of such inspection and

corrective action taken if any.

4A.13 Fugitive Emission Standards

Monitoring will be done for fugitive emissions and the location of monitoring

stations will be decided based on GSR 414(E), 30th May 2008 MoEF notification.

The sources of fugitive emissions / monitoring stations as per the said notification

are given below in Table-4A.10.






TABLE-4A.10

SOURCES OF FUGITIVE EMISSIONS

Sr. No. Area Monitoring Location

1 Raw material handling area Screen area, transfer points, stock bin area

2 Crusher area Crushing plant vibrating screen, transfer points

3 Raw material feed area Feeder area, mixing area, transfer points

4 Cooled discharge area Oversize discharge area, transfer points

5 Product processing area Intermediate stock bin area, screening plant, magnetic separation unit, transfer points, over size discharge area, product separation area, bagging area

6 Other areas As specified by SPCB




Chapter-5 Environment Management Plan


5.0 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

5.1 Introduction

The industrial development in the study area needs to be intertwined with

judicious utilization of non-renewable resources of the study area and within the

limits of permissible assimilative capacity. The assimilative capacity of the study

area is the maximum amount of pollution load that can be discharged into the

environment without affecting the designated use and is governed by dilution,

dispersion and removal due to physico-chemical and biological processes.

The Environment Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable

development in the study area (10 km) of the plant, hence it needs to be an

encompassing plan for which the plant authorities, Government, Regulating

agencies like Pollution Control Board etc working in the region and more

importantly the affected population of the study area need to extend their

cooperation and contribution.

The management action plan aims at controlling pollution at the source level to

the extent possible, with the available technology, followed by treatment

measures before they are discharged.

In addition to the plant specific control measures, the proposed industrial

establishment shall follow the following guidelines:

Application of Low and Non Waste Technology (LNWT) in the plant process;

and

Adoption of Reuse and Recycling technologies to reduce generation of waste

and optimize the production cost of the cement and clinker.

Sound environment management plan by the plant authorities is required to

mitigate the impacts of the plant with its surrounding environment. The main

objectives of the EMP are to:

Keep the environment free from uncomfortable or unpleasant pollutants;

Substantial saving of raw material thus helping in resource conservation; and

Improvement in the quality of life resulting in indirect improvement in the

productivity as a whole.

In order to minimize these adverse impacts and to ensure that the environment

in and around the project site as well as the neighboring population is well

protected; an effective environment management plan is developed in the

existing cement plant under operation.

5.2 Environment Management during Construction Phase

Line-I

No construction activity involved as it is an operating plant.






Line-II

The construction activities of the proposed plant will have some adverse impact

on the environment. The activities during the construction phase of proposed

plant include site preparation, transportation of construction materials and

equipment and construction of the infrastructure facilities. During this phase, it is

imminent that workers/labourers would be staying on site till the completion of

the construction work. However, this is not considered as a long-term impact. The

project proponents, in order to minimize these impacts would undertake adequate

preventive and remedial measures as outlined below:

5.2.1 Air Pollution Management

There will be no major leveling operations required. Hence, no excavation of the

area except for the purpose of foundation is envisaged. However, during dry

weather conditions, dust is likely to be generated from excavation and

transportation activities. Hence, it is necessary to control the dust generated by

excavation and transportation activities. At the proposed plant site, dust

generation shall be controlled by water sprinkling. Ambient air levels of SO2 and

NOx are likely to increase due to the operation of construction machinery.

However, the concentration levels are expected to be insignificant since these

emission sources will be operated intermittently. It shall be ensured that both

gasoline and diesel powered construction equipment are properly maintained to

minimize smoke in the exhaust emissions.

5.2.2 Noise Environment

Noise generation during construction phase is due to the operation of heavy

equipment and increased frequency of vehicular traffic in the area. However,

these impacts are short term, intermittent and temporary in nature. The effect of

noise on the nearest inhabitants during the construction activity will be negligible,

as the noise will be diffused by the natural obstructions and with distance.

However, it is advisable that on-site workers working near high noise generating

equipment shall adopt noise protection devices like earmuffs, ear plugs. Noise

prone activities have to be restricted to the extent possible during night

particularly during the period 10 pm to 6 am in order to have minimum

environmental impact.

5.2.3 Water Environment

The water environment is likely to change due to the construction activity

because of the effluents from sanitary facilities for the construction workers,

washing of vehicles and spillage of fuels.

The vehicle maintenance area shall be located in such a manner to prevent

contamination of surface and ground water sources by accidental spillage of oil.

Unauthorized dumping of waste oil shall be prohibited.






5.2.4 Sanitation

The construction site shall be provided with sufficient and suitable toilet facilities

for workers to meet the proper standards of hygiene. These facilities shall

preferably be connected to the septic tank followed by soak pits to ensure

minimum environmental impact.

5.2.5 Land Environment

As soon as the construction is over, the surplus earth has to be utilized to fill up

low-lying areas, the rubbish is to be cleared and all unbuilt surfaces reinstated.

The site is covered by shrubs and is devoid of trees. Thus, it does not involve any

cutting of trees. Appropriate vegetation shall be planted after construction activity

and all areas shall be landscaped.

5.2.6 Flora and fauna

The measures required to be undertaken to minimise the impact on the ecology are:

The felling of trees will be kept at minimum;

Transplantation of existing matured trees will be undertaken and transplanted in

the area earmarked for greenbelt development; and

The greenbelt having vegetation density of 2500 trees/ha will be developed.

5.2.7 Socio-Economics and Demography

Normally, the construction activity will benefit the local populace in a number of

ways such as supply of construction labourers-skilled, semi-skilled and untrained,

secondary sector employment and provision of goods and services for daily needs

including transport.

5.2.8 Storage of Hazardous Material

The hazardous materials anticipated to be stored at the site during construction

include petrol and diesel, gas for welding purpose, paints and solvents. These

materials shall be stored as per the international safety norms in ventilated

enclosures. Site has to be identified for the storage of diesel away from the

construction site.

5.3 Environment Management during Operation Phase

5.3.1 Air Pollution Management

The main problem from the cement plants is on account of the particulate matter

emission during manufacturing process. This is due to the handling of fine

powders at each stage of manufacturing. The sources of air pollution from the

proposed plant are the stack emissions and fugitive emissions. The proposed

expansion will generate particulate matter (PM) from the stacks and SO2 & NOx

emissions from the Kiln. The details of stack design, emission details, and control

equipment for the proposed plant are given in Chapter-2 & Chapter-4.






The maximum short-term 24 hourly incremental ground level concentration due

to the operation of the plant are likely to be well within the NAAQ standards.

Therefore, the proposed activity is not likely to have any significant adverse

impact on the air environment.

5.3.1.1 Air Pollution Control Schemes

Adequate and efficient control equipment are already installed in existing plant

and will meet the prescribed emission norms after capacity enhancement of

clinker in Line-1. Major pollution control system and other ventilation systems will

be installed in the proposed cement plant to keep the dust emission at a

minimum. The details of the control equipment are given in Table-5.1. A suitably

designed reverse air bag house at raw mill and Bag-house for coal mill and

cement mill, ESP at clinker cooler section are placed downstream of the chimney

will separate out about 99.98% of the incoming dust in flue gas and limit the dust

concentration at its outlet to well within 50 mg/m3.

Online particulate monitor will be installed for kiln/raw mill stack;

Process interlocking system provided to trip off the complete system in case

of raise in temperature of the gases and dust particulate across the glass fibre

bag house and bag filters, which will trip the entire systems;

As far as gaseous pollution is concerned, the impact of Carbon Monoxide (CO)

emission is negligible in view of the firing technique of keeping a positive

oxygen balance. However, regular monitoring and continuous auto regulation

of fuel and air by automatic combustion control system is an indispensable

part of all large cement plants; and

Generation of NOx gases depends to a great extent on the combustion

temperature. Highly efficient pyro-jet burner based on latest technology has

been installed at kiln firing inlet and same will be adopted for proposed

cement plant (Line-II) also.

TABLE-5.1

AIR POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENTS

Sr. No. Area Control Equipment

Major Pollution Control System

1 Raw Mill/kiln system Bag House

2 Coal Mill Bag Filter

3 Cooler ESP

4 Cement mill Bag Filter

Other Ventilation Systems

1 Limestone feeders Bag Filter

2 Raw meal blending silo Bag Filter

3 Pet coke silo Bag Filter

4 Coal/pet coke bins Bag Filter

5 Clinker Silo Bag Filter

6 Clinker transport to cement mill/TP Bag Filter

7 Multi-compartment cement silo Bag Filter

8 Packing machine Bag Filter






Fugitive Emissions

To control the fugitive emissions the following measures are proposed:

All the conveyors will be provided with conveyer covers and hoods to offset

any trapping of material in wind stream. The height of the chutes at each of

the transfer points and the slope of chutes to be considered to avoid dust

generation;

High efficiency reverse air jet type bag filters are considered to arrest the air

borne dust at all the locations where transfer of material from one conveyor to

other takes place;

The automatic bagging machine with bag filters are installed for packing

plant;

Unloading of coal trucks will be carried out with proper care avoiding dropping

of the materials from height. It is advisable to moist the material by sprinkling

water while unloading;

The sprinkling of water will be done along the internal roads in the plant in

order to control the dust arising due to the movement of vehicular traffic;

All the workers inside the plant will be provided with disposable dust masks;

and

Thick greenbelt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive

emissions.

5.3.1.2 Traffic Congestion

In order to avoid traffic congestion, the existing PWD road between Baga (Tehsil

Arki) and Jabbal (District. Solan), 17 km has been upgraded to NH standards,

connecting project site to NH-88 at a cost about Rs.48.00 Crores. It has been

widened to double lane standard. Concrete pavement of the road, where ever

required, has also been done. For the transport of raw material/finished products,

the covered trucks area being deployed by the transport societies.

All roads are being maintained in good shape & condition and, have trouble free

incoming and outgoing traffic. The photographs showing the control of traffic

congestion is given in Figure-5.1.






FIGURE-5.1

CONTROL OF TRAFFIC CONGESTION

WIDENING & UP-GRADATION OF ROAD BETWEEN PLANT AREA (BAGA) & KHARSI SECTION (6 KM)

WIDENING & UP-GRADATION OF ROAD BETWEEN RANIKOTLA

JABBAL SECTION (11 KM)

CONCRETE PAVEMENT OF APPROACH ROAD AT SHALUGHAT






FIGURE-5.2

CONCRETE PAVEMENT OF INTERNAL ROAD WITHIN PLANT






5.3.2 Noise Pollution Management

There are stationary as well as mobile noise generating sources in the plant.

These noise sources will be generating noise continuously as well as

intermittently. The noise levels are likely to be reduced to 50 dB(A) at 0.5 km

distance.

The greenbelt developed around the boundary of the plant will further attenuate

the noise emitted by the various sources in the plant.

Other than the regular maintenance of the equipment, earplugs are provided for

the personnel working close to the noise generating units as a part of the safety

policy. Apart from this, some of the design features provided to ensure low noise

levels are as follows:

All rotating machinery are well lubricated and provided with enclosures as far

as possible to reduce noise transmission;

Provision of silencers will be made wherever possible;

The insulation provided for prevention of loss of heat and personnel safety

also act as noise reducers;

Layouts, equipment foundations and structures will be designed keeping the

requirement of noise abatement in view.

Necessary enclosures will also be provided on the working platforms/areas to

provide local protection in high noise level areas;

All equipment will be kept in a well maintained condition with proper

lubrication and housekeeping to avoid excessive noise generation;

The workers will be provided with ear plugs; and

Plantation in the zone between plant and township would attenuate noise in

the residential area.

5.3.3 Water Pollution Management

Wastewater Treatment - Sewage Treatment Plant (STP)

The treatment given in the STP shall be both chemical and biological. The effluent

will be treated adopting the following steps:

Collection and conveyance of sewage to STP;

Screening;

Grit removal;

Aeration for biological treatment;

Secondary settling (biological sedimentation);

Coagulation and clariflocculation;

Filtration; and

Drying of chemical and biological sludge.






Bar Screen Channel

Two manually cleaned screens are provided. One screen are operated at a time

and the other will be standby.

Grit Chamber

Two manually cleaned grit channels are provided for removal of grit from the

effluent. One channel will be operated at a time.

Aeration System

Sewage after screening and de-gritting waste will be fed into the aeration tank. In

addition to this, return sludge from the clarifier will also be sent to the inlet of

aeration tank. Here, the effluent will be aerated to oxidize the organic matter.

Microorganisms present in the return sludge oxidize the organic matter and use it

as food and form their own cell mass. Thus, microorganism cell mass

concentration continues to rise. The cell mass when removed in subsequent stage

of settling, reduces the oxygen demand considerably.

The aerators provided on the platform maintain the contents in aerobic conditions

by maintaining adequate oxygen transfer rates. They also provide adequate

mixing of the contents and thereby contents do not settle on the floor of the tank.

The flow from the outlet launder goes to the secondary clarifier.

Secondary Sedimentation

When liquid-containing solids in suspension is placed in a relatively quiescent

state, those solids having a higher specific gravity than the liquid will tend to

settle, and those with a lower specific gravity will tend to rise. These principles

are used in the design of sedimentation tanks for treatment of wastewater. The

objective of treatment by sedimentation is to remove, readily settable solids and

floating material and thus to reduce the suspended solids content.

The mixed liquor from aeration tank will be carried to the center of the tank in a

pipe encased in concrete beneath the tank floor. At the center of the tank, the

wastewater enters a circular well, designed to distribute the flow equally in all

directions. The sludge removal mechanism revolves slowly and has arms

equipped with scrapers. The hopper collects the sludge, which is sent to the

sludge drying beds. The sludge produced is known as biological sludge.

Clarifloculator

The working is similar to that of secondary clarifier described above, except that

additional flocculator compartment is provided for formation of flocs with the help

of coagulant viz. alum.

Pressure Filter

The effluent from the clariflocculator will be subjected to tertiary treatment, in

order to further reduce the suspended solids in the effluent. One filtration unit will

be provided to remove colloidal flocs and turbidity carried over from






clariflocculator. The filtration unit consists of filter feed pumps, dual media

pressure filter, frontal piping and air blower for air scouring.

Drying of Chemical and Biological Sludge

Sludge drying beds will be provided to de-water the sludge containing about 95-

99% water. The dewatered sludge, in the form of dried cake, will be disposed off.

Sludge is spread on the media containing gravel and sand. Simple physical

straining of solid takes place. Water is partially evaporated at ambient

temperature. At the bottom of the media, a collection system comprising of open

jointed pipes will be provided to collect the filtrate. The entire system is enclosed

by brick masonry. Filtrate is carried to influent sump.

Capacity Utilization of STP

The total manpower envisaged for the existing plant is estimated at 956 and for

proposed plant is 250 during operation. The total domestic wastewater generated

from plant will be treated in existing STP of 50 KLD, two 80 KLD and 400 KLD.

This will be adequate for the proposed plant expansion also. The photographs and

flow chart of the sewage treatment plant is given in Figure-5.3 and Figure-5.4.






FIGURE-5.3

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF SEWAGE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT






FIGURE-5.4

PHOTOGRAPHS – SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT






Effluent Disposal

The treated wastewater quality will conform to the GSR-422 (E) standards for on

land irrigation. The treated water will be used for dust suppression and

plantation. Due to the above treatment process and 100% re-utilization of the

treated wastewater there will not be any adverse impact on the water quality as

no effluent will be discharged outside the plant premises.

Water Conservation Practices at Existing Plant

Roof top rain water harvesting has been established in accordance with the plan

submitted to the HPPCB. All the buildings within the plant & township area have

been constructed with rain water harvesting roof tops & drains. Rain water from

the roof tops are diverted to storm water collecting channels, constructed within

the plant & township area. Water so collected is thus utilized to recharge the

ground water. Storm water channels have been constructed within the plant and

township area to channelize the rain water. Under ground water recharge system

of adequate design have been constructed at suitable locations to recharge the

underground water. However, to conserve the fresh water, treated waste water is

being properly utilized for green belt development / horticultural activities and

dust suppression within the plant area. The same practices will also be

implemented for proposed expansion project.

5.3.4 Solid Waste Management

Dust collected from air pollution control equipment will be 100% recycled in

process and thus there will be no solid wastes in cement plant process.

Solid waste in the form of sludge is generated from the sewage treatment plant.

Major portion of waste will be used for maintaining MLSS in the activated sludge

process of STP. The balance waste will be used as manure for greenbelt

development.

Use of High Calorific Value Hazardous Waste as fuel in Cement Plant

There are a large number of hazardous waste generating units located in India.

So far 11,138 units have been given authorization by State Pollution Control

Boards under Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2008 mostly for

temporary storage of hazardous waste, within the plant premises. It is estimated

that, about 4.43 MT of hazardous waste is generated annually, out of which, only

71,833 tonnes of hazardous waste is incinerable.

Benefits of Utilization of Waste as Fuel in Kiln

There is a need to promote utilization of hazardous combustible waste having

higher calorific value in cement kiln as fuel. This will not only solve the disposal

problem associated with hazardous waste but also conserve natural fuel

resources.

The cement industry is known as high-energy consumption manufacturer since

the final product, clinker is prepared by heating raw material over 1400˚C. The






industry has been striving to recycle by re-using combustible “wastes” as fuel for

the cement kiln process. For these reasons, the cement industry utilizes a variety

of wastes and by-products as substitutes for fuel.

As a policy measure, several procedures and guidelines for utilization of

hazardous waste in cement kiln as fuel has been suggested.

The benefits of using hazardous waste as a fuel in cement kiln are as follows:

High temperature and residence time of 4-5 seconds in an oxygen rich

environment, ensure the destruction of organic compounds found in the

waste;

Any acid gases (SO2/HCl) formed during combustion are neutralized by the

clinker and dust, being alkaline in nature and are incorporated into the

cement clinker;

Interaction of the flue gases and the raw material present in the kiln ensures

that the non-combustible part of the residue is held back in the process and is

incorporated into the clinker in a practically irreversible manner;

No waste is generated that requires subsequent processing;

Additional exhaust gas purification systems (scrubber etc.) are not required;

Calorific value of the waste is fully utilized;

Safer operation compared to incineration;

Destruction of Poly Cyclic Biphenyl (PCBs) is almost complete to below

detection limits;

Wastes can be utilized in all types of cement plants (Wet /Semi wet / Dry);

and

Several investigations carried out suggest all kinds of solid, liquid and gaseous

wastes can be gainfully utilized.

Types of Wastes

Utilization of following types of high calorific wastes in kiln has been envisaged:

Hazardous: waste oil, petroleum sludge, solvents, paints, thinners, printing

ink etc. from petroleum refinery, pharmaceuticals, paint and other chemical

industries; and

Non-Hazardous: used tyres, paper and plastics.

Limitations of Utilization of Waste in Cement Plant Kiln

There is a limit in terms of the amount of combustible solid wastes that can be

fed directly into the kiln inlet for reutilization.

There is possibility of emissions of toxic metals, volatile organic carbon

compounds and other toxic gases, which needs to be controlled.

Alternate fuels vary in their composition and the contaminants present in

them. Depending on the composition of the chosen fuel there may be an

increased input of Sulphur, chlorine, alkalies, phosphates, heavy metals.

Therefore, the likely emissions need to be ascertained on case to case basis

and care taken to contain them within prescribed limits.






JHCP’s Commitment regarding Utilization of Hazardous Waste in Cement Plant

Kiln

JHCP remains committed towards reducing environmental pollution and cleaning

up the existing environment through usage of high calorific hazardous waste.

Plastic waste is being used as per necessary approval from CPCB.

5.4 Greenbelt Development

Due care will be taken to ensure that a greenbelt is developed around the plant.

All areas devoid of vegetation and having low density will be systematically and

scientifically afforested. Greenbelt will be a set of rows of trees planted such a

way that they form an effective barrier between the plant and the surroundings.

The main purpose of green belt development is to contribute to the following

factors:

To attenuate noise levels generated from the plant;

To improve the aesthetics of the plant area;

To trap the vehicular emissions and fugitive dust emissions;

To maintain ecological homeostasis;

To prevent soil erosion and to protect the natural vegetation; and

To utilize the treated effluents.

Plantation Species

The plantation species have been considered based on the following:

Adapted to the Geo-climatic conditions of the area;

Mix of round, spreading, oblong and conical canopies; and

Different heights ranging from 4 m to 20 m.

5.4.1 Species for Plantation

The species proposed will have broad leaves. Trees will be selected based on the

type of pollutants, their intensity, location, easy availability and suitability to the

local climate. They have different morphological, physiological and bio-chemical

mechanism/ characters like branching habits, leaf arrangement, size, shape,

surface (smooth/hairy), presence or absence of trichomes, stomatal conductivity

proline content, ascorbic acid content, cationic peroxides and sulphite oxidize

activities etc to trap or reduce the pollutants. Species to be selected will fulfill

the following specific requirements of the area:

Tolerance to specific conditions or alternatively wide adaptability to eco-

physiological conditions;

Rapid growth;

Capacity to endure water stress and climate extremes after initial

establishment;

Differences in height and growth habits;

Pleasing appearances; and

Providing shade.






Based on the above, the recommended species for greenbelt and plantation are

given in Table-5.2. Further, the already existing / native species will be given

preference.

TABLE-5.2

RECOMMENDED PLANTS FOR GREENBELT

Sr. No. Local Name Botanical Name

1 Anwala Emblica officinalis

2 Chir Pincus roxburghil

3 Darek Melia azadirachta

4 Khair Acacia catechu

5 Popular Populous ciliate

6 Samel Bonbax ceiba

7 Toon Cedrela toona

8 Shisham Dalbergia sissoo

Greenbelt Development in Existing Plant & Adjacent Mine-JHCP

Nearly 33% of plant area has been allotted for green belt development. Total 21,000

saplings in an area of 20 ha has been developed. Master plan (5 years programme)

for development of greenbelt in and around plant and mine area has already been

prepared. Phase-wise plantation will be carried out by planting local species after

consultation with local forest authorities. Plantation schedule is given below in Table-

5.3.

TABLE-5.3

PLANATATION SCHEDULE

End of Year Area to be Covered (m2)

2014-2015 234355

2015-2016 22500

2016-2017 22500

2017-2018 22500

2018-2019 22500

The greenbelt development in and around JHCP Baga and mining area till date is

given in Table-5.4.






TABLE-5.4

PLANTATION AND GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT

MASTER PLAN FOR PLANTATION JOBS FOR DEVELOPMENT OF GREENERY IN AND AROUND CEMENT PLANT AND MINING AREA

Year Area (M2)

No. of Plants Species of Plants

(Local Genome)

Expenditure (Rs.) Lakhs

Location/ Remarks

Trees Shrubs

A)Plantation done

upto 2014-2015 (Survived)

234355 36035 15416 Tree:

Populas tremula Jacaranda mimosaefolia Bauihinia vahlii Acacia catechu Eugenia Jambolamum Emblica officinalis Theera (wildplant) Bauhinia purpurea Pinus roxburghii Terminalia arguna Chikrassia tabularis Melia composita Delonix regia Shrub:

Hypomia carnea Dodonea viscosa Agave agustifolia

48.62 Township

Mahavir Kunj Dumping area near Tunnel Panali Camp Mining area in village Patha Plant area at 1370 EL Muck Dumping Site 1370 EL.

South Hill

B) Plantation work proposed during 2015-2016

22500 10000 3000

20.00 Township Near Main Water Tank,1480 MSL Panali Camp Mining area in village Patha Plant area at 1370 EL Muck Dumping Site 1370 EL. Mining area in Village Baga (slopes)

C) Plantation work proposed during 2016-2017

22500 10000 3000 20.0 Township Shalughat to 1370 EL along road side Along the existing PWD road between Kharsi - Ranikotla - Jabbal. Mining area in village Patha Plant area at 1370 EL Muck Dumping Site 1370 EL. Near Mines Office

D) Plantation work proposed during 2017-2018

22500 10000 3000 20.00 Township Mining area, South Hill Dumping area near Tunnel Jaypee Vidya Mandir Panchtantra Mining area in Village Bhalag (slopes). Mining area in Village Baga (slopes) Plant area at 1370 EL Muck Dumping Site 1370 EL.






MASTER PLAN FOR PLANTATION JOBS FOR DEVELOPMENT OF GREENERY IN AND AROUND CEMENT PLANT AND MINING AREA

Year Area (M2)

No. of Plants Species of Plants

(Local Genome)

Expenditure (Rs.) Lakhs

Location/ Remarks

Trees Shrubs

E) Plantation work proposed during 2018-2019

22500 10000 3000 20.00 Township Dumping area near Tunnel Mining area in Village Bhalag (slopes). Mining area in Village Baga (slopes) Mining area in village Patha Plant area at 1370 EL Muck Dumping Site 1370 EL.

Green belt plant and photographs are given in Figure-5.5 to Figure-5.7. Further

the existing environmental management practices are shown in Figure-5.8 to

Figure-5.10. The provision for co-processing of hazardous waste is shown in

Figure-5.11. The rain water harvesting plan and structures are shown in Figure-

5.12 to Figure-5.15.

5.5 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures

Allocation / expenditure on the environment management plan of JHCP and

captive limestone mine and cement plant located at Baga, Bhalag villages in Arki

tehsil, Solan district (HP) and budget estimates for existing plant for the next two

years and for proposed plant are given in the following Table-5.5 and Table-

5.6.

TABLE-5.5

BUDGET PROVISION FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

Sr. No.

Component of the Environment Expenditure till Mar’2015 (Rs. Lakhs)

Proposed Budget Estimates

(for next two years) in Rs. Lakhs

Non Recurring Recurring

1 Environment Cell / Laboratory and Env. Monitoring & Equipment

579 10 10

2 Air Pollution Control and Pollution control devices

10960 15 40

3 Treatment and Recycling of Waste Water / STP's

98 10 10

4 Forest land diversions (NPV &Compensatory forestation) and Green belt development

3514 15 5

5 Reclamation and Backfilling of mined out area - - -

6 Infrastructures support and creation of durable community assets

5098 20 80

7 Occupational Health and facilities (including 30

bedded Hospital) 968 40 20

8 Education Upliftment (10+2 School and Rural ITI)

1063 50 20

9 Preservation of religious places, culture, sports and traditional art & Woman Empowerment

304 40 -






Sr. No.

Component of the Environment Expenditure till Mar’2015 (Rs. Lakhs)

Proposed Budget Estimates (for next two years) in Rs.

Lakhs

Non Recurring Recurring

10 Water supply and protection of natural water sources

717 20 10

11 Wildlife Management Plan 54 - -

12 Soil & Water Conservation in / around the project area (Dyke, Check dams and gully plugs) and Rainwater Harvesting

4136 130 15

13 Law and Order (Recurring cost of PS Baga) 425 - 30

14 Fire & Safety 315 - 10

Total Allocation / Expenditure (in Rs. Lakhs)

28231 350 250

TABLE-5.6

BUDGET PROVISION FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION

AND MONITORING FOR PROPOSED PLANT

Sr. No. Particulars Expenditure (Rs. in Crores)

Capital Recurring Cost /Annum

1 Air pollution control devices 118.8 6.5

2 Environmental monitoring & equipment 7.92 1.3

3 Occupational health -- 1.2

Total 126.72 9.0






FIGURE-5.5

GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT






FIGURE-5.6

GREENBELT / PLANTATION PHOTOGRAPHS






FIGURE-5.7

GREENBELT / PLANTATION PHOTOGRAPHS






FIGURE-5.8

EXISTING ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

TRUCK MOUNTED WATER SPRINKLER AUTOMATIC WATER SPRINKLERS

BAG FILTERS AT TRANSFER POINTS CLOSED TUBE PIPE CONVEYOR






FIGURE-5.9

EXISTING ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (CONTD..)

TRANSFER OF LIMESTONE THROUGH PIPE CONVEYOR

TRANSFER OF CLINKER TO SILO THROUGH CLOSED PAN CONVEYOR

Closed Pan

conveyor






FIGURE-5.10

EXISTING ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

COVERED LIMESTONE STOCKPILE RAW MEAL SILO

TRANSFER OF COAL THROUGH PIPE CONVEYOR FROM COAL YARD TO RAW COAL HOPPERS

Covered Coal Yard

Pet Coke Silo

PET COKE SILO & COVERED CIRCULAR COAL YARD






FIGURE- 5.11

ARRANGEMENT FOR CO-PROCESSING OF HAZARDOUS WASTE/AFR






FIGURE-5.12

RAIN WATER HARVESTING – AT EXISTING PLANT






FIGURE-

RAIN WATER HARVESTING – AT EXISTING PLANT (CONTD..)

FIGURE-5.13

RAIN WATER HARVESTING – AT EXISTING PLANT(CONTD..)






FIGURE-5.14







FIGURE-5.15


DRAIN HOLES

RAIN/STORM WATER CHANNEL ROOF TOP RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEM






5.6 Socio-Economic Development

Better education facilities, proper health care, road infrastructure and drinking

water facilities are basic social amenities for better living standard of any human

being. JHCP already initiated the above activities either by providing or by

improving the facilities in the area, which will help in uplifting the living standards

of local communities. The activities are under implementation at existing plant

detailed CSR are given in Chapter-8 of the report.

The existing CSR activities will be further strengthened under proposed expansion

Rs.40 Crores are allocated for CSR activities under proposed expansion project

and will be implemented in next 10 years after implementation of project.

5.7 Compliance with Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection

(CREP) Guidelines

The compliance status of corporate responsibility for environment protection is

given below in Table-5.7. The recommendation mentioned in the CREP will also

be complied after proposed expansion project.

TABLE-5.7

COMPLIANCE WITH CREP GUIDELINES

Sr. No. CREP Action Points Status of Compliance

1 Cement Plants, which are not complying *with notified standards, shall do the following to meet the standards :

Augmentation of existing Air Pollution Control Devices – by July,2003.

Replacement of existing Air Pollution Control Devices – by July, 2004

Plant design has adopted world class technology. All the modern air pollutions control equipments have adequately been installed to particulate matter emission below 50 mg / Nm³.

2 Cement Plants located in critically polluted or urban areas (including 5 Km distance outside urban boundary) will meet 100 mg / Nm³ limit of particulate matter by December 2004 and continue working to reduce the emission of particulate matter to 50 mg / Nm³

Though our plant is not situated in the urban area, yet we are maintaining the particulate matter emission below 50 mg / Nm³.

3 The new cement kilns to be accorded NOC / Environmental Clearance w.e.f. 1.4.2003 will meet the limit of 50 mg / NM³ for particulate matter emissions.

We are maintaining the emission of particulate matter below 50 mg / Nm³.

4 CPCB will evolve load based standards by December 2003.

NA

5 CPCB and NCBM will evolve SO2 and NOx emission standards by June 2004.

NA

6 The Cement industries will control fugitive emissions from all the raw material and products storage and transfer points by December 2003. However, the feasibility for the control of fugitive emission from limestone and coal storage areas will be decided by the National Task Force (NTF). The NTF shall submit its recommendations within three months.

For crushed limestone and coal, closed pipe conveyor of sufficient capacity has been provided and all transfer points have been provided with bag filters. Clinker is being stored in closed RCC Silo and to avoid fugitive emissions water sprinklers has been deployed at job for limestone / coal stockpiles and vulnerable areas. Moreover, Two Automatic dust sweepers are regularly being deployed to collect dust from the floors.






Sr. No. CREP Action Points Status of Compliance

7 CPCB, NCBM, BIS and Oil refineries will jointly prepare the policy on use of petroleum coke as fuel in cement kiln by July 2003.

NA

8 After performance evaluation of various types of continuous monitoring equipment and feedback from the industries and equipment manufacturers, NTF will decide feasible unit operations / sections for installation of continuous monitoring equipment. The industry will install the continuous monitoring systems (CMS) by December 2003.

Two continuous ambient air quality monitoring stations have been installed within the plant & township area. Furthermore, online continuous stack emission monitoring equipment (Opacity Meters) at all the major stacks have already been installed. The continuous data is being transferred to JAL/ CPCB/ HPSPCB website on real time basis.

9 Trippings in Kiln ESP to be minimized by July 2003 as per the recommendation of NTF.

It’s a new unit. The plant has been designed on state of the art technology and provided with the latest design of ESPs with minimum tripping.

10 Industries will submit the target date to enhance the utilization of waste material by April 2003.

Raw meal/Clinker dust is 100% recycled in the process after proper collection through Bag house/ bag filters.

11 NCBM will carry out a study on hazardous waste utilization in cement kiln by December 2003.

NA

12 Cement industries will carry out feasibility study and submit target dates to CPCB for co-generation of power by July 2003.

The plant is operating on energy efficient six stage pre-heater technology. Sufficient sensible heat for co-generation of power is not available in the unit.




Chapter-5 Environment Monitoring Programme

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C5A-1

5A.0 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

5A.1 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures suggested in Chapter-4 shall be implemented so as to

reduce the impact on environment due to the operations of the proposed project

at expanded capacity. In order to facilitate easy implementation of mitigation

measures, these are phased as per the priority implementation as given in Table-

5A.1.

TABLE-5A.1

IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

Sr. No. Recommendations Time Requirement &

Schedule

1 Air pollution control measures

Being Implemented in existing cement plant under operation and shall also be implemented for proposed expansion project 2 Water pollution control

measures

3 Noise control measures

4 Ecological preservation and upgradation

5A.2 Environment Monitoring

The environment monitoring programme being carried out at existing plant is as

follows:

Air quality;

Water and wastewater quality;

Noise levels;

Soil quality; and

Greenbelt development.

A well equipped centralized environment monitoring cell has been established for

cement plant. Monitoring of important and crucial environment parameters is of

immense importance to assess the status of environment during operation of

cement plant. With the knowledge of baseline conditions, the monitoring program

can serve as an indicator for any deterioration in environment conditions due to

operation of the cement plant and suitable mitigatory steps could be taken in

time to safeguard the environment which is in place. Monitoring is as important

as that of control of pollution since the efficiency of control measures can only be

determined by monitoring. The following routine monitoring program will be

implemented under the post-project monitoring in the cement plant complex. The

monitoring program for implementation is given below.

Air Pollution and Meteorological Aspects

Both ambient air quality and meteorology are monitored. The ambient air

monitored twice in a week in line with the guidelines of Central Pollution Control

Board and HPPCB.






Meteorological parameters like wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative

humidity and rainfall are recorded continuously at cement plant complex.

Water and Wastewater Quality

The storm water is analyzed in the rainy season. The ground and surface water

quality monitored in every season at selected locations. The water depths are

monitored in the wells of surrounding villages in every season.

Noise Levels

Noise levels in the work zone environment and ambient are monitored regularly.

The frequency of noise monitoring is once in a month in the work zone. The

ambient noise levels in the surrounding villages are monitored once in six

months.

Soil Sampling

Soil samples are tested before plantation/vegetation of the area. The

environment monitoring cell co-ordinates all monitoring programs at site and data

thus generated regularly furnished to the regulatory agencies. The environment

monitoring program to be implemented is given in Table-5A.2.

TABLE-5A.2

MONITORING SCHEDULE FOR ENVIRONMENT PARAMETERS

Sr. No.

Particulars Monitoring Frequency


Important Monitoring Parameters

1 Air Pollution and Meteorology

Air Quality

A Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

About 6 locations in and around cement plant as specified by HPPCB

Twice in a week

24 hr continuously

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and CO

B Stack gas analysis in all major stacks

Once in a month

One time Specified as per Himachal Pradesh Pollution Control Board

C Fugitive dust sampling at work zone as per CPCB or HPPCB.

Once in three months

24 hr continuously

PM10, PM2.5

Meteorology

a Meteorological data to be monitored at cement plant

Daily Continuous Monitoring

Wind speed, direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall.

2 Water and Wastewater Quality

A Industrial/Domestic

1 Sewage treatment plant

Daily 24 hr composite

As per CPCB/ HPPCB norms

B Water quality in the study area

1 Ground water quality

Half yearly

Grab

As per the parameters specified under IS:10500

2

Surface water Half yearly Grab Parameters specified under IS:10500

3 Water flows in major Once in a Once As per IS specifications






Sr. No.

Particulars Monitoring Frequency


Important Monitoring Parameters

streams near plant boundary or as per CPCB or SPCB guidelines

season

4 Water level studies in well or bore wells or piezometers in plant and surrounding areas

Twice in a year

Once Water levels and chemistry of water

3 Industrial Noise Levels

1 Major noise generating sources( compressors, Coal mills, cement mills, VRMs, Raw mill areas)

Every fortnight

24 hr continuous with 1 hr interval

Noise level in dB(A)

2 Near the drilling site Fortnight 24 hr continuous with 1 hr interval


3 Along the haul road for transportation noise

Fortnight 24 hr continuous with 1 hr interval


Ambient Noise Levels

9 Locations around cement plant

Fortnight 24 hr continuous with one hr interval

Noise levels in dB(A)

4. Soil Characteristics

1

About 6 locations in core and buffer zone in nearby villages

Yearly One Grab sample

Colour, textural class, grain size, distribution, pH, electrical conductivity, bulk density, porosity, infiltration rate, moisture retention capacity, wilting co-efficient, Organic matter Na, N, K, PO4, SO4, SAR, base exchange capacity, Pb, Cu, Zn, Cd, Fe.

5A.3 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis

All environment monitoring and relevant operational data will be stored in a

relational database. Regular data extracts and interpretive reports will be sent to

the regulator.

5A.3.1 Air Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis

The concentration of air borne pollutants in the workspace / work zone

environment will be monitored periodically. If concentrations higher than

threshold limit values are observed, the source of fugitive emissions will be

identified and necessary measures taken. If the levels are high suitable measures

as detailed in EMP shall be initiated.

The ground level concentrations of PM, SO2, NOX and CO in the ambient air will be

monitored at regular intervals. Any abnormal rise will be investigated to identify

the causes, and appropriate action will be initiated. Greenbelt shall be developed

for minimising dust propagation. The ambient air quality data should be






transferred and processed in a centralised computer facility equipped with

required software. Trend and statistical analysis should be done.

5A.3.2 Water and Wastewater Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis

Methods prescribed in "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and

Wastewater" prepared and published jointly by American Public Health

Association (APHA), American Water Works Association (AWWA) and Water

Pollution Control Federation (WPCF); Manual on Water and Wastewater Analysis

published by NEERI, Nagpur are recommended.

5A.4 Monitoring Equipment and Consumables

A well-equipped laboratory with consumable items will be provided for monitoring

of environment parameters. Alternatively, monitoring can be outsourced to a

recognized laboratory.

a) Air Quality and Meteorology

Following equipment and consumable items will be made available with the

environment cell to meet the monitoring frequency and to implement the

monitoring program.

Respirable dust samplers

Personal sampler

CO monitor

Weather station (automatic recording)

Spectrophotometer (visible range)

Single pan balance

Relevant chemicals as per IS:5182

Chemical/Glass ware

b) Water and Waste Water Quality

The sampling should be done in jerry cans as per the standard procedures laid

down by IS: 2488. Following equipment are recommended to be available with the

environment cell:

BOD incubator;

Refrigerator;

Oven;

Stop watch;

Thermometer;

pH meter;

Distilled water plant;

Spectrophotometer; and

Relevant chemicals and glassware.

c) Noise Levels

The environment cell shall have sound level meter to record noise levels in different

scales like A, B and C with slow and fast response options and vibration meter.






Further, any recognized agency can also be engaged for carrying out the above

stated monitoring works.

5A.5 Occupational Health and Safety

Occupational health and safety is very closely related to productivity and good

employer-employee relationship. The main factors of occupational health in

cement plant complex are fugitive dust and noise.

These control measures include:

Effective de-dusting system in the crusher house, packing house;

Provision of dust collectors;

Provision of rest shelters for workers with amenities like drinking water, fans,

toilets etc.;

Provision of personal protection devices to the workers;

Rotation of workers exposed to noise premises;

Closed control room in crusher house with proper ventilation; and

First-aid facilities in the cement plant complex.

Details of regular occupational health checkup carried out at the existing plant are given in Annexure-XV.




Chapter-6 Analysis of Alternative Technology & Site


6.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGY & SITE

6.1 Introduction

The escalating costs of cement manufacture over the years and increasing

competitiveness have resulted in a focused approach by the cement industry in

India to maximize the operational efficiency with respect to retrofitting of energy

efficient equipment/systems, technology upgradation, process optimisation,

effective maintenance management and above all, energy management including

energy monitoring and energy audit. This comprehensive approach has resulted

in significant reduction in specific energy consumption levels in cement plants.

India is the second largest producer of cement in the world. The Indian cement

industry is a unique combination of very large to very small capacity and very

modern to very old technology plants. The share of installed capacity of energy

inefficient wet process plants had slowly decreased from 94% in 1960 to 61% till

1980 and thereafter as a result of quantum jump in production capacities through

modern dry process plants as well as conversion of some of the wet process

plants, the share of old wet process has been reduced to just 5% today.

6.2 Description of Alternative Technology and Site

Alternative Site

No additional land acquisition is involved for expansion. The capacity enhancement

of clinker and proposed cement plant will be within the existing plant facilities

which will be adequate to accommodate the additional production load with respect

to the design aspects.

Technology Selection – Existing Plant

The preparation of cement includes crushing and grinding of raw materials

(principally limestone and clay); calcining the materials in a rotary kiln; cooling

the resulting clinker; mixing the clinker with gypsum; and milling, storing and

bagging the finished cement.

Cement is manufactured in five kiln types: wet process, dry process, preheater,

precalciner, and semidry process kilns. The same raw materials are used in wet

and dry process kilns, however, the moisture content and processing techniques

differ, as do the kiln designs. Wet process kilns must be longer in order to dry the

wet mix, or slurry, which is fed into the kiln. Dry process kilns produce high

temperature exit gases which can be used to generate electrical power. Preheater,

precalciner, and semidry process kilns are less common devices, and differ from

wet and dry process kilns in terms of kiln length, process inputs, operating

temperature, fuel efficiency, and other factors. Processes that take place within

each type of kiln include drying and preheating, which includes evaporation of free

water and dehydration of clay minerals; calcining, which is the process of

decomposing carbon compounds; and burning, which fuses the calcined materials.






Portland cement is produced in an inclined rotary kiln. The mix enters the kiln at

the elevated end, opposite from the burner. Materials are moved slowly and

continuously to the lower end as they are heated, and different chemical

reactions occur as the temperature increases. Portland cement is then produced

by grinding the clinker with approximately five percent gypsum to a fine powder.

At this stage, various additives may be introduced to produce specialty portland

cements, such as masonry cement.

Energy Consumption in Cement Industry

Indian cement industry is one of the core industries of the country consuming

about 16 million tonnes of coal and 11 billion electric units annually. Cement

industry is highly energy intensive, requiring on an average about 0.80 Million

KCal of thermal energy per tonne of clinker production and about 100 kWh of

electric energy per tonne of cement production.

The main energy inputs to the cement industry are coal and power. A brief

discussion on these energy inputs is as follows:

Coal

Coal is predominantly being used in the Indian cement industry. The quality of

indigenous coal supplied is poor with high ash content (35%) which affects the

efficiency of kiln apart from increasing the fuel consumption leading to higher

specific Green House Gas emission. Deteriorating and inconsistent quality of coal

has become a limiting factor in improving energy efficiency, productivity and

clinker quality. The use of these coals results in a number of operational problems

such as improper and inefficient burning and higher per unit consumption of coal

as well as lower operational efficiencies which tend to further increase the

emission of green house gases.

The frequent variations in the quality of coal, inadequate supplies and

transportation bottlenecks have rendered it imperative to import coal from

countries like Africa, China, Indonesia etc. besides going for substitute fuels like

lignite, rice-husk petroleum coke etc. However, import of coal is costly and a

drain on our national exchequer even though it has helped cement industry

getting quality coal.

Power

Production of cement being a continuous manufacturing process, requires stable

and reliable power supply. Any power interruption leads to kiln stoppage resulting

in loss of production, additional fuel consumption to attain requisite thermal

profile and a lot of idle running of equipment leading to wastage of electrical

energy. The present power scenario in India is dismal due to shortage of power

generation capacity, transmission and distribution losses, poor management of

power distribution and low frequency and voltage fluctuation. These factors lead

to scheduled power cuts as well as unscheduled power interruptions. It is

estimated that, in a one million tonne per annum capacity cement plant, a one-

hour power cut (equivalent to 4% downtime) will result in loss of production of






about 7% (200 tonnes). Apart from the production loss, the additional coal

requirement would be about 4 tonnes for a one-hour power cut, amounting to the

mere wastage of coal.

To augment the power requirement, many plants today have their own captive

power generation stations.

6.3 Assessment of New and Untested Technology for the Risk of

Technological Failure

The change from the wet to the dry production process has both a positive and a

negative effect on the amount of particulate emissions. With a dry process,

fugitive particulate emissions are increased (over wet process emissions) from

grinding, mixing, blending, storing, and feeding raw materials into kiln. However,

the dry processes generally use a suspension preheater for heating the feed

going into the kiln. A suspension preheater is similar in operation to a cyclone.

The exhaust containing the fines from the suspension preheater is sent to a

collection system, therefore reducing the uncontrolled particulate emissions from

the kiln. It also ensures better contact of the kiln exhaust gases with the feed

material, which may increase absorption of SO2 from the kiln exhaust gases.

Technological Developments

The last two decades have experienced major technological advances in cement

plant equipment/systems such as single stage crushers, On-line-Bulk Material

Analyzers, Vertical Roller Mills, High Pressure Roller Presses, High Efficiency Grate

Coolers and 5/6 Stages Low Pressure Cyclone Pyro-process Systems. The

economic necessity for high productivity and energy efficient plants has been the

motivating force for their development/adoption.

Ambitious modernization and expansion programs are currently underway in the

Indian cement industry. Through adoption of modern technology and equipment,

input substitution, output modification, organizational changes as well as other

process specific measures India is trying to increase output at the same time as

to improve efficiency, conserve energy and control pollution.

Process conversion presents a notable example of energy conservation in the

Indian cement history. Over the last 30 years, the more energy-intensive wet

process of cement production has been virtually phased out. Other process

specific measures that have increasingly found application in the Indian cement

industry include multi-stage suspension preheaters, pre-calciners, cyclone

designs of kilns, and improved burners. Most of these measures are related to the

energy-intensive pyro-processing step in cement production, while fewer

measures are effective for the grinding and drying steps. However, the use of

more advanced grinding mills, such as roller or high pressure roller mills instead

of rod and ball mills also shows substantial power savings potentials.

Due to frequent power cuts causing damage to plant operation and viability and

due to high power the cement industry has started installing captive power

generating units. These power generation systems are based on cogeneration






and/or waste heat recovery and lead to substantial savings in terms of energy

use and costs. In fact, cogeneration of power using waste heat is a very attractive

proposition for energy conservation world wide which the cement industry (with

its high share of waste heat resulting from the high temperature sintering process

of cement making) is well suited for.

6.4 Mitigation Measures Proposed for Each Alternative

Cement kiln dust is the largest waste stream produced by cement manufacturers.

The following discussion therefore focuses primarily on pollution prevention

opportunities in the cement industry as they relate to cement kiln dust.

Source Reduction

One approach to pollution prevention in the cement industry is to minimize the

production of cement kiln dust. There are three primary means to decrease the

amount of dust generated by a kiln. Dust can be minimized by reducing gas

turbulence in the kiln and avoiding excessive flow velocities. The use of chains

near the cool end of the kiln can also minimize dust by trapping the dust before it

is released in the kiln exhaust. Most kilns are already equipped with such cool-

end chain sections. The use of fuels with a low ash content, such as liquid

hazardous wastes, can also reduce the amount of cement kiln dust generated.

Recycling and Reuse

Cement kiln dust generated from the baghouse dust collectors can be reused both

on-site and off-site. Direct return of dust to the kiln is a common recycling

practice. The dust may be returned to the hot end, to the middle of the kiln, or to

the feed material. However, cement kiln dust can only be reused if contaminant

concentrations fall within specified limits, because clinker quality can be affected

by the presence of certain constituents.

Expand the use of additives and substitutes to cement clinker

The use of Ordinary Portland Cement is the established business practice in the

building sectors of most industrialized and developing countries. Conventional and

advanced alternatives to portland cement can lead to substantial CO2 reductions

ranging from 20 to 80% depending on the case.

Until now, the use of additives and substitutes to Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC)

clinker has been one of the most successful measures in decreasing the specific

CO2 emissions from making cements. A long term clinker ratio as low as 0.65 is

desirable. Such a target is still challenging since the availability of additives will not

necessarily grow at the same rate as the cement demand.






Alternative Fuels

Because of the high combustion temperatures employed in cement production,

cement kilns are capable of burning waste materials effectively, achieving almost

complete destruction of organic wastes. As well as the organic component,

inorganic constituents of a wide variety of waste types are suitable for

incorporation into the cement product.

Consequently cement production is emerging as an effective way to recover and

find an additional worth for a wide range of industrial waste materials that might

otherwise create problems if disposed of to landfill.

The use of waste as an alternative fuel has a number of environmental benefits,

including:

the use of non renewable fossil fuels such as coal, oil and gas is reduced;

the environmental impact of fossil fuel recovery is avoided; and

the wastes do not need to be disposed of via for example incineration or

landfill, both of which have post-disposal problems such as disposal of

incinerator ash, and groundwater contamination.

Use of Waste as Fuel

Cement kilns have traditionally been fired by coal but hazardous waste as

alternative fuels offer the joint benefits of overall CO2 reduction by avoiding

incineration without utilizing its energy content and lower production costs. The

fact that the energy costs have a considerable influence on large part of the

production costs (about one third of the cost) leads many manufacturers to

reduce consumption of conventional sources of energy in favor of alternative

fuels. In other words, alternate fuels also offer conservation of traditional fuels.

The hazardous wastes of defined characteristics can be utilized as alternate fuel

in cement kilns i.e. “co-processing of hazardous wastes in cement kilns” and is a

proven, legally acceptable and environmentally safe procedure for destruction of

hazardous wastes.

Wastes generated from other industries can be recycled at cement kilns as fuels

and raw material substitutes. The recycling of wastes in cement kilns as fuel

offers a cost-effective, safe, and environmentally sound method of resource

recovery for some hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials. Currently used

hazardous wastes are waste oils and spent organic solvents, sludges, and solids

from the paint and coatings, auto and truck assembly, and petroleum industries.

Some non-hazardous wastes, including foundry sand and contaminated soils,

have high concentrations of the conventional components of cement, such as

silicon, aluminum, and iron. These wastes, therefore, can be used in place of the

conventional raw materials.






Use of High Calorific Value Hazardous Waste as Fuel in Kiln

In conjunction with the UN Commission on sustainable development under the

programmes on sustainable consumption and production patterns, the strategy

adopted for hazardous waste management in the country stipulates the hierarchy

of Reduce, Reuse and Recycle ahead of ultimate disposal. In tandem with this

approach, the Hazardous wastes (Management and Handling & Transboundary

movement) Rules, 2008, provided for a specific section i.e.; Rule 11 dedicated to

utilization of hazardous wastes with calorific value more 2500 kcals/ kg and

considerable mineral value. The hazardous incinerable waste has vast potential to

be used as a supplementary resource or for energy gradient recovery on co-

processing. Their higher calorific value /mineral constituents which are

ingredients of cement evolve scope of its utilization as a supplementary resource

material in the cement industry.

About 6.2 million tonnes of hazardous wastes including out of which 0.41 million

tonnes of incinerable wastes is annually generated in India. The disposal of such

waste in common and captive incinerators leads to the loss of vital resource

besides having potential to cause severe environmental risks if not operated in an

environmentally sound manner.

The production of cement in India is about 200 million tonnes per annum, for

which estimated coal and lime stone requirement are 40 million tonnes per

annum and 320 million tonnes per annum, respectively. The country, therefore,

has potential to utilize entire hazardous waste generation, if found suitable

otherwise, for co-processing. Apart from this many other substances having high

calorific value which are otherwise treated as “waste”” but do not fall under the

purview of “hazardous waste”as stipulated in the Hazardous wastes (Management

and Handling & Transboundary movement) Rules, 2008, can also be co-processed

in the cement industry.

Thus the co-processing of hazardous substances in cement industry is much

beneficial option, whereby hazardous wastes are not only destroyed at a higher

temperature of around 14000

C and longer residence time but its inorganic content

gets fixed with the clinker apart from using the energy content of the wastes.

Apart from this, no residues are left, which in case of incineration still requires to

be land filled as incinerator ash. Further the acidic gases, if any generated during

co-processing gets neutralized, since the raw material is alkaline in nature. Such

phenomenon also reduces resource requirement such as coal and lime stone.

Thus utilization of hazardous wastes for co-processing makes a win–win situation.

Substances having potential to be used in co-processing in cement plant are:

Organic chemical wastes;

Other chemical wastes;

Fats and oils from animal and vegetal origin; and

Disposed, sorted and/or stocked wastes from a waste treatment facility.

JHCPs Commitment regarding Utilization of Hazardous Waste in Cement Plant

Kiln






As a strategy to produce the cement most efficiently, economically and in

environmentally sustainable way, JHCP would like to utilize the alternate fuels

along with the main fuel – coal depending on the availability of hazardous waste in

the vicinity.

Categories for Energy Efficiency Improvement

Potentials for energy efficiency improvement build on ongoing changes in the

cement sector. Besides above mentioned technology specific and structural

potentials further conservation options arise, such as the complete conversion

from wet to dry processes, from installation of cogeneration and waste heat

recovery facilities, from improvements in input factors as well as from

organizational and managerial matters. Better maintenance and monitoring of

plant activity, for instance, can minimize downtime of machinery and plant, thus

avoiding excess energy needed for restarting the process.

Table-6.1 presents in detail cost-effective energy conservation options that have

been identified for the Indian cement industry. The range of possible energy

savings is wide depending on the measure taken and the extent of

implementation. Most options require no or negligible investments.

TABLE-6.1

ENERGY CONSERVATION OPTIONS, INVESTMENT

REQUIREMENTS AND POSSIBLE SAVINGS

Energy Conservation Options Investment Requirements Possible Savings

Energy Efficient Technology and Equipment

Gyratory crushers, mobile crushers and single stage crushers vertical roller mills

- Upto 30% on electrical energy 15-30% compared to power consumption of ball mill

Roller press

- 4-8 kWh/t of cement in pre-grinding system

High efficiency separators - Upto 30% on electrical energy

Variable speed AC drives

- Upto 30% on power consumption of the drive

Solid state motor controllers and soft starters

Rs. 1.5 Lakhs

Upto 2% on power consumption of the drive

Energy efficient motor

Upto Rs. 3 Lakhs


Mechanical conveying systems over pneumatic conveying systems for dry raw meal and cement

Rs. 0.4-1.25 Lakhs


High efficiency fans Rs. 30-50 Lakhs 10-30% on power consumption of the drive

Improved multi-channel burners About 2% on heat consumption

5/6 – stage preheaters 30-40 kcal/kg clinker

Input Substitution and Output Modification

Manufacture of blended cements like PPC, PSC

Nil

Heat energy in kcal/kg cement: 20% in case of PPC and 45% in case of PSC; Electrical Energy: PPC 10-15%, PSC 20-30%

Coal substitution by lignites Fuel substitution to counter shortage of coal and utilization of waste

Process Specific Measures






Energy Conservation Options Investment Requirements Possible Savings

Conversion from wet to dry process

Rs. 1250-2700 per tonne of

annual capacity

Around 700-800 kcal/kg clinker installed

Proper preblending of raw materials to give optimum raw mix design

Nil -

Proper control over coal mix being fed into the kiln/ precalcinator

Nil -

Proper control over process parameters for optimum and efficient operation

Nil -

Use of grinding aids, mineralizer and slurry thinners

Nil -

Organizational Measures

Proper maintenance, monitoring and preventive maintenance to

minimize downtime of machinery and plant

Negligible

Depends on the extent of equipment availability and on

stream days of the plants

Depends on the extent of equipment availability and on stream days of the plants

Negligible

Upto 10% on thermal energy and upto 2% on electrical energy depending on extent of false air

Regular inspection and maintenance of capacitor banks and installing additional banks, if required

Rs.200- 300/KAVR

Dependent on extent of power factor improvement

Regular inspection of interlocking arrangement to prevent idle running of motors and machinery

Negligible

-

Effective load management Negligible

Upto about 15% in maximum

demand

Regular inspection of motors for identifying underloading, and reshuffling of the same

Negligible for reshuffling, dependent on size of motor for replacement

Depends on extent of underloading and size of motor

6.5 Selection of Alternative

The dry process, using preheaters and precalciners, is both economically and

environmentally preferable to the wet process because the energy consumption

(200 joules per kilogram (kg) is approximately half of that for the wet process.

There are also two common kiln designs in use today: a vertical shaft kiln, and a

horizontal rotary kiln. The rotary kiln generally has higher capacity and better

process and environmental controls. It is widely used.

The priority in the cement industry is to minimize the increase in ambient

particulate levels by reducing the mass load emitted from the stacks, from

fugitive emissions, and from other sources. Collection and recycling of dust in kiln

gases is required to improve the efficiency of the operation and to reduce the

atmospheric emissions.

NOx emissions would be controlled by the use of proper kiln design, low NOx

burners and use of an optimum level of excess air. For control of fugitive

particulate emissions, ventilation systems would be used in conjunction with

hoods and enclosures covering transfer points and conveyors. Drop distances






would be minimized by the use of adjustable conveyors. Dusty areas (such as

roads) would be wetted-down to reduce dust generation.

Sulfur dioxide emissions are best controlled by the use of low sulfur fuels and low

sulfur raw materials. The absorption capacity of the cement must be assessed to

determine the quantity of sulfur dioxide emitted which may be up to about half

the sulfur load on the kiln. Precalcining with low-NOx secondary firing can reduce

NOx emissions.

Appropriate stormwater and runoff control systems would be provided to

minimize the quantities of suspended material carried off-site.

Alkaline dust removed from the kiln gases is normally disposed of as solid waste.

Cement production from less efficient wet process plants has been reduced by

67%, resulting in significant reduction in plant water consumption:

Upgraded waste and storm-water control systems would further improve the

re-use of water on-site;

Changes to operations to allow waste material from the process to be

returned for reuse; and

Recycling of used oils and other maintenance items.

Aspects which have been addressed include:

Location of the plant, and of ancillary operations have been carefully

assessed, and appropriate mitigation measures taken in the planning stage;

Safe, low waste generating methods have been selected for ore, with

attention being paid to recirculation and reuse;

Technology and operation chosen maximize the opportunities for recycling

and re-use of water;

Dust control is done by both equipment design and operational procedures;

Solid waste disposal activities have been appropriately located as well as

conservatively designed. Drainage and leachate from disposal sites has been

minimized by appropriate location, design and ongoing maintenance;

Control of impact from ancillary operations such a roads, parking areas,

depots, borrow areas etc. has been an important part of site working plan;

and

Safe handling of wastes has been ensured.

All relevant actions have been taken to minimize environmental impact.

Environmental control has become a priority to be managed rather than an

unwelcome nuisance to be attended to when problems start to appear. Effective

control is being undertaken by corporate management by adopting environmental

performance goals and a suitable management structure from the outset.




Chapter-7 Additional Studies


7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

This chapter describes the public consultation for the proposed project, risk

assessment and disaster management plan, occupational health and safety and

rehabilitation and resettlement issues.

7.1 Public Consultation

Details will be incorporated after conducting public hearing.

7.2 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

7.2.1 Introduction

Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of various hazards

(unsafe conditions) that exist in the plant. On the other hand, risk analysis deals

with the identification and quantification of risks, the plant equipment and personnel

are exposed to, due to accidents resulting from the hazards present in the plant.

Risk analysis follows an extensive hazard analysis. It involves the identification and

assessment of risks the neighboring populations are exposed to as a result of

hazards present. This requires a thorough knowledge of failure probability, credible

accident scenario, vulnerability of populations etc. Much of this information is

difficult to get or generate. Consequently, the risk analysis is often confined to

maximum credible accident studies.

In the sections below, the identification of various hazards, probable risks in the

cement plant, maximum credible accident analysis and consequence analysis are

addressed which gives a broad identification of risks involved in the proposed

expansion. Based on the risk estimation disaster management plan has also been

prepared.

7.2.2 Approach to the Study

Risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accidents consisting of

an event or sequence of events. The risk assessment study covers the following:

Identification of potential hazard areas;

Identification of representative failure cases;

Visualization of the resulting scenarios in terms of fire (thermal radiation) and

explosion;

Assess the overall damage potential of the identified hazardous events and the

impact zones from the accidental scenarios;

Assess the overall suitability of the site from hazard minimization and disaster

mitigation point of view;

Furnish specific recommendations on the minimization of the worst accident

possibilities; and

Preparation of broad Disaster Management Plan (DMP), On-site and Off-site

emergency plan, which includes occupational health and safety plan.






7.2.3 Hazard Identification

Identification and quantification of hazards in plant is of primary significance in the

risk analysis. Hence, all the components of a system/plant/process have been

thoroughly examined to assess their potential for initiating or propagating an

unplanned event/sequence of events, which can be termed as an accident. The

following two methods for hazard identification have been employed in the study:

Identification of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and

Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 of Government of India (GOI Rules,

1989); as amended in 2000; and

Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage units based

on relative ranking technique, viz. Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI).

Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes: Flammable

substances, unstable substances and toxic substances. The ratings for a large

number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivity and toxicity have been given

in NFPA Codes 49 and 345-M. The storages of raw materials, products of proposed

power and cement plants are given in Table-7.1.

Coal is the main fuel used in kiln in cement plant. Hazardous characteristics of the

major flammable materials and chemicals that are employed in different processes

and storages of the cement are listed in Table-7.2. Existing storage tank and

quantity is sufficient for proposed expansion also.

TABLE-7.1

CATEGORYWISE SCHEDULE OF EXISTING STORAGE TANK

Sr. No.

Product No. of Tanks Classification Design Capacity (KL)

1 HSD 1 B 300 A: Dangerous Petroleum B: Non- Dangerous Petroleum C: Heavy Petroleum

TABLE-7.2

PROPERTIES OF FUELS/CHEMICALS USED AT THE PLANT

Chemical Codes/Label TLV FBP MP FP UEL LEL

°C % HSD Flammable - 371 - 54.4 6 0.7

TLV : Threshold Limit Value FBP : Final Boiling Point MP : Melting Point FP : Flash Point UEL : Upper Explosive Limit LEL : Lower Explosive Limit

7.2.4 Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GOI Rules, 1989 (amended in

2000)

Following accidents in industries in India over a few decades, a specific legislation

covering major hazard activities has been enforced by Govt. of India in 1989 in

conjunction with Environment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred here as GOI

Rules 1989 (amended in 2000). For the purpose of identifying major hazard

installations the rules employ certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and

explosive properties of chemicals. A systematic analysis of the fuels and their






quantities of storage has been carried out, to determine threshold quantities as

notified by GOI Rules and the applicable rules are identified. The results are

summarized in Table-7.3.

TABLE-7.3

APPLICABILITY OF GOI RULES TO FUEL/CHEMICAL STORAGE

Sr. No.

Fuel Listed in Schedule

Total Quantity [KL]

Threshold Quantity (T) for Application of Rules

5,7-9,13-15 10-12

1 HSD 3(1) 1 x 300 KL 25 MT 200 MT

7.2.5 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation

An assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose of identifying

and examining hazards related to feed stock materials, major process components,

utility and support systems, environmental factors, proposed operations, facilities

and safeguards.

Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA)

A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out initially to identify the major hazards

associated with storages and the processes of the expansion. This is followed by

consequence analysis to quantify these hazards. Finally the vulnerable zones are

plotted for which risk reducing measures are deduced and implemented. The

potential risk areas in the plant are given in Table-7.4.

TABLE-7.4

PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR PROCESS AND STORAGE AREAS

Sr. No.

Blocks/Areas Capacity/ Quantity

Hazards Identified

1 Coal Handling Plant including Bunker area

25,000 T Fire and/or Dust Explosions

2 Kiln

10500 TPD (Line-I) &

8000 TPD (Line-II)

Fires in - a) Lube Oil systems b) Cable galleries c) Short circuits in

i) Control Rooms ii) Switchgears

3 Power Transformers Upto 600 MVA (200 MVA single phase units)

Explosion and fire

4 Switch-yard Control Room

- Fire in cable galleries and Switchgear/Control Room

TABLE-7.5

PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR THE WHOLE PLANT IN GENERAL

PHA

Category Description of

Plausible Hazard Recommendation Provision

Environ-

mental

factors

If there is any

leakage and

eventuality of

-- All electrical fittings and

cables are provided as per

the specified standards.






PHA Category

Description of Plausible Hazard

Recommendation Provision

source of ignition. All motor starters are flame proof.

Highly inflammable nature of the chemicals may

cause fire hazard in the storage facility.

A well-designed fire protection including protein foam, dry

powder, CO2 extinguisher shall be

provided.

Fire extinguisher of small size and big size are provided at all potential

fire hazard places. In addition to the above, fire

hydrant network is also provided.

Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) Approach

Fire, Explosion and Toxicity Indexing (FE & TI) is a rapid ranking method for

identifying the degree of hazard. The application of FE&TI would help to make a

quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the hazard in these areas.

However, this does not provide precise information.

The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical value of F&EI as

per the criteria given below:

F&EI Range Degree of Hazard

0-60

61-96

97-127

128-158

159-up

Light

Moderate

Intermediate

Heavy

Severe

By comparing the indices F&EI and TI, the unit in question is classified into one of

the following three categories established for the purpose are presented in Table-

7.6.

TABLE-7.6

FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

Category Fire and Explosion Index

(F&EI)

Toxicity Index (TI)

I F&EI < 65 TI < 6

II 65 < or = F&EI < 95 6 < or = TI < 10

III F&EI > or = 95 TI > or = 10

Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures are recommended for

the three hazard categories.

Results of FE and TI for Storage/Process Units

Based on the GOI Rules, the hazardous fuels used in the plant were identified. Fire

and Explosion are the likely hazards, which may occur due to the fuel storages.

Hence, Fire and Explosion index has been calculated for in plant storage. Detailed

estimates of FE&TI are given in Table-7.7.






TABLE-7.7

FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX FOR STORAGE FACILITIES

Sr. No.

Chemical

Total Quantity F&EI Category TI Category

1 HSD 300 KL 21.6 I 14.9 III

Furnace oil storage falls into light category of F&EI and nil toxicity index.

Maximum Credible Accident Analysis (MCAA)

Hazardous substances may be released as a result of failures or catastrophes,

causing possible damage to the surrounding area. This section deals with the

question of how the consequences of the release of such substances and the

damage to the surrounding area can be determined by means of models. Major

hazards posed by flammable storage can be identified taking recourse to MCA

analysis. MCA analysis encompasses certain techniques to identify the hazards and

calculate the consequent effects in terms of damage distances of heat radiation,

toxic releases, vapor cloud explosion, etc. A host of probable or potential accidents

of the major units in the complex arising due to use, storage and handling of the

hazardous materials are examined to establish their credibility. Depending upon the

effective hazardous attributes and their impact on the event, the maximum effect

on the surrounding environment and the respective damage caused can be

assessed.

The reason and purpose of consequence analysis are many folds like:

Part of risk assessment;

Plant layout/code requirements;

Protection of other plants;

Protection of the public;

Emergency Planning; and

Design criteria (e.g. loading on control room)

The results of consequence analysis are useful for getting information about all

known and unknown effects that are of importance when some failure scenario

occurs in the plant and also to get information as how to deal with the possible

catastrophic events. It also gives the workers in the plant and people living in the

vicinity of the area, an understanding of their personal situation.

Damage Criteria

The fuel storage and the supply pipelines may lead to fire and explosion hazards.

The damage criteria due to an accidental release of any hydrocarbon arise from fire

and explosion. Contamination of soil or water is not expected as these fuels will

vaporize slowly and would not leave any residue. The vapors of these fuels are not

toxic and hence no effects of toxicity are expected.






Fire Damage

A flammable liquid in a pool will burn with a large turbulent diffusion flame. This

releases heat based on the heat of combustion and the burning rate of the liquid. A

part of the heat is radiated while the rest is convicted away by rising hot air and

combustion products. The radiations can heat the contents of a nearby storage or

process unit to above its ignition temperature and thus result in a spread of fire. The

radiations can also cause severe burns or fatalities of workers or fire fighters located

within a certain distance. Hence, it will be important to know beforehand the

damage potential of a flammable liquid pool likely to be created due to leakage or

catastrophic failure of a storage or process vessel. This will help to decide the

location of other storage/process vessels, decide the type of protective clothing the

workers/fire fighters need, the duration of time for which they can be in the zone,

the fire extinguishing measures needed and the protection methods needed for the

nearby storage/process vessels. Tables-7.8 and 7.9 tabulate the damage effect on

equipment and people due to thermal radiation intensity.

TABLE-7.8

DAMAGE DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITIES

Sr. No

Incident Radiation

(kW/m2)

Type of Damage Intensity

Damage to Equipment Damage to People

1 37.5 Damage to process equipment 100% lethality in 1 min. 1% lethality in 10 sec.

2 25.0 Minimum energy required to ignite wood at indefinitely long exposure without a flame

50% Lethality in 1 min. Significant injury in 10 sec.

3 19.0 Maximum thermal radiation intensity allowed on thermally unprotected adjoining equipment

--

4 12.5 Minimum energy to ignite with a flame;

melts plastic tubing

1% lethality in 1 min.

5 4.5 -- Causes pain if duration is longer than 20 sec, however blistering is

un-likely (First degree

burns)

6 1.6 -- Causes no discomfort on long exposures

Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank.

TABLE-7.9

RADIATION EXPOSURE AND LETHALITY

Radiation Intensity

(kW/m2) Exposure Time

(seconds) Lethality (%) Degree of Burns

1.6 -- 0 No discomfort even after long exposure

4.5 20 0 1st

4.5 50 0 1st






Radiation Intensity (kW/m2)

Exposure Time (seconds)

Lethality (%) Degree of Burns

8.0 20 0 1st

8.0 50 <1 3rd

8.0 60 <1 3rd

12.0 20 <1 2nd

12.0 50 8 3rd

12.5 -- 1 --

25.0 -- 50 --

37.5 -- 100 --

Fuel Storage

No additional storage tank is required the existing storage and quantity sufficient for

expansion project.

Modeling Scenarios

Based on the storage and consumption of furnace oil, the following failure scenarios

have been identified for MCA analysis and the scenarios are discussed in Table-

7.10.

TABLE-7.10

SCENARIOS CONSIDERED FOR MCA ANALYSIS

Sr. No. Fuel/Chemical Total Storage Quantity (KL) Scenario

Considered

1 HSD 1 x 300 Pool Fire

7.2.6 Details of Pool Fire Model

Heat Radiation program RADN has been used to estimate the steady state radiation

effect from various storage of fuel and chemicals at different distances. The model

has been developed by VIMTA based on the equations compiled from literatures by

Prof.J.P.Gupta, Department of Chemical Engineering, IIT Kanpur. The equations

used for computations are described below:

Properties of Fuels Considered for Modeling Scenarios (Pool Fire)

The data for various fuels used for modeling is tabulated in Table-7.11 and are

complied from various literature.

TABLE-7.11

PROPERTIES OF FUEL CONSIDERED FOR MODELING

Sr. No. Fuel Molecular Weight Boiling Point Density

kg/kg.mol oC kg/m3

1 HSD 230.0 360.0 920.0






Results and Discussion - Pool Fire

The results of MCA analysis are tabulated indicating the distances for various damages identified by the damage criteria. Calculations are done for radiation intensities levels of 37.5, 25, 19, 12.5, 4.5 and 1.6 kW/m2, which are presented in Table-7.12 for different scenarios. The distances computed for various scenarios are given in meters and are from the edge of the pool fire. The distances are plotted on the layout plan and shown in Figure-7.1.

The radiation intensities are computed for the maximum and minimum diameter of the storage tanks. It is further assumed that all other tank diameters fall in between the maximum and minimum diameter, thereby the radiation intensities also falling in between the maximum and minimum radiation intensities.

TABLE-7.12

OCCURRENCE OF VARIOUS RADIATION INTENSITIES- POOL FIRE

Radiation Quantity

KL Radiation Intensities (kW/m2)/Distances (m)

37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 4.5 1.6

HSD 300 16.2 20.4 23.8 30.3 54.2 97.7

A perusal of modeling results tabulated in Table-7.12 indicate that the radiation

intensity of 37.5 kW/m2 (100% lethality) and 25.0 kW/m2 (50% lethality) are

likely to occur within the radius of the pool, which is computed at 16.2 m and 20.4

m respectively.

Similarly the radiation intensity of 4.5 kW/m2 is likely to occur within a distance of

54.2 m from the center of fuel storage tank. First-degree burns are likely to occur

within this distance.

Effect of Thermal Radiation on Population

The radiation of 1.6 kW/m2 represents the safe radiation intensity for human

population even for long exposures.

In case of pool fire of tank the safe distance i.e. distance of occurrence of 1.6

kW/m2 is observed to be 97.7 m and falls within the plant boundary.

7.2.7 Risk Associated with Coal/Pet-Coke Handling Plant - Dust Explosion

Coal dust when dispersed in air and ignited would explode. Coal crusher house

and conveyor systems are most susceptible to this hazard. To be explosive, the

dust mixture should have:

Particles dispersed in the air with minimum size (typical figure is 400

microns);

Dust concentrations must be reasonably uniform; and

Minimum explosive concentration for dust (33% volatiles) is 50 grams/m3.






Failure of dust extraction and suppression systems may lead to abnormal

conditions and increasing the concentration of coal dust to the explosive limits.

Sources of ignition present are incandescent bulbs with the glasses of bulk head

fittings missing, electric equipment and cables, friction, spontaneous combustion

in accumulated dust.

Dust explosions may occur without any warnings with maximum explosion

pressure upto 6.4 bar. Another dangerous characteristic of dust explosions is that

it sets off secondary explosions after the occurrence of the initial dust explosion.

Many a times, the secondary explosions are more damaging than primary ones.

The dust explosions are powerful enough to destroy structures, kill or injure

people and set dangerous fires likely to damage a large portion of the material

handling plant including collapse of its steel structure, which may cripple the life

line of the cement plant.

7.3 Disaster Management Plan

7.3.1 Introduction

Disaster Management Plan (DMP) for an industrial unit is necessarily a

combination of various actions which are to be taken in a very short time but in a

pre-set sequence to deal effectively and efficiently with any disaster, emergency

or major accident with an aim to keep the loss of men, material, plant/machinery

etc., to the minimum.

Creation and establishment of a cell within the industrial unit is a pre-requisite for

an effective implementation of any disaster management plan. The main

functions of the Disaster Management Cell are to prepare a detailed disaster

management plan, which includes:

Identification of various types of expected disasters depending upon the type

of the industrial unit;

Identification of various groups, agencies, departments etc. necessary for

dealing with a specific disaster effectively;

Preparation - by intensive training - of relevant teams/groups within the

organization to deal with a specific disaster and keep them in readiness;

Establishment of an early detection system for the disasters;

Development of a reliable instant information/communication system; and

Organization and mobilization of all the concerned departments/

organizations/ groups and agencies instantly when needed.

Major disaster that can occur in this cement plant may be due to fire.






FIGURE-7.1

RADIATION CONTOURS IN CASE OF FAILURE OF HSD STORAGE TANK






7.3.2 Emergency Planning For Disaster Due To Fire

Coal/pet-coke storage, cable rooms, transformer unit, auxiliary transformers, oil

tanks, coal/pet-coke bunkers including all conveyor lines etc., within the plant are

the likely areas for which plan is outlined to deal with any eventuality of fire.

Stores, workshop, canteen and administration building have also been included.

Classification of Fires

The various classes of fire, explanation of the classes of fire and method of

fighting the different classes of fire are given in Table-7.13.

TABLE-7.13

CLASSES OF FIRE

Class Explanation Method of Fire Fire Fighting

A Solid – Carbonaceous inflammable material

Fire involving wood, paper, coal, pet-coke, cloth and other material

Water

B Liquid Fire involving oil, kerosene etc.

Foam or dry powder chemical

extinguisher

C Special Electrical fire DCP or CO2 extinguisher

7.3.3 Equipment System Dealing with Coal/Pet-Coke Handling

The whole system dealing with coal/pet-coke handling can be summarized as

follows.

Coal/pet-coke is unloaded into ground level hopper(s) from where it is

transported to pre-blending stock pile through belt conveyors;

Coal/pet-coke is reclaimed for the above stock pile and is transported to the

raw Coal/pet-coke hopper for vertical mill by a set of belt conveyors;

For collection of the pulverized fuel as well as venting the mill, a high

efficiency bag house are provided; and

The fine coal/pet-coke from the hoppers will be sent to Kiln firing by a set of

pumps.

Water sprinklers will be provided for the stockpile at the unloading point to prevent

fire. Pull cords and emergency switches will be provided all along the conveyor belt

to avoid the spreading of fire.

7.3.4 Need for a Fire Fighting Group

A small spark of fire may result into loss of machines and conveyors and the

damage by fire may be of the order of few crores of rupees. This type of losses






can be avoided by preventing and controlling the fire instantly for which fire-

fighting group shall be established.

7.3.5 Fire Fighting with Water

Adequate and reliable arrangement is required for fighting the fire with water

such as:

Identification of source of water and equipping with pumps;

Arrangement of pipe lines along and around all vulnerable areas;

Alternative water supply arrangements to divert the water from one set of

pipe lines (connected to another source) or to connect to other source; and

Provisions of valves at appropriate points to enable supply of water at the

required place/area or divert the same to another direction/pipe line.

Each source of water shall be equipped with one standby diesel driven pump

to serve in case of power failure.

Water Line Arrangement

Water lines shall be provided at coal/pet-coke handling area along the conveyors

and around the stockyards, transformers, oil tanks, coal/Pet-coke crusher house

etc. Water lines shall also be provided around other infrastructures in the plant

like administration building, canteen, stores and other plant equipment. The

system shall be designed in conformity with the recommendations of the Tariff

Advisory Committee (TAC) of Insurance Association of India. Also a reserve water

level shall be maintained in the sump as per TAC requirements.

Hydrant system feed pressurized water to hydrant valves shall be located

throughout the plant and also at strategic locations. The water pressure shall be

maintained at 6 to 8 kg/cm2 in these lines. By operating a few of the valves water

pressure can be increased at one particular place. There are two types of valves.

Non-return valves shall be provided to allow only unidirectional flow of water.

Gate valves shall be provided for closing or opening the water supply. An

adequate number of gate valves shall be provided at appropriate points to tap

water to deal with fire if it breaks out at any point of the plant.

7.3.6 Fire Fighting with Fire Extinguishers

To deal with fires - other than carbonaceous fires, which can be dealt with by

water - suitable fire extinguishers are required to do the job effectively. Adequate

number of "Fire stations' are to be established with the following types of

equipment and arrangements:

Soda acid fire extinguishers;

CO2 extinguishers;

Dry powder chemical extinguishers;

Foam extinguishers;






Fire buckets; and

50-mm spray hoses up to 150 m length.

Appropriate types of fire extinguishers shall also be provided at conveyor drive

heads, crusher house, control rooms, in machines like stacker and reclaimer,

electrical yard, sub-station and other infrastructure facilities within the premises.

In the transformer yard, automatic fire detecting and quenching system shall be

provided for each transformer. This system comes into operation whenever the

temperature of surrounding air exceeds 80°C and spray water over the

transformer to prevent spreading of fire and quench the same.

In order to avoid fire in cable galleries, all the power and control cables of FRLS

type (Fire Resistant Low Smoke) shall be used. In addition fire detecting and fire

alarm systems shall be installed in the cable galleries.

7.3.7 Inspection

Fire alarm panel (electrical) shall cover the entire plant. Fire extinguishers in

fire stations and machines and other places shall be periodically inspected by

the inspection group;

The temperature of the coal stack shall be regularly measured and recorded.

If the temperature exceeds 80°C, water quenching shall be carried out;

Emergency telephone numbers shall be displayed at vital points by the

groups; and

General inspection for fire shall be regularly carried out by the group.

7.3.8 Procedure for Extinguishing Fire

The following steps shall be taken during a fire accident in the system:

As soon as the message is received about fire, one of the spray groups in the

system shall be diverted to the place of the fire accident along with a staff

member;

Simultaneously plant fire station shall be informed by phone, walkie-talkie for

fire brigades;

Fire stations nearby village also be informed by phone to be in readiness;

In the meanwhile, the pipe system shall be operated to obtain maximum

pressure and output;

In case cables are within the reach of fire, power supply shall be tripped and

the cables shifted;

Further, other spray groups from the system shall be diverted to the spot;

In case of fire in the belt, belt shall be cut near the burning portion, to save

the remaining parts; and

After extinguishing the fire, the area shall be well prepared for re-use.






7.3.9 Specific Emergencies Anticipated

Fire consequences can be disastrous, since they involve huge quantities of fuel

either stored or in dynamic inventory in pipe lines or in nearby areas. Toxic releases

can affect persons working around. Preliminary hazard analysis has provided a basis

for consequence estimation. Estimation can be made by using various pool fire, tank

fire consequence calculations. During the study of risk assessment, the nature of

damages is worked out and probability of occurrence of such hazards is also drawn

up.

7.3.10 Emergency Action Plan

The emergency action plan consists of:

First information;

Responsibilities of work incident controller;

Responsibilities of chief incident controller;

Responsibilities for declaration of emergency;

Responsibilities for emergency communication officer;

Responsibilities of key personnel;

Responsibilities and action to be taken by essential staff and various teams

during emergency; and

Responsibilities for all clear signal.

First Information

The first person who observes/identities the emergencies shall inform by shouting

and by telephone to the shift engineer and fire station about the hazard. The shift

engineer will inform to works incident controller, chief incident controller and also

telephone operator, who shall communicate it to all key personnel.

Responsibilities of Work Incident Controller (WIC)

The work incident controller on knowing about an emergency immediately will rush

to the incident site and take overall charge and inform the same to chief incident

controller (CIC). On arrival, he will assess the extent of emergency and decide if

major emergency exists and inform the communication officer accordingly.

Responsibilities of Chief Incident Controller (CIC)

The additional general manager, who is also the chief incident controller, will

assume overall responsibilities for the factory/storage site and its personnel in case

of any emergency. His responsibilities are to:

1. Assess the magnitude of the situation and decide if staff needs to be evacuated

from their assembly point to identified safer places. Declare onsite/offsite

emergency;

2. Exercise direct operational control over areas other than those affected;

3. Undertake a continuous review of possible developments and assess in

consultation with key personnel as to whether shutting down of the plant or any

section of the plant and evacuation of personnel are required;






4. Liason with senior officials of police, fire brigade, medical and factories

inspectorate and provide advice on possible effects on areas outside the factory

premises;

5. Look after rehabilitation of affected persons on discontinuation of emergency;

and

6. Issue authorized statements to news media, and ensure that evidence is

preserved for enquiries to be conducted by the statutory authorities.

Responsibilities for Declaration of Major Emergency

It is important to make the emergencies known to every one in the plant. The major

emergency will be made known to every one inside the plant by sounding the alarm.

Separate alarms to warn different types of major emergencies such as fire and

explosion or toxic gas escape are provided. Public address system is also available

throughout the plant.

Announcement will be made by the concerned official/interpreter in local language.

Similarly announcement for termination of the emergency will also be announced.

Responsibilities of Emergency Communication Officer (ECO)

On hearing the emergency alarm he will proceed to Emergency Control Center

(ECC) . He will

Report to Chief Incident Controller and Work Incident Controller and maintain

contact with them;

On information received from the WIC of the situation, recommending if

necessary, evacuate the staff from the assembly points;

Identify suitable staff to act as runners or messengers who are listed in the

essential staff, between him and the works incident controller if the telephone

and other system of communication fail due to any reason;

Maintain inventory of items in the emergency control center;

Contact local meteorological office to receive early notification of changes in

weather condition in case of gas leak and prolonged action;

Maintain a log of incidents;

Keep in constant touch with happenings at the emergency site and with WIC;

Liaise with neighbor fire brigade, hospital, civil and police authorities on advice

from CIC.






Key Personnel

Apart from works incident controller and chief incident controller, other works

personnel will have key role to play in providing advice and in implementing the

decisions made by the chief incident controller. The key personnel include:

A. Sr. Superintendents/Engineer-in-charge responsible for

Operation

Electrical maintenance

Mechanical maintenance

C&I

Chemical

B. Head of Personnel and Officers connected with IR and Labour Welfare

C. Head (Technical Service)

Responsibilities of Key Personnel

Department Heads

The departmental heads will provide assistance as required by the WIC. They will

decide which members of their departments are required at the incident site.

Chief Personnel Manager.

He will have following responsibilities:

a) Report to work incident controller;

b) Ensure that all non-essential workers in the affected areas are evacuated to

assembly points in consultation with the chief incident controller;

c) Receive reports from nominated persons from assembly points, and pass on the

absence information services;

d) Keep liaison with other coordinators to meet the requirements of services such

as materials, security management, transportation, medical, canteen facilities

etc. as required during emergency;

e) Be in constant touch with the chief incident controller and feed him correct

information of the situation;

f) Give information to press, public and authorities concerned on instructions from

the CIC/WIC;

g) Ensure that casualties receive adequate attention at medical center and arrange

required additional help and inform relatives of the injured;

h) Arrange to inform public on Radio and TV about evacuation etc; and

i) Arrange TV coverage on handling emergency.

In-Charge (TS)

On knowing about an emergency, he will report to CIC and assist him in all

activities. He will also liaison with all teams.






Medical Officer

Medical Officer will render medical treatment to the injured and if necessary will

shift the injured to nearby Hospitals. He will mobilize extra medical help from

outside if necessary.

Head of Safety

On hearing the emergency alarm, he will proceed to the site. He will

a. make sure that all safety equipment are made available to the emergency

teams;

b. participate in rescue operations;

c. co-ordinate to transfer the injured persons to medical center and arrange for

first aid; and

d. keep in contact with ECO and the WIC and advice them on the condition of

injured persons.

Security Officer

On hearing the Emergency alarm he will proceed to main entrance/main gate. He

will

a. arrange to control the traffic at the gate and the incident area;

b. direct the security staff to the incident site to take part in emergency operations

under his guidance and supervision;

c. evacuate the persons in the plant or in the nearby areas as advised by WIC after

arranging the transport through the Transport in-charge;

d. Allow only those people who are associated with handling emergency;

e. Maintain law and order in the area, if necessary seek the help of police; and

f. Maintain communication with CIC/WIC and ECO.

Fire Officer

On hearing the emergency he will reach the fire station and arrange to sound the

alarm as per the type of emergency in consultation with WIC, He will:

a. Guide the fire fighting crew i.e. firemen and trained plant personnel and shift the

fire fighting facilities to the emergency site. Adequate facilities will be made

available.

b. Take guidance of the WIC for fire fighting as well as assessing the requirement

of outside help.

c. Maintain communication with WIC, CIC and ECO.

Transport Engineer-in-Charge

On hearing the emergency alarm he will immediately report to Work Incident

Controller. He will:

a. Ensure availability of auto base vehicles for evacuation or other duties, when

asked for.

b. Make all arrangements regarding transportation.






General Responsibilities of Employees During an Emergency

During an emergency, it becomes more enhanced and pronounced when an

emergency warning is raised, the workers if they are in charge of process

equipment, shall adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend any prescribed

duty as essential employee. If no such responsibility is assigned, he shall adopt a

safe course to assembly point and await instructions. He shall not resort to spread

panic. On the other hand, he must assist emergency personnel towards objectives

of DMP.

7.4 Emergency Facilities

7.4.1 Emergency Control Center (ECC)

For the time being Office Block is identified as Emergency Control Center. It would

have external Telephone, Fax, and Telex facility. All the Site Controller/ Incident

Controller Officers, Senior Personnel would be located here. Also, it would be an

elevated place. The following information and equipment are to be provided at the

Emergency Control Center (ECC).

Intercom, telephone

P and T telephone

Safe contained breathing apparatus

Fire suit/gas tight goggles/gloves/helmets

Hand tools, wind direction/velocities indications

Public address megaphone, hand bell, telephone directories

(internal, P and T) factory layout, site plan

Emergency lamp/torch light/batteries

Plan indicating locations of hazard inventories, plant control room, sources of

safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue location vulnerable

zones, escape routes.

Hazard chart

Emergency shut-down procedures

Nominal roll of employees

List of key personnel, list of essential employees, list of Emergency Co-

ordinators

Duties of key personnel

Address with telephone numbers and key personnel, emergency coordinator,

essential employees.

Important address and telephone numbers including Government agencies,

neighboring industries and sources of help, out side experts, chemical fact

sheets population details around the factory.

7.4.2 Assembly Point

Number of assembly depending upon the plant location would be identified wherein

employees who are not directly connected with the disaster management would be

assembled for safety and rescue. Emergency breathing apparatus, minimum

facilities like water etc. would be organized. In view of the size of plant, different






locations are ear marked as assembly points. Depending upon the location of

hazard, the assembly points are to be used.

7.4.3 Emergency Power Supply

Plant facilities would be connected to Emergency Power supply units and would be

placed in auto mode. Thus water pumps, plants lighting and emergency control

center. Administrative building and other auxiliary services are connected to

emergency power supply. In all the blocks flame proof type emergency lamps would

be provided.

7.4.4 Fire Fighting Facilities

First Aid Fire fighting equipment suitable for emergency shall be maintained in each

section in the plant. This would be as per statutory requirements as well as per TAC

Regulations. However, fire hydrant line covering major areas would be laid. It would

be maintained as 6 kg/sq.cm pressure. Fire alarms would be located in the bulk

storage areas. On the top of the Administration block, top of each production blocks,

wind socks would be installed to indicate direction of wind for emergency escape.

7.4.5 Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical

burns, fire burns etc. would be maintained in the medical center as well as in the

emergency control room. Private medical practitioners help would be sought.

Government hospital would be approached for emergency help. Breathing apparatus

and other emergency medical equipment would be provided and maintained. The

help of near by industrial management’s in this regard would be taken on mutual

support basis.

An ambulance with driver availability in all the shifts, emergency shift vehicle would

be ensured and maintained to transport injured or affected persons. Number of

persons would be trained in first aid so that, in every shift first aid personnel would

be available.

7.4.6 Emergency Actions

7.4.6.1 Emergency Warning

Communication of emergency would be made familiar to the personnel inside the

plant and people outside. An emergency warning system would be established.

7.4.6.2 Emergency Shutdown

There are number of facilities which can be provided to help deal with hazardous

conditions, fire breaks out. Under this situation the supply of the fuel to be

disconnected immediately. Whether a given method is appropriate depends on the

particular case. Cessation of agitation may be the best action in some instances but

not in others. Stopping of the feed may require the provision of by pass

arrangements.






Methods of removing additional heat include removal through the normal cooling

arrangements or use of an emergency cooling system. Cooling facilities, which use

vapouring liquid, may be particularly effective, since a large increase in vaporization

can be obtained by dropping pressure.

7.4.6.3 Evacuation of Personnel

There could be more number of persons in the storage area and other areas in the

vicinity. The area would have adequate number of exits, stair cases. In the event of

an emergency, unconnected personnel have to escape to assembly point. Operators

have to take emergency shutdown procedure and escape. Time Office maintains a

copy of deployment of employees in each shift, at ECC. If necessary, persons can be

evacuated by rescue teams.

Also, at the end of an emergency, after discussing with Incident Controllers and

Emergency Co-ordinators, the Site Controller orders an all clear signal. When it

becomes essential, the Site Controller communicates to the District Emergency

Authority, Police, Fire Service personnel regarding help required or development of

the situation into an Off-Site Emergency.

7.5 General

Employee Information

During an emergency, employees would be warned by raising siren in specific

pattern. Employees those who are designated be given training of escape routes,

taking shelter, protecting from toxic effects. Employees would be provided with

information related to fire hazards, antidotes and first aid measures. Those who

would designated as key personnel and essential employees shall be given training

to emergency response.

Public Information and Warning

The industrial disaster effects related to this plant may mostly be confined to the

plant area. The detailed risk analysis has indicated that the effects would not be felt

outside. However, as an abundant precaution, the information related to chemicals

in use would be furnished to District Emergency Authority for necessary

dissemination to general public and for any use during an off site emergency.

Co-ordination with Local Authorities

Keeping in view of the nature of emergency, two levels of coordination are

proposed. In the case of an On Site Emergency, resources within the organization

would be mobilized and in the event of extreme emergency local authorities help

shall be sought.

In the event of an emergency developing into an off site emergency, local authority

and District emergency Authority (normally the Collector) would be apprised and

under his supervision, the Off Site Disaster Management Plan would be exercised.

For this purpose, the facilities that are available locally, i.e. medical, transport,






personnel, rescue accommodation, voluntary organizations etc. would be mustered.

Necessary rehearsals and training in the form of mock drills shall be organized.

Mutual aid in the form of technical personnel, runners, helpers, special protective

equipment, transport vehicles, communication facility etc. shall be sought from the

neighboring industrial management.

Mock Drills

Emergency preparedness is an important aspect in the planning of Industrial

Disaster Management. Personnel would be trained suitably and prepared mentally

and physically in emergency response through carefully planned, simulated

procedures. Similarly, the key personnel and essential personnel shall be trained in

the operations.

Important Information

Once the Plant goes into stream, important information such as names and

addresses of key personnel, essential employees, medical personnel, out side the

plant, transporters address, address of those connected with Off Site Emergency

such as Police, Local Authorities, Fire Services, District Emergency Authority shall be

prepared and maintained.

7.6 Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan

The task of preparing the Off-Site Emergency Plan lies with the district collector,

however the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district

authorities. The proposed plan will be based on the following guidelines.

7.6.1 Introduction

Off-site emergency plan follows the on-site emergency plan. When the

consequences of an emergency situation go beyond the plant boundaries, it

becomes off-site plan either rests. Off-site emergency is essentially the

responsibility of the public administration. However, the factory management will

provide the public administration with the technical information relating to the

nature, quantum and probable consequences on the neighboring population.

The off-site plan in detail will be based on those events, which are most likely to

occur, but other less likely events, which have severe consequence, will also be

considered. Incidents, which have very severe consequences yet have a small

probability of occurrence, shall also be considered during the preparation of the

plan. However, the key feature of a good off-site emergency plan is flexibility in its

application to emergencies other than those specifically included in the formation of

the plan.

The roles of the various parties who will be involved in the implementation of an off-

site plan are described below. Depending on local arrangements, the responsibility

for the off-site plan shall be either rest with the works management or, with the

local authority. Either way, the plan shall identify an emergency co-ordinating






officer, who would take the overall command of the off-site activities. As with the

on-site plan, an emergency control center shall be setup within which the

emergency co-ordinating officer can operate.

An early decision will be required in many cases on the advice to be given to people

living "within range" of the accident - in particular whether they shall be evacuated

or told to go indoors. In the latter case, the decision can regularly be reviewed in

the event of an escalation of the incident. Consideration of evacuation may include

the following factors:

In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. oil storage tank), only

houses close to the fire are likely to need evacuation, although a severe smoke

hazard may require this to be reviewed periodically;

If a fire is escalating and in turn threatening a store of hazardous material, it might

be necessary to evacuate people nearby, but only if there is time; if insufficient time

exists, people shall be advised to stay indoors and shield themselves from the fire.

This latter case particularly applies if the installation at risk could produce a fireball

with vary severe thermal radiation effects (e.g. LPG storage);

7.6.2 Aspects Proposed to be Considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The main aspects, which shall be included in the emergency plan, are:

Organization

Names and appointments of incident controller, site main controller, their deputies

and other key personnel.

Communications

Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network, lists

of telephone numbers.

Specialized knowledge

Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to call

e.g. those with specialized chemical knowledge, laboratories.

Voluntary organizations

Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc.

Chemical information

Details of the hazardous substances stored or procedure on each site and a

summary of the risk associated with them.






Meteorological information

Arrangements for obtaining details of whether conditions prevailing at the time and

whether forecasts.

Humanitarian arrangements

Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding treatment of injured, first aid,

ambulances, temporary mortuaries.

Public information

Arrangements for (a) dealing with the media press office; (b) informing relatives,

etc.

Assessment of emergency plan

Arrangements for: (a) collecting information on the causes of the emergency; (b)

reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.

7.6.3 Role of the Emergency Co-ordinating Officer

The various emergency services shall be co-ordinated by an emergency co-

ordinating officer (ECO), who will be designated by the district collector. The ECO

shall liaise closely with the site main controller. Again depending on local

arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or prolonged off-site

consequences, the external control shall be passed to a senior local authority

administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state

government.

7.6.4 Role of the Local Authority

The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The emergency

planning officer (EPO) appointed shall carry out his duty in preparing for a whole

range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO shall liaise

with the works, to obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan. This

liaison shall ensure that the plan is continually kept upto date.

It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organizations, which

will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are able

to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate equipment to

cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans should be

organized by the EPO.

7.6.5 Role of Police

Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and property

and controlling traffic movements. Their functions shall include controlling

bystanders evacuating the public, identifying the dead and dealing with casualties,

and informing relatives of dead or injured.






7.6.6 Role of Fire Authorities

The control of fire shall be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade

officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller

on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer shall also have a similar

responsibility for other events, such as explosions and toxic release. Fire authorities

in the region shall be apprised about the location of all stores of flammable

materials, water and foam supply points, and fire-fighting equipment. They shall be

involved in on-site emergency rehearsals both as participants and, on occasion, as

observers of exercises involving only site personnel.

7.6.7 Role of Health Authorities

Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances, and so on,

shall have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they shall form an

integral part of the emergency plan.

For major fires, injuries shall be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a

varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but extreme

cases may be generally be available in most hospitals.

Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities

additional to those available locally, and a medical “mutual aid “scheme shall exist

to enable the assistance of neighboring authorities to be obtained in the event of an

emergency.

7.6.8 Role of Government Safety Authority

There will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely to

want to satisfy themselves that the organization responsible for producing the off-

site plan has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all types

including major emergencies. They may wish to see well documented procedures

and evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.

In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory

inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watching brief to a close

involvement in advising on operations in case of involvement in advising on

operations.

7.7 Occupational Health and Safety

Large industries, in general where multifarious activities are involved during

construction, erection, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance, the

men, materials and machines are the basic inputs. Along with the boons, the

industrialization generally brings several problems like occupational health and

safety.

The industrial planner, therefore, has to properly plan and take the steps to

minimize the impacts of industrialization and to ensure appropriate occupational

health, safety including fire plans. All these activities again may be classified under

construction and erection, and operation and maintenance. The proposed safety

plan is given below:






7.7.1 Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during construction and erection and

operation and maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both in magnitude

and variety in the above phases.

Construction and Erection

The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to

constructional accident and noise. To overcome these hazards, in addition to

arrangements to reduce it within TLV's, personal protective equipment shall also be

supplied to workers.

Operation and Maintenance

The problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance phase is due

to noise hearing losses. Suitable personnel protective equipment shall be given to

employees. The working personnel shall be given the following appropriate

personnel protective equipment.

Industrial safety helmet

Crash helmets

Face shield with replacement acrylic vision

Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends

Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue color glasses

Welders equipment for eye and face protection

Cylindrical type earplug

Ear muffs

Canister gas mask

Self contained breathing apparatus

Leather apron

Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves

Boiler suit

Safety belt/line man's safety belt

Leather hand gloves

Asbestos hand gloves

Acid/Alkali proof rubberized hand gloves

Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm

Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves

Industrial safety shoes with steel toe

Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gum boots

Full fledge hospital facilities shall be made available round the clock for attending

emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel shall be medically

examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of employment.

7.7.2 Safety Plan

Safety of both men and materials during construction and operation phases is of

concern. The preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters is






known as emergency plan. The disaster in proposed expansion project is possible

due to leakage of fuels, collapse of structures and fire/explosion etc.

Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and

maintenance phases, and the plant shall formulate safety policy with the following

regulations:

To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of

working environment.

To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in

the design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and

equipment.

To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees.

To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and

clothing and to ensure their proper use.

To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their

work, which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety.

To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making

necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and

upto date knowledge.

To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and

illness at work.

To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to

employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is

given to these matters.

To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate

fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this

service.

To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness

and incident involving personal injury or injury to health with a view to taking

corrective, remedial and preventive action.

To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and

safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees.

To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language

of employees.

To prepare separate safety rules for each types of occupation/processes involved

in a project.

To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals

of all buildings, equipment, work places and operations.

7.7.3 Safety Organization

Construction and Erection Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer shall be appointed. The responsibilities of

the safety officers include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts

of workers and advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training

programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to

occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of

Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions. In addition to the employment of safety officer

every contractor, shall also employ one safety officer to ensure safety of the worker,

in accordance with the conditions of contract.






Operation and Maintenance Phase

When the construction is completed the posting of safety officers shall be in

accordance with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and

responsibilities shall be as defined there of.

7.7.4 Safety Circle

In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of

hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be

constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from

that area. The circle normally shall meet for about an hour every week.

7.7.5 Safety Training

A full fledged training center shall be set up at the plant. Safety training shall be

provided by the safety officers with the assistance of faculty members called from

corporate center, professional safety institutions and universities. in addition to

regular employees, limited contractor labors shall also be provided safety training.

To create safety awareness safety films shall be shown to workers and leaflets etc.

Some precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent fires

are:

Compartmentation of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of cable

passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and identifying the

area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic and manual fire

fighting operations;

Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops for

cable shafts;

Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and

interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries.

Housekeeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and

regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting; and

Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.

7.7.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan

All the potential occupational hazardous work places such as fuel storage area,

coal/Pet-coke handling area shall be monitored regularly. The health of employees

working in these areas shall be monitored once in a year for early detection of any

ailment.

Though effective measures are taken to combat pollution in ambient conditions,

occupational health hazards are not overlooked. Project will provide well organized

occupational health services to all its employees by taking responsibility for

establishment and maintenance of safe and healthy working environment and

assessment of the physical and mental capabilities to turn out specific work loads.

The industrial medical centre will have following responsibilities:






1. Surveillance of workers health in relation to work;

2. Surveillance of working environments;

3. Identification and evaluation of environmental factors which may affect the

workers health;

4. Assessment of conditions of occupational workers health; and

5. Observance of safety norms and reduce/eliminate exposure to hazardous

environs.

Existing Practices at JHCP

A committee has been committed to monitor the safety and occupational health

aspects which meet periodically to enhance the safety and occupational health

checkups are being carried out on regular basis. Occupational health checkup details

awareness among the worker carrying at JHCP at Baga are enclosed as Annexure-

XVIII.




Chapter-8 Project Benefits


8.0 PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

The basic requirement of the community needs are already being met by the

project as part of its Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) and will be further

strengthened by extending health care, educational facilities developed in the

township to the community. The safe drinking water supply will be streamlined

and extended to the nearby villages. The small enterprises and business

development for the youth and women will be extended. The existing roads in the

area will be strengthened. JHCP will initiate the above amenities either by

providing or by improving the existing facilities in the area, which will help in

uplifting the living standards of local communities.

To avoid traffic congestion, existing PWD road (17 km) between Baga (plant area)

& Jabbal has been widened to NH standards by the JAL. All roads are being

maintained in good shape & condition and have trouble free incoming and

outgoing traffic. The road & transportation facilities are already developed for the

existing cement plant under operation. With improved transportation facilities the

villages in 10 km radius is developed with many of unemployed youth opting for

truck transport business and the scope of business will be enhanced. The

communication facilities will further improve due to the plant operations. The

medical facilities would also be available to local people in the surrounding in case

of emergencies.

8.2 Corporate Social Responsibility

Details of CSR Activities

1) Education

Brief Background

The corporate philosophy of Jaypee Group “Growth with a Human Face” is taken

up very rightly by JAIPRAKASH SEWA SANSTHAN (JSS) ‘not-for-profit Trust’

promoted by the founder Chairman of Jaypee Group Hon’ble Shri Jaiprakash Gaur

Ji. JSS strives to impart quality education to the society to ensure economical,

social, cultural and ethical development of our great nation India. It is very

strongly felt that people of resources must contribute towards making a better

tomorrow for all who come in contact and consider it a privilege to improve the

lives of the people that come in contact and try to help reduce the pain & agony

in society.

It is with this spirit to have a composite rural development; a survey was

conducted around JHCP Baga in 10 km radius during 2004-05 (as a part of earlier

EIA Study). Though, literacy rate of the area was found with a total of 71.3 %,

comprising 34.2 % male & 37.1 % female, but a large number of children (20 –

25 %) in the age group of 5-16 years were also found either not going to school

or dropped out of school due to unfavorable school conditions, geographical

hurdles and other socio-economic problems. The picture of continuation of

education was also found very gloomy and centered to economically sound






section of society. But, for acquiring secondary education (10+2), children were

observed going at far distant places; about 25-35 Kms away and even more.

The analysis of problem related to illiteracy revealed that ignorance, poverty and

lack of good educational institutions in the vicinity are the main cause of illiteracy

as the Govt. has limited resources to tackle these challenges. Needless to say

that this scenario has opened up several areas for business to contribute towards

social development program. It was the above explained literacy scenario of the

area surveyed during 2004-05 around JHCP Baga, the Company came ahead with

the following activities as a part of their ‘Environment Management Plan’ as well

as ‘Corporate Social Responsibility’ to tackle the problem of illiteracy and to

provide care and encouragement to young generation especially of

underprivileged section of the society:

a) ‘Jaypee Vidya Mandir Panchtantra’ an English Medium 10+2 School, run

by Jaiprakash Sewa Sansthan (Not- for –Profit Trust), has been established since

April 2011 in the adjoining Township area of JHCP at Dhartatoh (District Bilaspur).

This school is providing quality education to the children from adjoining villages at

a large and classes up to XII standard have been commenced. The school has

affiliated with CBSE No. 630172/2013. The school provides bus facility to the

students coming from distant located villages, around 15 to 25 km away i.e.

Malothi, Malokhar, Kandhar, Ranikotla etc. For the aforesaid purposes, the school

manages four buses.

Jaypee Vidya Mandir

b) Up-gradation of existing Government Middle School at Baga to Senior

Secondary Level (10+2). The company has constructed required building

infrastructure to upgrade the existing Govt. middle school Baga to Senior

Secondary Level (10+2). This school provides better education to the children

belonging to underprivileged section of society and is affiliated to State Board of

Secondary Education Dharamshala (HP).






Up-graded Govt. School Building - Dharamshala

c) Besides above, company constructed an ‘Aangan Barri Kendra’ in village Padiyar.

A new primary school with all required infrastructures has been made in village

Sehnali and is handed over to the department of elementary education for

operational since 2007.

School Building at Sehnali (Solan)

2) Healthcare

Brief Background

It is very strongly felt that people of resources must contribute towards making a

better tomorrow for all who come in contact and consider it a privilege to improve

the lives and health of the people that come in contact and try to help reduce the

pain & agony in society. It is with this spirit to have a composite socio-economic

rural development; a survey was conducted around JHCP Baga in 10 Kms radius

during 2004-05 (as a part of earlier EIA Study). It was observed in the survey

that medical facilities are inadequate in the area, only few villages have the govt.






primary health care centers. Due to lack of advanced medical technology, for any

major health care and disease diagnosis, populace of the area has to go to

Bilaspur Town (about 40 Kms from Plant site). It was observed that mortality rate

in the area was largely contributed to various chronic diseases and on small

occasions, it was the accidents. The common diseases are diarrhea, malaria,

gastro-enteritis, skin and eye diseases.

The analysis of problem related to health revealed that lack of awareness,

poverty and lack of good health institutions with adequate medical equipments /

technologies in the vicinity are the main cause of poor health and disease

prevalence as the Govt. has limited resources to tackle these challenges. It is the

above explained health scenario of the area surveyed during 2004-05 around

JHCP Baga, the company came ahead with the following activities as a part of

their ‘Environment Management Plan’ as well as ‘Corporate Social Responsibility’

to tackle the problems of health and to provide care and human face to young

generation especially of underprivileged section of the society. It was also to give

medical treatment to the villagers of the adjoining villages for basic day to day

ailments and screening them for any chronic disease so that proper advice can be

given to them for further treatment.

a) Hospital: Company has constructed a 30 - bedded hospital in the township area

of JHCP Baga at village Srainghat (Dhartatoh) in district Bilaspur and put the

same in the service of public. As of now, the hospital is equipped with the

following facilities / specialists:

1 Pathological Department

2 Diagnostic lab

3 Audiometric facility

4 Dental care

5 Medicine

6 Radio diagnosis X–Ray / ECG

Hospital at Dhartatoh Township Area (Bilaspur District)






Chief Medical Officer Emergency Ward

X-Ray ECG

Pathology Lab Audiometric Facility






Dental Section Medicine Store Room

b) Dispensaries: In addition to above, 2 No's of medical dispensaries have been

provided in the project adjoining areas at villages Baga and Panali in district

Solan. These medical dispensaries under the control of qualified medical officers

are catering to the needs of local inhabitants besides company employees. 3 No's

of Ambulances including mobile health van are in operation and assisting both the

dispensary round the clock at Baga and Panali besides hospital at Neri Jajjar.

Patients in case of emergency are referred to IGMC Shimla, district hospital at

Bilaspur and PGI Chandigarh.

Dispensary at JHCP






Ambulance

c) Mobile Health Camps: Till date, 214 Nos. of health camps have been organized

in the adjoining areas and medicines have been distributed on free of cost basis.

3) Community Development

Widening / Up-gradation of Public Roads

The existing PWD road between Baga (Tehsil Arki) and Jabbal (Dist. Solan) 17 km

has been upgraded to NH standards, connecting project site to NH 88 at a cost of

about Rs. 48.00 crores. The upgraded road is being used by the public transport

as well. The existing PWD road, between Shalughat temple (Baga) to Kandhar (12

km), has been maintained by the company at a cost of around Rs. 70.00 Lakhs.

Due to establishment of the plant, the economic progress around the project area

has shown considerable improvement. About 70 shops have already come into

existence and are doing good business in village Baga. Many ancillary units along

the Baga Jabbal road (17 km) have been come into existence. Apart from above,

footpaths, mule tracks etc. have been made in different villages. Company also

makes contribution for the socio–religious functions on regular basis. A no. of

community development jobs have also been done in Bilaspur district.






Widening & Up-gradation of PWD Road to NH Standard

Construction of Durable Community Assets

A magnificent temple of Shri Badu Devta has been constructed in village Baga, at

Shalughat. Two more temples have also been made in village Baga (District Solan)

and village Daud (District Bilaspur). Naina Devi temple in village Ladaghat (District

Bilaspur) has been renovated. A ‘Mahila Mandal’ building is also constructed at

Baga. For the prevalence of law and order within and outside the project area, a

proper space and building for the functioning of police station is being provided at

village Baga and Kharsi.

Temple at Shalughat






Mahila Mandal Police Station at Baga

An amount of Rs.40 Crores is allocated under proposed expansion project. Existing CSR

activities will be strengthened. So far an amount of over Rs. 8155 Lakhs has been spent

on the social activities as stated above. Budget on CSR activities is given below in

Table-8.1.





TABLE-8.1

CSR ACTIVITIES

CSR ACTIVITIES AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT WORKS EXECUTED BY JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT BAGA IN ADJOINING AREAS OF DISTRICT SOLAN AND BILSPUR (HP)

Sr. No.

Name of Work Expenditure incurred till date (March, 2015) in Rupees

Expenditure for reporting period (Oct'14 - Mar' 15) in Rupees

1) EDUCATION UPLIFTMENT

IN DISTRICT SOLAN

i Upgradation of existing govt middle school baga to 10+2 standard - construction of building and other activities

48,63,373 4,39,404

ii Construction of approach path to govt middle school baga from baga - kandhar pwd road (gram panchayat mangal)

98,000 0

iii Construction of govt. Primary school at sehnali 15,02,890 0

iv Construction of anganwadi kendra and development of playground at padiyar. 7,00,000 0

v Construction of varanda (10 x 5 mtrs) with stair case at govt. Senior secondary school at kandhar and assests for bhalag school

4,25,050 0

vi For an industrial training institute (rural iti), to be opened at kandhar, land & builidng infrastructure have been procured

18400328 0

vii Donations to various educational institutes / societies 413000 2,90,000

viii Construction of bed college in bhalag 2307 0

Total 2,64,04,948 7,29,404

In district Bilaspur

ix 10 + 2 english medium school has been constructed within our township area (dhartatoh) and is operational up to 9th standard for session of 2013 - 14. School has been provided with 3 vehicles (buses) and school playground is being constructed.

7,86,40,109 1,00,000

x Construction of toilet block, retaining wall, stair case etc. For govt. Middle school at sai brahmana 4,50,000 0

xi Construction of class room with verandah and other facilities for govt. High school at sai brahmana. 2,50,000 0

xii Development of school ground at smog kaneta under panchayat chhakoh 34,508 0

xiii Construction of boundary wall for development of playground at senior secondary school at jukhala 4,50,000 0

xiv Contribution to promote girl children (from below poverty line and backward classes) to acquire quality education.

31,000 0

xv Donations to various educational institutes / societies 1,00,000 1,00,000

Total 7,99,55,617 2,00,000






Sr. No.



Total (1) 10,63,60,565 9,29,404

2) Health care

i A 30 bedded hospital equipped with all facilities within our township area (at dhartatoh - bilaspur) has been set up and commissioned for public service.

9,40,84m285 37,54,691 ii A mobile health van besides two ambulances have also been deployed in public service.

iii In addition to above, two dispensaries (baga & panali) are providing health services to locals in the project adjoining area of solan district and distributing medicines on free of cost basis.

iv Health camps in the project surrounding areas of solan and bilaspur districts (214 camps since 2006 till date).

17,52,500 1,50,000

v Renovation of special ward (two rooms with required infrastructure) at regional hospital bilaspur (hp). 8,91,611 0

vi Contribution to red cross (health) society solan (hp) 1,10,000 0

vii Financial help for medical treatment of villagers 50,000 0

Total (2) 9,68,88,396 39,04,691

3) Community Development

3 a) Water Supply and Protection of Natural Water Sources

In District Solan

i To fulfill the water requirments of project and mangal panchayat, two water lifting schemes based on river satluj has been commissioned during 2008 and are operational since then.

5,47,25,035 0

ii Based on above two schemes, an overall water distribution scheme for mangal panchayat, worth rs. 132 lacs, is under implementation by iph deptt. At the cost of company.

80,00,000 0

iii Presently, water is being supplied to adjoining villages through water tankers 11,96,000 24,000

iv Construction of water tank and laying of drinking water supply pipe line in village roog ghati (length - 0.50 km) and village padiyar (length - 2.50 km).

6,73,981 1,23,981

v Renovation of water source at baga. 13,33,887 4,62,338

vi Construction of water tank, protective retaining walls, for boomag natural water source at kandhar. 3,53,000 0

vii Development of natural water source in village - dhota (baga) 3,00,000 0

viii Construction of protective wall in baga nala to protect natural water source. 14,13,872 10,12,014

ix Renovation and construction of 5 nos water tank in tareda and baga nala 8,76,053 2,44,396

x Construction of water tank in village tareda. 1,50,000 0

xi Construction of kuhals (drain - 3.50km long) for village padiyar and 2.50 km long drain for village tareda . 16,74,509 1,74,509






Sr. No.



xii Laying of pipeline & construction of water tank in village sehnali 2,95,868 55,452

Total 7,09,92,205 20,96,690

In District Bilaspur

xiii Installation of tube well, construction of water tank and laying of water pipe line etc. For water supply scheme for kharsi

4,90,000 0

xiv Construction of water tank and laying of drinking water supply pipe line in village drober (length - 1.50 km)

2,50,000 0

xv Development of natural water source at bharetar. 37,488 0

Total 7,77,488 0

Total (3 a) 7,17,69,693 20,96,690

3 b) preservation of religious places, culture, sports and traditional art

In District Solan

i Construction of badu bada dev temple at shalughat (shalughat temple) and associated affairs 1,86,93,184

12,482

ii Construction of badu bada dev temple, sarai room development of ground at baga (baga temple) 0

iii Construction of sidh baba balak nath temple and sarai room at padiyar including cost of electrification. 12,02,082 2,082

iv Kota stone & marble flooring for temple at bughar (badiyar). 1,00,000 0

v Maa durga mandir nirman committee forest colony kunihar 20,000 0

vi Construction of torti shiva temple at bhalag and associated affairs 13,85,124 5,12,579

vii Contributions to district level "sair utsav" annual function - arki 17,50,000 2,50,000

viii Contributions to state level "shoolni fair" annual function - solan. 25,79,000 0

ix Contributions to various local cultural mela committees (darlaghat, shalaghat, baddi, dhundhan, baga etc.). 4,65,781 11,000

x Contribution to various sports tournaments (including in-door) at various levels in the state / district solan 11,12,250 2,30,000

xi Donation to marriage & other functions 1,01,100 25,000

xii Participation fee given to mines environment & mineral conservation celebration committee 45,000 0

xiii Contribution to akhil bharatiya cement mazdoor mahasangh 10,000 0

Total 2,74,63,521 10,43,143


xiv Payment to temple committee for renovation of shri mata naina devi mandir near ladaghat. 1,37,208 0

xv Contributions to ram leela / natak committees / samities at karot, malothi malokhar, chakoh and development of ramleela maidan at karot near jabbal.

1,46,950 25,000






Sr. No.



xvi Contributions to state level "nalwari fair" annual function - bilaspur 14,75,000 2,50,000

xvii Contributions to rishi markanday jila stariya krishak vikas & pashu palak sair mela samiti jukhala. 50,000 0

xviii Contribution for construction of protection wall for cricket stadium at luhnu, bilaspur, district bilaspur. 7,50,000 0

xix Contribution to hp forest sports and welfare society bilaspur. 1,94,660 0

xx Contribution to rural cricket tournament in chakoh and ranikotla. 31,000 0

xxi Contribution to him kala sangam ranikotala, jagriti yuva club malokhar and chetna association bilaspur for promotion of cultural and traditional art.

1,55,000 30,000

xxii Contribution to various sports tournaments (including in-door) at various levels in the state / district bilaspur

25,000 25,000

xxiii Contributions to various cultural mela committees (bilaspur, sunder nagar, mandi etc.). 50,525 50,525

Total 30,15,343 3,80,525

Total (3 b) 3,04,78,864 14,23,668

3 c) Infrastructures support and creation of durable Community Assets

In District Solan

i Maintenance and improvement of hppwd road between baga and kandhar. 69,64,873 2,01,388

ii Maintenance of baga - torti mandir road (paid to pwd in jan 2010) 2,19,000 0

iii Construction of 6.00 km long footpath from baga to tareda. 15,00,000 0

iv Construction of retaining wall and footpath along baga - kandhar road in village baga & market area 31,41,551 50,795

v Construction of 1.50 km long footpath from roog ghati to village - dhota (baga) and from baga to karog 4,30,521 0

vi Construction of 1.50 km long footpath from roog ghati to hawani. 3,75,000 0

vii Construction of 1.00 km long footpath from padiyar to bagicharu. 2,50,000 0

viii Construction of footpaths from main road (pwd) near state bank of patiala to village gheri from junior middle school to village dhota and from village baga (near water source) to village gheri (gram panchayat mangal).

2,53,390 53,390

ix Construction of pucca footpath at kandhar near bhoomag 5,00,000 0

x Construction of footpath for village chhamyatar from bhalag 93,482 0

xi Construction of footpath and road at sehnali village 20,58,587 0

xii Construction of 3 nos pulia (cross culverts) in tareda nala. 4,50,000 0

xiii Construction of 2 nos pulia (cross culverts) in padiyar nala. 3,00,000 0

xiv Installation of 13 nos solar light in village padiyar 7,45,790 0






Sr. No.



xv Contribution for cowshed construction at padiyar 3,80,128 0

xvi Procurement of land for mangal land loosers society 2,50,000 0

xvii Construction of truck union (mangal) office at shalughat 68,192 0

xviii Construction of multipurpose cooperative society at kandhar 10,79,396 2,693

xix Kol land work 2,28,897 0

Total 1,92,88,807 3,08,266


xx Improvement / widening of single lane pwd road between baga (shalughat) - jabbal (15 kms) to nh standards and its maintenance.

48,40,58,354 30,65,775

xxi Construction of retaining wall at chandigarh - mandi - manali road (nh – 21) during the year 2008-09 near swarghat.

12,57,000 0

xxii Matalling and tarring of road side berms near excise barrier swarghat to creat dedicated truck lane to avoid traffic decongestion at nh - 21.

10,20,729 0

xxiii Contribution for cctv camera and other facility at nh - 21 near nauni more in distt. Bilaspur. 6,00,000 0

xxiv Excavation work at narrow width near ghagas bridge on nh – 88 in brahmpukhar - ghagas section. 5,00,000 0

xxv Road widening arrangement by providing of cc retaining wall at narrow portion of nh – 88 near ghagas bridge

6,00,000 0

xxvi Construction of rcc hume pipe culvert and retaining wall at jukhala (nh - 88) 5,00,000 0

xxvii Improvment of road under "soldha panchayat" and road to lower sai brahmna. 17,340 0

xxviii Contribution to gram panchayat sai kharsi for development of link road from navgaun - beri road to kharsi brahmana.

53,525 0

xxix Improvement / development of path connecting sai brahmana village to kharsi shalughat road. 40,000 0

xxx Improvement & development of path at kharsi 28,723 0

xxxi Cosntruction of pathway to samshan ghat at kharsi 8,50,000 0

xxxii Contruction of pucca shed at samshan ghat at malothi 50,000 0

xxxiii Construction of retaining wall & septic tank for forest guard hut at messghati (malokhar) 41,893 0

xxxiv Water supply connection and other repair works at patwarkhanna rani kotla 75,000 0

xxxv Construction of rr masonary retaining wall for protection of panchayat ghar and development of ground at sai brahmana.

1,00,000 0

xxxvi Construction of rain shelter at ranikotla 2,75q,000 0






Sr. No.



xxxvii Construction of footpath at neri village 2,67,558 0

xxxviii Improvement of malokhar chowk and 4 no's of street lights (solar lamps) 1,03,719 0

xxxix Repair of patwar khanna (chakoh). 20,000 0

xxxx Repair of patwar khanna (bholi). 25,000 0

xxxxi White washing and pipe fitting for tehsildar office at bilaspur 16,350 0

Total 49,05,00,191 30,65,775

Total (3 c) 50,97,88,998 33,74,041

Total 3 (a + b +c) 61,20,37,555 68,94,399

4) Woman Empowerment

I Construction of mahila mandal building at baga (district solan) development of land therefore 1,72,000 0

Ii Contributions to various mahila mandals operating at dhartatoh, panjail pachch, hardi kothi and sai brahmna panchayats of district bilaspur.

36,000 0

Total (4) 2,08,000 0

5) Animal Husbandry

I N.a. 0 0

Grand Total (1+2+3+4+5) 81,54,94,516 1,17,28,494


to 3.50 MTPA (Line-I) and Installation of Additional Plant (Line-II) to Produce 2.50 MTPA Clinker




8.3 Employment Potential

The impact of proposed expansion project on the economic aspects can be clearly

observed. The project has facilitated in providing direct and indirect employment

to persons of different skills and trades. The local population is given preference

and the same is expected to continue in employment. The employment potential

will ameliorate economic conditions of these families directly and provide

employment to many other families indirectly who are involved in business and

service oriented activities.

The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project shall

upgrade the prosperity of the region. These will in-turn improves the socio-

economic conditions of the area. Preference for employment will be given to local

community depending upon requirement & qualification in and around project

area. This project is expected to yield a positive impact on the socio-economic

environment of the region. It helps in sustainable development of this area

including further development of physical infrastructural facilities.

8.4 Rehabilitation of Human Settlements

No Rehabilitation of human settlements involved in this expansion project.




Chapter-9 Administrative Aspects


9.0 ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS

9.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection and Conservation

The cement plant is supervised and controlled by a unit head supported by

adequate team of technically and statutorily qualified personnel apart from the

operating staff of skilled, semi skilled, unskilled and other categories.

Environment management will be the responsibility of the environment

management cell headed by the General Manager (Environment) and comprising

of environmental engineer, safety officer, chemists, etc. The manager

(Environment) will report to the unit head.

The Manager-Environment will be responsible for environment management

activities in the cement plant. To facilitate effective environment management,

JHCP created a department consisting of officers from various disciplines to

co-ordinate the activities concerned with the management and implementation of

the environmental control measures.

Basically, this department will supervise the monitoring of environmental

pollution levels viz. ambient air quality, water and effluent quality, noise level

either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary.

In case the monitored results of environmental pollution are found to exceed the

allowable limits, the environmental management cell will suggest remedial action

and get these suggestions implemented through the concerned authorities.

The environmental management cell will also co-ordinate all the related activities

such as collection of statistics of health of workers and population of the region,

afforestation and green belt development.

The organization chart is shown in Figure-9.1.




Chapter-9 Administrative Aspects


FIGURE-9.1

ORGANISATION CHART AT JHCP

Unit Head / President

General Manager (Env)

Chemist

Safety Officer

Monitoring & Laboratory team

Environmental Engineer




Chapter-10 Summary & Conclusions


10.0 SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS

10.1 Introduction

Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP), a unit of Jaiprakash Associates Limited

(JAL) proposes enhancement in clinker production from 2.97 MTPA to 3.5 MTPA

(Line-I) by optimizing the operation parameters, within the existing cement plant

at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district, Himachal Pradesh. The proposed

increase in clinker production is 17.85 % with no additional cost investment.

Further, it also proposes expansion of cement plant by installing additional plant

(Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA clinker and 1.50 MTPA cement, within the existing

cement plant premises. Line-II will be established parallel to the existing Line-I

Plant. Line-II will increase the total clinker production from 3.50 MTPA to 6.0

MTPA and cement production capacity from 2.54 to 4.04 MTPA. within the

existing cement plant premises located at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district,

Himachal Pradesh. Estimated cost of the expansion project is about Rs.1585

Crores.

10.2 Environmental Setting

The study area covers 10 km radius around the plant boundary. The

environmental setting of the proposed expansion site is as follows:

The proposed enhancement area is located between Latitude 31°19'26.2” -

31°20’17” N and Longitude 76°53'4.0” - 76°54'4.5” E.

The proposed enhancement area is at a distance of 2.2 km, NNW from Sutlej

river. Site elevation is about 1522 m above MSL;

There are two wildlife sanctuaries exists within 10 km radius. Wildlife

clearance was recommended by standing committee of NBWL for exiting plant

during its 31st meeting held on 12th – 13th August, 2014. Line-II has been

submitted to DFO Wildlife Division Shimla (HP) vide letter no. JAL/JHCP/Unit-

II/WL/2015 18835 dated 22nd August, 2015. MOM are enclosed as Annexure-

IV;

There are no archaeological monuments, places of tourist interests and defence

installations within 10 km radius;

There are 21 protected forests block exists within 10 km radius.

10.3 Project Description

10.3.1 Salient Features of Proposed Enhancement

The salient features of proposed enhancement (Line-I) are given below in the

Table-10.1(A).






TABLE-10.1(A)

SALIENT FEATURES OF PROPOSED CLINKER ENHANCEMENT (LINE-I)

Sr. No. Parameter Existing Augmentation Total

1 Capacity 2.97 MTPA Clinker 0.53 MTPA Clinker 3.5 MTPA

2 Process technology Calcination by state of art 6 stage pre-heater / pre-calciner kiln

3 Land Requirement 166.01 ha 166.01 ha

4 Water Requirement and Source 1700 m3/day from two

nallas (Trenda & Padiyar) near their confluence with Satjuj river (2.2 km) is already allocated

No additional water requirement involved. Existing water allocation will be sufficient for enhanced production

1700 m3/day

5 Power requirement 30 MW No increase in connected and contracted power load is envisaged

30 MW 6 Source

JHCP has grid supply

7 Project Cost

Rs 1500 Crores

No additional capital

investment is envisaged

Rs. 1500 Crores

8 Manpower requirement

956 no Same as at present 956 no

The salient features of proposed expansion of cement plant (Line-II) are given

below in the Table-10.1(B).

TABLE-10.1(B)

SALIENT FEATURES OF PROPOSED CEMENT PLANT (LINE-II)

Sr. No. Features Description

1 Capacity 2.5 MTPA – Clinker 1.5 MTPA – Cement Plant

2 Process technology Preheating of coal in 6 stages Pyro Processing and Calcinations in kiln

3 Land Requirement No additional land required (within the 166.01 ha exist cement plant)


1000 m3/day from existing water allocation. Existing sanction of 3500 m3/day from two nallas (Treda & Padiyar) near their confluence with Satlaj river (2.2 km from plant site)

5 Power requirement Approximately 25 MW additional power is required which will be met form 132 KV Grid line

6 Project Cost Rs. 1585 crores 7 Manpower requirement 2000 persons during construction

250 persons during operation

10.4 Resource Requirement

Land Requirement

No additional land is required for the proposed clinker capacity enhancement

Line-I and proposed expansion of cement plant Line-II project as it will be within

existing plant in an area of 166.01 ha.






Water Requirement

Line-I

The total water requirement for existing plant and mine including colony is about

1700 m3/day. No additional water is required for proposed enhancement.

Line-II

The water requirement for proposed cement plant is about 1000 m3/day. This will

be sourced from Sutlej River which is about 2.5 km away from plant site from the

existing allocation of 3500 m3/day.

Power Requirement

Line-I

The total power requirement for the existing 2.54 MTPA cement plant is met from

grid supply to the extent of 30 MW. No increase in connected and contracted

power load is envisaged for the proposed clinker enhancement.

Line-II

The power requirement for the proposed cement plant (2.5 MTPA clinker and 1.5

cement) is approximately 25 MW. This will be met from 132 KV grid line.

Raw Material Requirement

Line-I and Line-II

The major raw material requirement for proposed enhancement and expansion

will be limestone, laterite/iron ore, and coal. The details of raw materials

requirement, the source and mode of transportation are provided in Table-10.2.

TABLE-10.2

RAW MATERIALS AND SOURCE

Raw Material

Existing Line-I

Clinker Production Enhancement (2.97 to 3.5 MTPA) Line-I

Proposed Line-II MTPA

Integrated Plant Requirement MTPA


Limestone 4.50 0.75 3.9 9.15 Captive limestone mine

Pipe conveyor belt + covered conveyor belt

Laterite 0.06 0.01 0.05 0.12 Madhya Pradesh

Rail/ Road

Coal/petcock /imported

0.52 0.09 0.45 1.06 MP/Bihar/South Africa Coal

Rail/ Road

Fly ash 0.41 - 0.5 0.91 Roper power plants in the vicinity

Road

Gypsum 0.10 - 0.075 0.175 Rajasthan Rail/ Road






Manpower

Line-I

Additional manpower required for the proposed enhancement will be nil. The

existing plant manpower is about 956 nos including skilled and unskilled workers.

No addition to the manpower above is envisaged, certain amount of contract

labour would be required for carrying out the activities such as loading material

from trucks, for loading of cement on to trucks and other miscellaneous works. It

is however, envisaged that the actual work of loading and unloading operations

will be given on contract basis which is at practice at the operating plant.

Line-II

The manpower required for the proposed project during construction phase will be

about 2000 and during operation phase will be about 250 persons. In addition to

the requirement of manpower estimated above, certain amount of contract labour

would be required for carrying out the activities such as loading material from

trucks, for loading of cement on to trucks and other miscellaneous works. It is

however, envisaged that the actual work of loading and unloading operations will

be given on contract basis.

10.5 Baseline Environmental Status

The baseline data monitoring studies have been carried out for three months

covering pre-monsoon season 2015 (March 2015 to May 2015).

10.5.1 Land Use/Land Cover

Based on the census report, 10 km radial distance around this plant centre has

been considered in the study. The revenue forest land is 15730 ha (40.94%) of

the total geographic area. The irrigated land admeasures to about 1798 ha in the

study area which works out to be 4.68 % of total study area. The un-irrigated

land admeasures about 6280 ha and works out to about 16.35 % of the total

study area and 19.71% cultivable wastelands.

There will not be any additional land requirement for the expansion. The plant

site is already under industrial land use category.

10.5.2 Soil Quality

Eight soil samples were collected and analyzed in and around the plant area to

assess the present soil quality of the region. The pH of the soil indicates that the

soil is slightly alkaline to moderately alkaline in nature. The nitrogen

concentration was observed to be in the range of very less to less category.

Phosphorous concentration was observed to be in the range of medium to on an

avg. sufficient category. Potassium concentration was observed to be in the range

of less to more than sufficient category. Based on the results, it is evident that

the soils are not contaminated by any industrial pollution sources.






10.5.3 Meteorology

Meteorological data at the site was monitored during March to May 2015

representing pre-monsoon season of 2015. It was observed that the during study

period, temperature ranged from 13.10C to 38.50C and the relative humidity

recorded in the range of 46% to 88%.

10.5.4 Ambient Air Quality

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) was carried out at eleven locations with a

frequency of two days per week for three months during pre-monsoon season of

2015. The minimum and maximum values of PM10 were observed in the range of

33.7-67.4 g/m3. The observations indicate that the concentrations of PM10, PM2.5,

SO2, NOx and CO in the ambient air are well within the National Ambient Air

Quality (NAAQ) standards.

10.5.5 Water Quality

To assess the physical and chemical properties of water in the region, water

samples from eight ground water and four surface water locations were collected

and analysed from various water sources around the project site.

Ground Water

The pH of the water samples collected ranges in between 7.1 to 7.9;

Total hardness was observed to be ranging from 66 to 224 mg/l. The minimum

hardness (66 mg/l) was recorded at GW4 and the maximum (224 mg/l) was

recorded at GW6;

Chlorides were found to be in the range of 8.0 mg/l to 59.6 mg/l, the minimum

concentration of chlorides (8.0 mg/l) was observed at GW1, whereas the

maximum value of 59.6 mg/l was observed at GW6;

Sulphates were found to be in the range of 6.2 mg/l to 26.4 mg/l. The

minimum value observed at GW4 (6.2 mg/l) whereas the maximum value

observed at GW6 (26.4 mg/l); and

The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) concentrations were found to be ranging in

between 205 to 605 mg/l, the minimum TDS observed at GW4 (205 mg/l) and

maximum concentration of TDS observed at GW6 (605 mg/l).

The results indicate ground water is in conformity with IS-10500 standards and

there is no evidence of any industrial contamination.

Surface Water

The analysis results indicate that the pH values were found to be 7.1 to 7.4;






DO was observed to be in the range of 5.9 to 6.2 mg/l. The TDS was observed

in the range of 150 mg/l to 265 mg/l, the minimum TDS value was observed

at SW3, and where as maximum value was observed at SW4;

The chlorides and Sulphates were found to be in the range of 7.6 to 15.1 mg/l

and 7.6 to 10.2 mg/l, respectively;

Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 ranges between 45 to 87 mg/l. The

concentration of nitrate fluctuates between 3.6 to 10.1 mg/l; and

The calcium & magnesium were found to be in the range of 12.1 to 18.2 mg/l

and 3.2 to 10.2 mg/l, respectively. Iron values are found 0.03 – 0.11 mg/l and

zinc is found 0.01 – 0.03 mg/l.

The results indicate that the surface water is in conformity with IS:10500

standards and there is no evidence of any industrial contamination.

10.5.6 Noise Levels

Ambient noise levels were measured at nine locations around the project site. The

daytime and night time noise levels in all the residential locations were observed to

be within the permissible limits.

10.5.7 Ecological Environment

Based on the field studies and review of published literature, it is observed that

study area comprises of 21 protected forests and two Wildlife Sanctuaries. The

core zone (plant site) of the study area does not harbour any Schedule-I species

or migratory corridors of any fauna.

As the two protected areas viz; Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary and Majhtal Wildlife

Sanctuary fall within the study area have species of conservation importance and

thus shall need a Conservation Plan.

A conservation plan has been prepared. A greenbelt development plan has also

been prepared and the native and local species have been selected for

compensatory afforestation.

10.5.8 Social Environment

The study area (10 km radius) area has a total population of 90,084 according to

2011 census. Total male population is about 51.79% and total female population

is around 48.21%. The average literacy rate 70.56% in the region.

10.6 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

10.6.1 Topography

The proposed expansion of cement plant area is within the existing plant and is

representing a hilly topography. The topographic elevation is about 1430-1500 m






above msl. However, no major additional impacts on topography due to proposed

project are envisaged.

10.6.2 Air Quality

Particulate matter will be the major source of pollution. However following

measures are undertaken and will be adopted for proposed expansion to minimize

the pollution:

Adequate capacity of air pollution control devices (Bag houses & ESPs) are

installed at all point source to control the dust emissions;

Raw materials, intermediate product and product will be stored in closed,

covered yard/silos;

The bag filters are installed at all the transfer points to control the fugitive

emissions from transportation and conveying of the material; and

The dedicated water tanker, accompanied with water spraying system will be

deployed to control the fugitive emissions from the roads (internal as well as

external).

The above control measures will be further strengthened in Line-I and newly

established in proposed Line-II plant as well.

10.6.3 Water and Wastewater

As the proposed expansion project will be operated on the dry process and air is

used as cooling media, no wastewater will be generated. Additional domestic

wastewater generated due to expansion of cement plant project will also be

treated in the existing Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and used in greenbelt

development.

10.6.4 Noise Environment

Any industrial complex in general consists of several sources of noise in clusters or

single. These clusters / single source may be housed in buildings of different

dimensions made of different materials or installed in open or under sheds. The

noise levels at the source will be in the range of 70-90 dB(A). For computing the

noise levels at various distances with respect to the plant site, noise levels are

predicted using a user friendly model.

Noise levels are mainly generated from raw mill, kiln, coal mill, compressor

house, pump house, cement mill and packing plant. All the equipment are

designed to comply with the Factories Rules and Stipulations and will not exceed

90 dB (A) at 1 m distance.

10.6.5 Solid Waste Management

No solid waste is generated in the cement manufacturing process. Dust collected

from air pollution control equipment will be 100% recycled in process. Solid waste






in the form of sludge will be generated from the sewage treatment plant and

same will be used as manure for greenbelt development.

10.6.6 Flora and Fauna

The major ecologically sensitive aspects pertaining to the proposed clinker

production enhancement and expansion of cement plant project site are the

forest areas and the faunal diversity in the adjoining areas. The most important

and sensitive area are the two wildlife sanctuaries which harbours schedule-I

species. These protected areas fall within the boundary of the study area

although the core area does not harbour any scheduled species.

Impacts on Flora

Introduction of obnoxious or exotic species and increase in weed frequencies is an

important threat to the ecosystem functioning. These species might overwhelm

the local biodiversity and thus eliminate local species occurring in the adjoining

forest areas. There is likelihood of introducing exotic species due to proposed

project activity. Influx of humans and regular human movement from the project

area and the adjoining areas may result in introduction of obnoxious species. The

vehicular movement and road traffic also sometimes results in introduction of

unwanted species. Air emissions and increase in dust may also result in restricted

growth, regeneration and degradation of sensitive vegetation. These alterations

will have low impacts in the future course of proposed development, thus the

impacts will be low from ecosystem functioning point of view.

Impacts on Fauna

The study area has large species range and there is no occurrence of endemic

species in the core zone. If the project activities are not regulated, potential

negative impacts can be anticipated on the fauna due to increase in noise levels,

deterioration of air emissions, increase in dust levels, degradation of vegetation,

elicit hunting and road kills.

Initially wildlife management plan was prepared and approved by the Chief

Wildlife Warden Himachal Pradesh for Rs.54.12 Lakhs for taking remedial

measures. The plan is under implementation and being executed by the wild life

department. Further, a conservation plan with a provision of Rs.50.0 Lakhs for

Schedule-I wildlife species under wildlife (protection) Act, 1972 has been

prepared in consultation with state wildlife department.

10.6.7 Socio-Economic Aspects

The project will definitely help for the improvement of the socio-economic status

of the society in the region by extending the direct/indirect employment

opportunities. The project will also increase the development of ancillary and

related small-scale industries in the adjoining areas.






10.6.8 Occupational Safety and Health

Occupational safety and health is very closely related to productivity and good

employer-employee relationship. The main factors of occupational health are

fugitive dust and noise. Safety of employee during operation and maintenance

will be taken care. PPEs such as dust masks, ear plugs/earmuffs will be provided

to workmen. Hence, no significant impact on health of workmen is envisaged.

10.7 Conclusion

The proposed expansion of cement plant project (Line-I and Line-II) will have

marginal impacts on the local environment with proper mitigation measures with

the effective implementation of the environment management measures as

suggested in the EIA/EMP report and as recommended by MoEF, CPCB and State

Pollution Control Board, the negative impacts will be minimized to a great extent.

However, development of this project has beneficial impact/effects in terms of

growth in regional economy, transform the region's economy from predominantly

agricultural to significantly industrial, increase Government earnings and

revenues and accelerate the pace of industrial development in the region.

The proposed expansion of cement plant project will provide direct employment

to a large number of personnel. This project will also generate indirect

employment to a considerable number of families, who will render their services

for the employees of the project.

The project will also encourage ancillary industries in the region, which will not

only increase the employment potential but also the economic base of the region

will be further strengthened.

Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project, is most advantageous to

the region as well as to the nation.




Chapter-11 Disclosure of Consultants


11.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

11.1 Introduction

Studies were carried out by several institutions of different disciplines during the

preparation of the EIA/EMP report based on the Expert Appraisal Committee

(EAC) prescribed Terms of Reference. The list of consultants involved in different

studies is given below:

Sr. No. Study Consultants

1 Environmental Impact Assessment study

including Environment Management Plan

Vimta Labs Ltd,

Hyderabad

The profile of the Consultants is given below:

11.2 Vimta Labs Limited-Environment Consultant

Vimta Labs Limited is a leading multi-disciplinary testing and research

laboratory in India. Vimta provides contract research and testing services in the

areas of environmental assessment, analytical testing, clinical research, pre-

clinical (animal) studies, clinical reference lab services, advanced molecular

biology services and research & development studies.

The Environment Division has been in the forefront of its vision to provide

better environment through guiding and assisting the industry for sustainable

development. A stalwart in the mission to protect and preserve the natural

resources on earth for future generations, it offers extensive research and

consultancy services in the field of environment. With its rich experience, multi-

disciplinary expertise and with the support of its state-of the-art analytical

equipment, the services offered by the division are wide ranging and

encompasses entire gamut of environment management and monitoring services.

With its emphasis on quality services over the years, it has evolved itself into a

single reference point in India for comprehensive environmental services.

11.2.1 The Quality Policy

Vimta is committed to good professional practices and quality of operations in

its testing, validation and research services;

Vimta shall ensure customer satisfaction by maintaining independence,

impartiality and integrity in its operations;

Vimta shall provide the services in accordance with national and international

norms;

Vimta shall implement quality systems as per ISO/IEC 17025 and applicable

Good Laboratory Practices (GLPs) & Good Clinical Practices (GCPs), to

generate technically valid results/data; and






Vimta shall ensure that all its personnel familiarize with the policies and

procedures of the quality system and implement the same in their work.

11.2.2 Major Milestones and Accreditations

1984–Registered with an initial investment of Rs.200,000=00

1985–Recognized by ISI (now known as Bureau of Indian Standards)

1987–Qualified by the criteria of Ministry of Environment and Forests, India

and was notified as one of the first 14 Standard Environmental Laboratories

published in the Gazette of India

1988–Licensed for carrying out tests on Drugs and Pharmaceuticals

1991–Accredited by NCTCF, DST, Government of India (the forerunner of

NABL)

1995–Accredited by NABL, India under its revised scheme, certified by

Standards Australia, Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC Guide 25 and

ISO 9002

1996–GLP Compliance

1998–Accreditation by GOSSTANDART and joint venture for certification of

Food Exports with ROSTEST, Russia

1998–World Bank Recognition

2002–ANVISA Brazil Certification

2003–USFDA accepts Vimta Bioequivalence study report. Showcased Vimta at

AAPS (USA) and ICSE-CPHI (Germany)

2003–Recognized by Saudi Arabian Standards Organization

2004–Enters Gulf market-Executes a contract for environmental consultancy

in Kuwait

2006–Expands its overseas activities. Undertakes environmental assignment

in Saudi Arabia

2006–Undertakes environmental impact assignment in Tanzania, Africa

2008–Has been Pre-Qualified by World Health Organization (WHO)

2008–Undertaken environmental impact assessment studies in Cameroon,

Africa

11.2.3 Services Offered

Spread over 70,000 sq.ft lush green garden premises at Cherlapally, Hyderabad

(India), the scientifically designed and meticulously groomed infrastructural

facility of the Central Laboratory of VIMTA has the most sophisticated

instruments backed by an excellent team of professionals.

Over 150,000 sq. ft. of world class research laboratory is also under operation at

Biotech Park-Genome Valley, Hyderabad (India). Having all the facilities under

one roof is perhaps the only one of its kind in South Asia in the contract testing

and research sector.






VIMTA Central Laboratory, Cherlapally, Hyderabad VIMTA Life Sciences, Genome Valley, Hyderabad

Vimta offers services under the following specializations:

Environment;

Analytical;

Clinical Reference Lab;

Clinical Research;

Preclinical;

Molecular Biology; and

Research and Development.

The environment division of VIMTA Labs Limited (VLL) has its presence all over

India and other countries including a strong association with international

consultants like Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC), Kennametal

Inc.-USA, Rudal Blanchard–UK, E&E Solutions–Japan, NAPESCO & Kuwait

National Petroleum Corporation–Kuwait, Marafiq and Haif Consultants–Saudi

Arabia and others. Vimta Labs Limited has the following credentials:

Recognition by BIS, India;

Recognition by Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India and

various State Pollution Control Boards (wherever applicable);

Recognition by Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India (NABL);

Recognition by Ministry of Defence, Govt. of India;

Recognition by APEDA, Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India;

Recognition by Saudi Arabia Standard Organization (SASO), Saudi Arabia;

Recognition from NEMC, Tanzania;

Accreditation by NCTCF;

Certification from Standard Australia;

Recognition from ANVISA Brazil;

Recognition from USFDA;

Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC 17025;

Quality Assurance Services as per ICH Guidelines; and

Recognition by World Health Organization (WHO).






11.2.4 Services of Environment Division

Environment essentially being a multi-disciplinary science, the range of services

offered by the division are also comprehensive and caters to the needs of

industry, pollution control agencies, regulatory authorities and in a larger pursuit

of a green globe. The services under environment include:

Site selection and liability studies;

Environmental impact assessments;

Environment management plans;

Carrying capacity based regional studies;

Environmental audits;

Solid and hazardous waste management;

Risk assessment (MCA, HAZON, HAZOP) & disaster management plans;

Occupational health and safety, industrial hygiene;

Environmental monitoring for air, meteorology, water, soil, noise, ecology and

socio-economics;

Industrial emission source monitoring;

Offshore sampling and analysis of marine water and sediments;

Marine ecological studies;

Marine impact assessment;

Rehabilitation and resettlement studies;

Forestry and ecological studies;

Geological and hydro-geological studies;

Land use/land cover studies based on remote sensing;

Socio-economic studies;

Due diligence studies;

Industrial epidemiological studies;

Wasteland management studies; and

Study on bio-indicators.

The services under Environmental Chemistry include:

Analysis of water, wastewater, soil, solid waste, hazardous waste as per

international codes;

Source emissions and work zone air/noise quality monitoring;

Analysis of SVOCs, VOCs, PAH, BTEX, AOX, PCB’s, TCLP metals, TOC etc.;

Categorization of hazardous waste; and

Pesticide residue analysis.

11.2.5 Facilities of Environment Division

Vimta-Environment Division is located in scientifically designed Central Laboratory

with the state-of the-art modern facilities to offer vide range of services in indoor

and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization in the field of

Environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team

of professionals in the fields of science, engineering, ecology, meteorology, social

planning, geology & hydro-geology and environmental planning.

Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as Respirable Dust Samplers

(RDS), automatic weather monitoring stations, stack monitoring kits, personal






samplers, noise meters, portable water kits etc, the other major specialized

equipment include:

Monostatic Sodar–Designed by National Physical Laboratory, GOI;

Integrated Noise Level Meters–Quest, U.S.A;

Flue Gas Analyzers–Testo, Germany;

113-A Gravimetric Dust Sampler-Casella, London;

ICP AES–Varian, USA;

Gas Liquid Chromatographs with FID, ECD & pFPD–Varian, USA;

Gas Chromatograph with Mass Detector–Varian, USA;

Atomic Absorption Spectrometer [AAS]–Varian, USA;

PAS-AFC-123 instrument;

High Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC);

Laser Particle Size Analyzer;

Bomb Calorimeter;

Polarographs;

X-ray Fluorescent Spectrometer;

Flame Photometer;

Carbon Sulphur Analyzer;

Computerized Fatigue Testing Machine;

Electronic Universal Testing Machine;

Fourier Transmission Infrared Spectroscope; and

Water Flow Current Meter–make Lawrence & Mayo.

HIGH RESOLUTION GAS CHROMATOGRAPHS






11.2.6 Quality Systems

The basic fact that environment division and its supporting site laboratories are

accredited by NABL (IS0-17025) and Ministry of Environment and Forests, India

and by other international bodies stand testimony to its emphasis on Quality

Systems.

The details of the persons involved in the preparation of present EIA/EMP report

are presented below:





DETAILS OF PERSONNEL INVOLVED IN CURRENT EIA/EMP STUDY – VIMTA LABS LTD

Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience

1 Mr. M. Janardhan M.Tech (Env. Engg) Vice President & Head (Env)

Co-ordination About 24 years of experience in the field of environmental management and environmental engineering

2 Dr. B. Chandra Sekhar M.Sc., Ph.D Sr. Manager Co-ordination About 14 years of experience in the field of environmental management and modeling

3 Mr. G. V. Raghava Rao M.Tech (Env) Manager Expert About 15 years of experience in the field of environmental management and environmental engineering

4 Mr. S. Srinivas Goud M.S.W Group Leader Expert About 23 years of experience in the field of social impact assessment studies.

5 Ms. Durga Bhavani M. Sc., M.Tech (Env)

Group Leader Expert About 11 years of experience in the field of Environmental Management and Environmental Chemistry

6 Mr.K.V.Suryanarayana M. Sc., M.Tech (Env)

Sr. Environment Engineer

Expert About 12 years of experience in the field of Environmental Management and Environmental Chemistry, Remote Sensing and GIS

7 Dr. Mandar Nanajkar M. Sc., Ph.D (Ecology) Env Scientist Expert About 11 years of experience in ecological and biodiversity studies

8 Mr. S.Kishore Kumar M.Tech (Env) Group Leader Expert About 6 years of experience in the field of environment management and engineering

9 Mr. M. Raja Manohar M.Tech (Env ) Env Engineer Expert About 4 years of experience in the field of environment management and engineering

10 Dr. M. Subba Reddy Ph.D (Env. Chem) Sr. Scientist Expert About 5 years of experience in the field of Environmental Management and Environmental Chemistry

11 Mr. P.Rama Krishna M.Tech (env) Engineer Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environment Management

12 Mr. Ch. Narendra M.S.W Scientist Expert About 2 years of experience in the field of Social Impact Assessment Studies

13 Mr. M. Praveen Kumar M.E (Env) Engineer Expert About 1 year of experience in the field of environment management

14 Mr. J. Sunil Kumar M.Tech (Env) Engineer Expert About 1 year of experience in the field of environment management

15 Mr. K.Rajeswar M.Sc (Geo) Scientist Expert About 5 years of experience in the field of geology and hydrogeology

16 Mr. Sunki Srikanth M.Sc., M.Tech (Eco) Scientist Experts About 5 years of experience in the field of Ecology and Biodersity studies

17 Mr. Chavan Sanjay Kumar Laxman

M.Sc. (Env. Science) Scientist Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environmental Management and Environmental Chemistry

18 Ms. T. Ramya Devi B.Sc Quality Auditor Quality Check About 5 years of experience in quality assurance

19 Mr. P. Niranjan Babu B.Com Dy Manager Secretarial Support

About 25 years of experience in the field of environmental monitoring and secretarial support

20 Mr. P. Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Jr. Engineer Cartography About 15 years experience in the field of environmental management





Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience

and civil drawings

21 Mr. J. Rama Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Jr. Engineer Cartography About 14 years experience in the field of environmental management and civil drawings

Empanelled Experts

1 Mr. J. Rajendra Prasad M.Sc. Empanelled Consultant

Expert About 20 years of experience in the field of Land use studies, Remote Sensing and Hydrogeology

2 Mr. Rajgopal Krishnan M. Tech (Chemical Engg)

Empanelled Consultant

Expert About 42 years of experience in the field of Risk and Hazard assessment

3 Mr. V.K.Bhatnagar B.Sc (Mining

Engineer)

Empanelled

Consultant

Expert About 40 years of experience in the field of Mining

engineering, geology and soil

environmental impact assessment - himachal …hppcb.nic.in/jaypeebaga_eia.pdf · ·...

Documents